CF-Pump Station-CN 810506 HOGAN & RASOR, ,r,¢.
Engineers · Planners · Consultants
September 24, ls$1
Mr. James R. Elium, III
City Administrator
City of Coppell
Post Office Box 478
Coppell, Texas 75019
RE: Contract Documents
500,O00-Gallon Ground Storage Tank
and
High Service Pumping Facility
Dear Mr. Elium:
On Wednesday, September 23, 1981, Mr. Troy Glidewell requested the three (3)
sets of Contract Documents for the above referenced project, in our possession,
be returned to City Hall by the end of that day.
All of the Contract Documents for this project were picked-up and revised in
order to comply with the requirements of the Water Development Board.
As of this date, we have not received approval from the Water Development Board
that all revisions that have been made are in compliance.
Please be advised that pending final approval from the Water Development Board
the Contract Documents delivered to City Hall on Wednesday, September 23, 1981,
may or may not be complete.
Sincerely,
HOGAN & RASOR, INC.
Dennis R. Masters ~ y~'~[
DRM/fw
2730 Repubhc Bank Tower Dallas, Texas 75201 214.-742-5811
CITY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS,
SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF
500,000- GALLON
GROUND STORAGE TANK
AND
HIGH SERVICE PUMPING STATION
AUGUST 1980
HOGAN & RASOR, ~.~.
~n_qin~_~es · Pla~nees · (~on~ultancs
CITY OFFICIALS
- MAYOR
Andrew Brown, Jr.
'-- ALDERMEN
- Roy C. Brock
Orville Mayo
David Phillips
Glen White
Dale Ware
CITY ADMINISTRATOR
James R. Elium, III
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ADDENDA
NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
PROPOSAL
BID BOND
STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT
PERFORMANCE BOND
PAYMENT BOND
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS NO. 1 - EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS
NO. 2 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PROJECT DATA AND SAMPLES
NO. 3 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES
NO. 4 - SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
SITE WORK
NO. 1 - SITE CLEARING
NO. 2 - EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES
NO. 3 - TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING FOR UTILITIES
NO. 4 - TOPSOILING, FINISHED GRADING AND SPRIGGING
NO. 26 - ACCESS ROAD AND PARKING AREAS
STRUCTURAL
NO. 1 - CAST-IN-PLACE REINFORCED CONCRETE
... NO. 15 - COCRETE FOR UTILITIES
NO. 25 - CONSTRUCTION JOINTS AND WATERSTOPS
NO. 30 - TESTING AND STERILIZATION
- PIPING NO. 17D- DUCTILE IRON PIPE, GATE VALVES AND FIRE HYDRANT
NO. 34 - PRETENSIONED CONCRETE CYLINDER PIPE
MECHANICAL
NO. 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
NO. 2 - PLUMBING
NO. 3 - VALVES - GENERAL STATEMENT
NO. 4 - METERING EQUIPMENT, INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
NO. 5 - HIGH SERVICE PUMPS AND MOTORS
NO. 6 - ALTERNATING CURRENT MOTORS
NO. 7 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
NO. 8 - MISCELLANEOUS METALS
ARCH I TECTU RAL
NO. 1 - CONCRETE NO. 1
NO. 2 - MASONRY WORK
NO. 4 - ROOFING AND SHEET METAL
NO. 5 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS, FRAMES AND HARDWARE
NO. 8 - PAINTING AND CAULKING
ELECTRICAL NO. 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS
NO. 2 - BASIC M~TERIALS AND METHODS'
NO. 3 - SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION
NO. 4 - LIGHTING
HOGAN & RASOR, INC.
2730 Republic National Bank Tower
Dallas, Texas
CITY OF COPPELL, TEXAS
500,000 - GALLON
GROUND STORAGE TANK
AND
.... HIGH SERVICE PUMPING STATION
ADDENDUM NO. 1
The plans, specifications and contract documents at the above referenced
project are hereby amended as follows:
The lump sum price bid for all work covered under this
contract shall include the installation of the attached
Sonic Level Transmitter to be furnished by the City of
Dallas, complete with conduit to the Control Building
and all other related appurtenances. The exact location
of said installation shall be determined by the Engineer.
THIS ADDENDUM SHALL BE ATTACHED TO AND MADE A PART OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
AND ACKNOWLEDGED WITH THE BIDDERS PROPOSAL.
ADDENDUM NO. 1 ISSUED BY:
HOGAN & RASOR~ INC.
2730 Republic National Bank Tower
Dallas, Texas
CITY OF COPPELL, TEXAS
500,000 GALLON
GROUND STORAGE TANK
AND
HIGH SERVICE Pb~PING STATION
ADDENDUM NO. 2
The plans, specifications and contract documents of the above
referenced project are hereby amended as follows:
1. The following Item No. 56 shall be added to the Special
Conditions, Page SC-20.
-- 56. INSULATION
A. General All exposed exterior piping shall be in-
sulated with 1½ inches of fiberglass insulation wrapped
in heat tape and covered with a white metal jacket. Ail
insulation shall be continuous through wall and floor
openings and sleeves.
B. Materials All fiberglass pipe insulation shall be
Johns-Manville FLA~.~-SAFE or approved equal. The in-
- tivity not
sulation shall have an average thermal gonduc
to exceed 0.22 BTU-in._per sq. ft. oer F per hour at a
mean temperature of 75 F. The heat element shall be
--- multiple standard resistance wires insulated with teflon
as manufactured by Brisco Manufacturing Company or equal
and shall be furnished in lengths and watt densities as
required based on Contractor field measurements. Systems
shall be designed to operate on 120 volts. Thermostatic
controls shall be provided for all pipe heating cables
to maintain piping 8t 40v F. Thermostat shall be automatic
snap action with 60 F differential, controlled by a re-
mote bulb thermostat. The piping jacket shall be all
purpose white metal.
C. Application The insulation shall be applied over
clean dry pipe with all joints butted firmly together.
Longitudinal jacket laps and the butt strips shall be
smoothly secured with Benjamin Foster 85-20 adhesive.
Where outward clinch staples are required a brush coat of
Benjamin Foster 85-20 shall be applied over the staples.
D. Fittings, Valves, Unions, Etc. Ail fittings, valves
and flanges for exposed exterior piping, shall be insulated
with pre-molded pipe insulation with metal jackets. The
insulation shall be of a thickness equal to the adjacent
pipe insulation.
2. Construction Plans, Sheet 8 of 12, Access Door and Ladder,
Bracket Section.
The spacing for the support brackets on
the Access Ladder shall include one (1)
bracket each at the top and bottom, and
the remainder shall have brackets spaced
@ 3'-0" O.C.
3. Construction Plans, Sheet 8 of 12 and 11 of 12, Sump Pumps.
The motors for the WEDA Fully Submersible
Electric Drainage Pumps shall be revised
from 110 Volt to 240 Volt.
On both the Sump Pumo Manhole and Meter
Vault, the 2-inch discharge shall be
-' secured to the manhole lid or concrete
top in a manner as approved by the
ENGINEER.
4. Control Building Detail, Sheet 9 of 12 Exhaust Vent and
Intake Vent Installation.
The attached detail shall be utilized
in the installation of the exhaust
vent and intake vent through the roof
slab of the control building.
-2-
5. The City of Coppell is currently underway with their audit
and preparing information to gain the best bond rating
possible for financing this project. This bond rating work
is expected to be completed within 60 to 90 days. Therefore,
the u~it prices submitted for this project sha%l be con-
sidered valid for ninety (90) days after the date of the
bid opening as opposed to the sixty (60) days referred to by
Item No. 5 of the Special Conditions, Page SC-1. The City
will make every effort to award the project to the lowest
qualified bidder as soon as possible.
THIS ADDENDUM SHALL BE ATTACHED TO AN~ ,MADE A PART OF THE CONTRACT
DOCUMENTS AND ACKNOI~%EDGED WITH THE BIDDERS PROPOSAL.
ADDENDUM NO. 2 ISSUED BY
-3-
ADDENDUM MO.
HOGAN & RASOR, ~n~
Engi~ers · Planners · Consultants
NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
FOR
CONSTRUCTION OF WATERWORKS IMPROVEMENTS
AT
COPPELL, TEXAS
Sealed bids addressed to the Honorable Mayor and City Aldermen of Coppell, Texas,
(Owner), will be received at the office of the City Administrator, City Hall,
Coppell, Texas, beginning 8:00 a.m., Monday, September 15, 1980, until 2:00 p.m.,
September 18, 1980, and then publicly opened and read aloud immediately there-
after for furnishing all labor, material and equipment, and performing all work
necessary for the construction of a 500,O00-Gallon Ground Storage Tank complete
with Sump Pump, High Service Pumps, metering, control equipment and all other
related appurtenances.
Proposal shall be accompanied by a cashier's check or certified check upon a
national or state bank in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total
actual bid price payable without recourse to the City of Coppell, or a bid bond
in the same amount from a reliable surety company as a guarantee that the bidder
will enter into a contract and execute performance bonds within ten (10) days
after notice of award of contract to them.
The successful bidder must furnish performance bond and payment bond upon the
forms provided in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the contract
price from an approved surety company holding a permit from the State of Texas,
to act as a surety or other surety or sureties acceptable to the Owner.
The contract shall be awarded to the lowest responsible bidder; however, the
right is reserved, as the interests of the Owner may require, to reject any
and all bids, and to waive any informality in bids received.
The low bidder shall be prepared to submit such evidence as the Owner may re-
quire to establish his experience, possession of such equipment, qualification
of personnel, and financial responsibility necessary to prosecute the work on
this project in an expeditious, safe, and satisfactory manner.
Plans, Specifications, and Bidding Documents may be secured from the Office
of Hogan & Rasor, Inc., 2730 Republic National Bank Tower, Dallas, Texas 75201,
on deposit of Twenty-five Dollars ($25.00) per set which sum so deposited will
be refunded provided the provisions of the specifications regarding the return
of such documents are complied with.
CITY OF COPPELL, TEXAS
Andrew Brown, Jr., Mayor
This notice to be published in the Coppell Star on Thursday, August 21, 1980 and
Thursday, September 4, 1980.
Notarized statements as to dates of publication to be furnished to the City
Administrator upon completion of publication.
PROPOSAL
TO
CITY OF COPPELL, TEXAS
For The Construction Of
500, O00-GALLON
GROUND STORAGE TANK
IN
COPPELL, DALLAS-DENTON COUNTY, TEXAS
The undersigned, as bidder, declares that the only person or
parties interested in this proposal as principals are those named here-
in, that this proposal is made without collusion with any other person,
firm, or corporation~ that he has carefully examined the form of con-
tract, Notice to Contractors, specifications and the plans therein
referred to, and has carefully examined the locations, conditions, and
classes of materials of the proposed work~ and agrees that he will pro-
vide all the necessary labor, machinery, tools, apparatus, and other
items incidental to construction, and will do all the work and furnish
all the materials called for in the contract and specifications in the
manner prescribed therein and according to the requirements of the
ENGINEER as therein set forth.
It is understood that the following quantities of work to be
done at unit prices are approximate only, and are intended principally
to serve as a guide in evaluating bids.
It is further agreed that the quantities of work to be done
at unit prices and material to be furnished may be increased or dimin-
ished as may be considered necessary, in the opinion of the ENGINEER,
to complete the work fully as planned and contemplated, and that all
quantities of work whether increased or decreased are to be performed
at the unit prices set forth below except as provided for in the
specifications.
It is further agreed that lump sum prices may be increased to
cover additional work ordered by the ENGINEER, but not shown on the
plans or required by the specifications, in accordance with the provi-
sions of the General Conditions. Similarly, they may be decreased to
cover deletion of work so ordered.
P& BS-1
It is understood and agreed that the work is to be completed
in full within the time designated in the Special Conditions of these
specifications.
Accompanying this proposal is a (certified or cashier's check
payable to the OWNER) (Bid Bond) in the amount of F±ve Percent Greatest
Dollars ($ 5%G.A.B. ).
The bid security accompanying this proposal shall be returned
to the bidder, unless in case of the acceptance of the proposal the
bidder shall fail to execute a contract and file performance and pay-
ment bonds within ten (10) days after its acceptance, in which case
the bid security shall become the property of the OWNER, and shall be
considered as payment for damages due to delay and other inconveniences
suffered by the OWNER on account of such failure of the bidder.
P & BS-2
BID SCHEDULE
BASE BID
The undersigned agrees to construct a new 500,O00-Gallon Concrete
Ground Storage Tank complete with all related appurtenances as shown
on the Plans or as specified and described in this proposal for the
lump sum price of: Fottr Hundred Eighty Nine Thousand Nine Hundred
Ninety Eight Dollars and No cents.
(Script) (Script)
$ 489,998. O0
(Figures)
ALTERNATE BID (See Special Conditions Item No. 54)
The undersigned agrees to construct a new 500,O00-Gallon Concrete
Ground Storage Tank complete with all related appurtenances as shown
on the Plans or as specified and described in this proposal for the
lump sum price of: Five Hundred Five Thousand Eight Hundred
Eighty Five Dollars and No cents.
--(Script) (Script) -
505,885.00
(Figures)
P & BS-3
The right is reserved, as the interest of the OWNER may
require, to award a contract for this project to a qualified low
bidder, or to reject any and all bids and to waive any informality
in bids received.
Since the work on this project is being performed for a
governmental body and function, the OWNER will issue to the CONTRACTOR
a certificate of exemption for payment for the four per cent (4%) State
Sales Tax on materials incorporated in this construction project. Each
bidder shall include the following information in this proposal.
1. Anticipated cost of materials to be incorporated in the
construction of this project.
2. Anticipated cost of labor, profit and all other costs
for this construction project.
Cost of Cost of Total Amount
Materials Labor, Profit, etc. of Bid
Base Bid $ 293,998.80 $ 195,999.20 $489,998.00
Alternate
Bi d $ 303,531. O0 $ 202,354. O0 $ 505,885. O0
In connection with the major items of materials to be fur-
nished and installed, the undersigned does expressly agree that the
Bid includes the furnishing and installing of the materials furnished
- by one of the suppliers listed in the specifications as qualified sup-
pliers of the particular item or an approved equal, and that the par-
ticular supplier of equipment which the undersigned proposes to furnish
will be listed in the Schedule of Major Material Suppliers found below.
SCHEDULE OF .MAJOR MATERIALS - SUPPLIERS FOR BASE BID
High Service Pumps Smith Pump_ Co.
Motors Smith Pump Co.
Sump Pumps Texas Pt~s
Ductile-Iron Pipe American Cast Iron Pipe
Pretensioned Conc. Cyl. Pipe Texas Industries
P.V.C. Pipe Metroplastics, Inc.
Control Equipment L & W Utilities
Metering Equipment L & W Utilities
Gate Valves Industrial International
Bernhard & Associates
Butterfly Valves
Anti-freeze Yard Hydrant Metroplex Utility Supply Co.
P & BS-4
In the event of the award of a contract to the undersigned,
the undersigned will furnish performance and payment_ bonds for the full
amount of the contract, to secure proper compliance with the terms and
provisions of the contract with sureties offered by
to insure and guarantee the work until final completion and acceptance,
and to guarantee payment of all lawful claims for labor performed and
material furnished in the fulfillment of the contract.
The work proposed to be done shall be accepted when fully
completed and finished in accordance with the plans and specifications,
to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER.
The undersigned certifies that the bid prices contained in
this proposal have been carefully checked and are submitted as correct
and final.
NOTE: Unit and lump sum prices must be shown in words and figures
for each item listed in this proposal, and in the event of
discrepancy, the words shall prevail.
Receipt is hereby acknowledged of the following addenda to
the contract documents.
Addendum No. 1 dated Received 9-05-80
Addendum No. 2 dated Received 9-11-80
- Addendum No. 3 dated Received
Addendum No. 4 dated Received
Addendum No. 5 dated Received
This is a proposal of ContracC 5tttlde~$ , a Corporation
organized and existing under the laws of the State of ?eJca$ ,
or a Partnership, consisting of
or an Individual doing business as
Jef
Vice
(Title)
814 W. Shady Grove Road
(Street Address)
Grand Prairie, Texas 75050
Seal and Authorization (City and State)
(If a Corporation) 214-254-3126
( lelephone Number)
P & BS-5
I! 11 INSURANCE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA
PHILADELPHIA PENNSYLVANIA
Proposal or Bid Bond
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT WE CONTRACT BUILDERS
as principal, and the INSURANCE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA, a corporation organized and existing under the
laws of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, having its principal place of business at Philadelphia, Pa., as surety, are held
and firmly bound unto
CITY OF COPPELL, TEXAS
as obtigee, in the penal sum of FIVE PERCENT OF THE GREATEST AMOUNT BID (5% GAB)
DOLLARS, lawful money of the United States of America, for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we bind
- ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
SIGNED, sealed and dated this 18TH day of September A.D. 19 80
WHEREAS, the said principal is herewith submitting proposal for
500,000 Gallon Ground Storage Tank
THE CONDITION OF THE ABOVE OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the aforesaid principal shall be awarded the
contract, the said principal will within the period specified therefor, or, if no period be specified, within ten (10) days
_ after the notice of such award enter into a contract and give bond for the faithful performance of the contract, then this
obligation shall be null and void, otherwise the principal and the surety will pay unto the obligee the difference in money
between the amount of the bid of the said principal and the amount for which the obligee may legally contract with
another party to perform the work if the latter amount be in excess of the former: in no event shall the liability hereunder
exceed the penal sum hereof.
PROVIDED AND SUBJECT TO THE CONDITION PRECEDENT, that any suits at law or proceedings in equity
brought or to be brought against the Surety to recover any claim hereunder must be instituted and service had upon the
Surety within ninety (90) days after the acceptance of said bid of the Principal by the Obligee.
CONTRACT BUILDERS
INSURANI~E COMPANY O.F/ NORTH AMERICA
',_ l/l/ !t; (;L. '/', '7 '-'""'----
W. LAWRENCE BROWN, ATTORNEY IN FACT
1~5-1946 PRINTED IN
POWER OF ATTORNEY
INSURANCE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA
PHILADELPHIA, PA.
Know all men by these presents: That INSURANCE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA,
a corporation of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, having its principal office in the City of Philadelphia,
Pennsylvania, pursuant to the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of the said Company
on May 28, 1975, to wit:
"RESOLVED, pursuant to Articles 3.6 and 5.1 of the By-Laws, the following Rules shall govern the execution for the Company of
bonds, undertakings, recognizances, contracts and other writings in the nature thereof:
~,1) That the President, or any Vice-President, Assistant Vice-President, Resident Vice-President or Attorney-in-Fact, may execute for
and in behalf of the Company any and all bonds, undertakings, recognizances, contracts and other writings in the nature thereof, the
same to be attested when necessary by the Secretary, an Assistant Secretary or a Resident Assistant Secretary and the seal of the
Company affixed thereto; and that the President or any Vice-President may appoint and authonze Resident Vice-Presidents, Resident
Assistant Secretaries and Attorneys-in-Fact to so execute or attest to the execution of all such writings on behalf of the Company and
to affix the seal of the Company thereto.
(2) Any such writing executed in accordance with these Rules shall be as binding upon the Company in any case as though signed
by the President and attested by the Secretary.
(3) The signature of the President or a Vice-President and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile on any power of
attorney granted pursuant to this Resolution, and the signature of a certifying officer and the seal of the Company may be affixed by
facsimile to any certificate of any such power, and any such power or certificate bearing such facsimile signature and seal shall be valid
and binding on the Company.
(4) Such Resident Officers and Attorneys-in-Fact shall have authority to certify or verify copies of this Resolution, the By-Laws of the
Company, and any affidavit or record of the Company necessary to the discharge of their duties.
(5) The passage of this Resolution does not revoke any earlier authority granted by Resolution of the Board of Directors on June 9,
1953."
does hereby nominate, constitute and appoint H.A. GIBSON, JOF. BRUCF., ROBF, R.T D. WHITF.,
W. LAWRENCE BROWN, JANICE Go CORREY and DOROTHY VALEK, all of the City of Dallas,
State of Texas
-- , each individually if there be more than one named,
its true and lawful attorney-in-fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver on its behalf, and as its act and deed
any and all bonds, undertakings, recognizances, contracts and other writings in the nature thereof. And the
._ execution of such writings in pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon said Company, as fully
and amply as if they had been duly executed and acknowledged by the regularly elected officers of the
Company at its principal office.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said ........................... _C....._.D..A.~.._D...~.._..~.. ........................ Vice-President,
has hereunto subscribed his name and affixed the corporate seal of the said INSURANCE COMPANY OF
NORTH AMERICA this ............... 16~._h._ ........................ day of ........ D~-.l=~ber .......................... 19 ..... .7.8 ........
- INSURANCE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA
(SEAL) by ............ .C. ..... .D.A.N__I...E..L.....D._..R~..~ ..........................................
__ Vice-President
STATE OF PENNSYLVANIA J
COUNTY OF PHILADELPHIA~ ss.
On this ............ ..~..6..t.~ ...................... day of ........... ..O_.c...t..o..~...e..~. ................. A. D. 19...~..8. ........, before me, a Notary
Public of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, in and for the County of Philadelphia, came ................................................
C. DANIEL DRAKE
.............................................................................................................................................. , Vice-President of the INSURANCE
COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA to me personally known to be the individual and officer who executed the preceding
instrument, and he acknowledged that he executed the same; that the seal affixed to the preceding instrument is the
corporate seal of said Company; that the said corporate seal and his signature were duly affixed by the authority and
direction of the said corporation, and that Resolution, adopted by the Board of Directors of said Company, referred to
in the preceding instrument, is now in force.
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my official seal at the City of Philadelphia,
'- the day and year first above written. MAUREEN SCHELL
.' . :.- ~ ',o,. "- ~ Notary Public.
, %~t¥cbmmissionexpires August 13, 1979
-- ~ ._~*1~)~._~' undersigned, Assistant Secretary of INSURANCE COMPANY OF NORTH A~Jaf-,I~CA, do hereby certify that
~mt~rT~I~.I~OWER OF ATTORNEY of which the foregoing is a full true/~d correct co'~u.~ full force and effect
,~'~ *itness whereof, I have hereunto subscribed my name as ,~'s~.j~r~S-~retar~,-;n_~f~i~ corp, e~te sea'
' ,~j~;~i)"Oration, this ............ 1.8.t,D,.. day of Sep.t.. _e~....e...,~..,,~.. ..... 19....8...O........'~'/ y,// _
.s~-ll: 7,t75 Printed In U.S.A. Assistant Secretary
A RESOLUTION OF THE CITY OF COPPEL, TEXAS
RESOLUTION NO. 7/4 o~ /
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF COPP.r.?,L, ~EXAS:
SECTION 1.
That the Mayor of the City of CoppeD, Texas, the I4onoreble Andrew Brown,
Jr., be, and he is hereby authorized to execute on behalf of the City of Coppe]],
Texas, a contract with the Texas Water Development Board to sell to the Board, City
of Coppell water and sewer system revenue bonds Series 1981 in the aggregate princi~)al
amount of 1.2 Million Dollars.
--- SECTION 2.
That this resolution shall take effect immediately from and after its oassage.
DULY PASSED by the City Council of the City of Copp~!~l, ~x on the
ATTEST:
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
Unanimous consent of the shareholders of Contract Builders.
May 1, 1981
.... Pursuant to section 9.10A of the Texas Business Corporation
Act, the undersigned being all of the shareholders of Con-
tract Builders, a Texas Corporation, ("The Corporation") here-
_ by declares that when this unanimous consent has been signed,
the following resolution should be adopted to the same extent
and shall have the same force and effect as if adopted at a
regular meeting of the shareholders duly called and held for
the purpose of acting upon proposals to adopt such resolutions:
RESOLVED, THAT JEFF NOLEN, be authorized to negotiate and exe-
cute any and all contracts requiring an officer of Contract
Builders, to execute.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned have executed this unanimous
consent as of the date first written above.
- JEF~L~OLDER
ADELLE HOPKINS~, SECRETARY
STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT
As Adopted By
THE TEXAS SECTION OF THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS
October 7, 1971
Revised November 17, 1928
Revised April 15, 1932
Revised October 27, 1934
Revised October 19, 1945
Revised April 8, 1954
Revi~ed April 21, 1960
Revised October 7, 1971
Aoproved as tc Legal Form by
Legal Counsel
STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF. DALLAS
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this ~ //day of
A. D. 19 ~/, by and between the City of Coppell
of .the County of Dallas and State of Texas, acting through
its Mayor add City Council
.- thereunto duly authorized so to do,
Party of the First Part, hereinafter termed OWNER, and
Contract Builders
of the City of Grand Prairie , County of Dallas
and State of Texas . Party of the Second Part, hereinafter te~xned
CONTRACTOR.
WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments.-and agreements herein-
after mentioned, to be made and performed by the Party of the First Part (OWNER), and under
the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith, the said Party of the Second
Part (CONTRACTOR), hereby agrees with the said Party' of the First Part (OWNER) to
commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: For
fuznishimg_all labor, tools, n~terials a~d e~uir~ent, and performing all work .
necessary ~or the construction of a 500,000-Gallon Ground Storage Tank comple.te .with
Sunp pumb, High Service Pomps, metering, control equipment and all other relate~
e
~t~]~.~ Work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the General Conditions
of the Agreement and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all the materials,
supplies, machinery, equipme. L tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and other accessories
and services necessary to complete the said construction, in accordance with ~the conditions and
prices stated in the Proposal attached hereto, and in accordance with the Notice to Contractors,
G~neral and Special Conditions of Agreement, Plans and other drawings and printed or wr!tten
explanatory matter thereof, and the Specifications and addenda therefor, as prepared by. .
~ & RASOR, INC.
2730 Republic National Bank T~x.~er, Dallas, Texas 75201
herei, entitled the ENGINEER, each of which ha:~ been identified by the CONTRACTOR and
%he EN(;[NEER. t.gether with Ibc CONTRACTOR'.K wri[[en ProD-saL the General Condhions
.f thc Agreement, and the Performance a.d l'ayment B.mi.~ heret, att:wheal: ali of whk'h are made
a pari here-f a.d c. Hective;y evidvm'e and cm~slih, te ~he e.tirv contract.
SF-1 ® '~ ~'"' ~'. ^~ "~'
The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten (10) days after the date
written notice to do so shall have been given to him, and to substantially complete the same
calendar days
within 2/+0 J~after the date of the written notice to commence work, subject
to such extensions of time as are provided by the General and Special Conditions.
THE OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds the price or prices shown in
the proposal, which forms a part of this contract, such payments to be subject to the General
and Special Conditions of the contract.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this Agreement in
the year and day first above written.
CITY OF COPPELL, ~ CONTRACT BU~.nERS
AT. ST: Andrew Bro~,l~Iayor .... Jef~f~Ndle ~xec Vice Pres
. Adellb ~Gpk~ns,~orp. S~c.
PERFORMANCE BOND
STATE OF TEXAS 1
COUNTY OF DALLAS
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Con~ract Builders
of the City of, Grand Prairie
County of Dallas , and State of Te~:, , as
principal, and Xnsura~ce Company of 1~ort~ ~eric-a
author~ed under the laws of the Stat~ of Tex~ to act ~ surety on bonds for principals, are held
and firmly bound unto~ C~E~ o~ ~e11~ T~s {Owner),
· :' r ~- ' ' ~d
,nthepenalsumof~~ ~t~a~~.~ ~e -0ollam($~9,998.00 )
for the payment whereof, the said ~ineipal and Surety bind them~lves, and their heim_
admi ' trt rs, exeeut rs, sueee~Qr and ' ns. 'ointl and ~erall . bv ~he~ ~resents' For ~sh-
~rg ~ ~or, t~, mterx~s ~~t, ~ per~b~ ali ~e~ necess~
~or th~:~~ti~ of a 50Q,0O0-GalIo~ ~o~.Stor~e %~ c~lete ~h~S~
r~, ~ o~ce ~s, ~nerx~, consol ~~n ~G aAA onner rezanea app~n~ces
i, o
/
which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent
as if copied at length herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the
said Principal shall faithfully perform said Contract and shall in all respects duly and faithfully
observe and perform all and singular the covenants, conditions and agreements in and by said
contract agreed and covenanted by the Principal to be observed and performed, and according to
the true intent and meaning of said Contract and the Plans and Specifications hereto annexed,
then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect;
"PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of (Article
5160 for Public Work) (Article 5472d for Private Work)~ of the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas as
amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of
said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein."
Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no chang'e, extension of time, a'.teration
or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work performed thereunder, or the plans, speci-
fications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in anyway affect it.,; obligation on this
*Not applicable for federal work. See 'The Miller Act," 40 U.S.C. S270. ,
PB-1
bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition
to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the~said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instru-
of ...... __~'~_~_~ --- , 19
ment
this
Address__8_{_~ W. Shady Grove R_oad Address__l&21 ~, .Moe~l.ngl~tl'd
Grand Prairie, Texas 75050
The name and address of the Reside4~ Agent of Surety is:
t?X7 ~. ~ar~ood, Loek P, ox W, l~th~loor, ~allal. Texas 7~2nl
PAYMENT BOND
STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF D^LLA,q
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENT:~: That Contract Builders
of the-City of Grand Prairie ,
County of D~ ~ , and State of Texas , aa
authorized under the laws ~f the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held
and firmly bound.unto the C±ty of Coppellt Texas (Owner),
for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves and their heirs, adminiz-
trators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents: For furni$~
aYl labor., tools, materials and equipm~n, t~, and performing all wg?k necessary for. ,the
construct±on of a 500,000-Gallon grohnd Storage Tank .c~ple~e w~_th Sump Pump, High
Service !haups~, meCer'.zng~ .co9. C~ol ,~u~..txp~. C an~ .all or .h~..r rela.ted.app..u~, t..epan?s.
WHEREAS, the Princ~pa~ nas en~ereu '-'nm a certain written con~rac~ wire ~ne owner,
dated the ~ ~//n/n day of ff~a~ __ · .. , 19 ~/ , to
which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as
if copied at length herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the
said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor
in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void;
otherwise to remain in full force and effect;
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pur.~.uant to the provisions of Article 5160 of
the Revised Civil Statutes of Texas as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in
accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein.
Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration
or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work performed thereunder, or the plans,
specifications or drawing~ accompanying th~. same, shah in anywise affect its obligation on this
bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition
to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be performed thereuruter.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instru-
ment this ~ /~ day of ~'?'7 , 19 ~/ .
Contract Builders
lm~ur-_n,'_o Compauy. of North America
Princip~) .-'~ / Surety
..
Title Vice-Pres/dent Title b/. I~rr~ee l~rovn~ &ttot'ney-t~-Fact
Address_.__8.]4 W. Shady a~ove Road Address_l/+21
Grand Prairie, Texas 75050 Dallas, Texas 75.9.01
The name and address of the Resident Agent of Surety is:
1717 N. ldaz~ood, Lock Box 8, 19th Floor, Dallas, Texas 75201
CONTRACTOR'S ACT OF ASSURANCE
STATE OF TEXAS
COL~TY OF DALLAS
BEFORE ME, ~)O~OT~ j/~/~ , a Notary
Public, du!v con~nissioned and qualified, in and for the County
of ~~ , State of Texas, came and aooeared CONT?gCT
BUILDERS, INC., (herein represented by Jeff Nolen, its Vice
President, oursuant to and by virtue of the provisions of a
resolution adopted by the said CONTRACT BUILDERS, INC. on the
15th dav of June, 1981, a duly certified copy of such resolution
being annexed hereto and made a part hereof,) who declared that
(in accordance ~ith the said resolution and oursuant thereto,)
he, the said Jeff Nolen, Vice President has assured and does
hereby assure the Texas Water Development Board that the said
COntRACT BUILDERS, INC. is authorized and emoowered to comply
with certain required conditions for the investment of Water
Development Funds of the State of Texas in the construction of a
500,000-Ga!ion Ground Storage Tank and High Service Pumping
Station project at Coppell, Texas, which will orovide benefits
to the City of Coppell, Texas, the State of Texas, the County of
Dallas, other local interests and property o~.~ers, and that said
CONTRACT BUILDERS, INC. will construct said project only in
accordance with all laws of the State of Texas, and all Rules,
Regulations and Policies of the Texas Water Develooment Board,
which assurances hereby made constitute material and substantial
reoresentations u~on the reliance of which the Texas Water
-2-
Development Board is expected to approve the award of contracts
to the said CONTRACT BUILDERS, INC. for the construction of said
project, and the said CONTRACT BUILDERS, INC. hereby waives and
agrees to waive any and all claim to monies due the said CONTRACT
BUILDERS, INC. and retained by the Texas Department of Water
Resources and/or Local Sponsor of the project pursuant to the pro-
vision of Section 17.135, Texas Water Code, as may be further
orovided pursuant to the contracts heretofore or hereafter executed
by and between (1) the said City of Coppell, Texas and (2) CONTRACT
BUILDERS, INC. and/or the Texas Department of Water Resources,
upon a finding by the Texas Water Development Board that the said
CONTP~CT BUILDERS, INC. has either:
(1) Failed to construct the project according to the engineer-
ing plans specifically approved by the Texas Water
Development Board, or
(2) Failed to obtain the orior approval of the Texas Water
Development Board for any and all subsequent modifications,
amendments, or changes to such engineering plans, without
regard to the nature, character or extent of such changes,
or
(3) Failed to construct the works in accordance with sound
engineering principles, or
(4) Failed to comply with any term or terms of the construction
contract.
PROVIDED HO~.~VER, that such waiver of any and all claims to
monies due the said COntRACT BUILDERS, INC. as described above
-3-
shall extend only to that ~ortion of the monies retained as
are reasonably necessary to correct construction defects in
the project resulting from the failure of the said CONTP~CT
BUILDERS, INC. as enumerated under items 1-4 above.
CONTraS, INC.
BYjeff~e~n ,' Vi~ca Presid.~nt
Sworn to and subscribed before me this the ~-.~ day of
NOTARY PUB~t~C f'
2>~A~ County, Texas
My commission expires ~.y~
POWER OF ATTORNEY
I INSURANCE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA
PHILADELPHIA, PA.
I Know all men by these presents: That INSURANCE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA,
a corporation of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, having its principal office in the City of Philadelphia,
Pennsylvania, pursuant to the following Resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of the said Company
I on May 28, 1975, to wit'
"RESOLVED, pursuant to Articles 3.6 and 5.1 of the B'~.-Laws, the following Rules shall govern the execution for the Company of
bonds, undertakings, recognizances, contracts and other writings in the nature thereof:
:1: That the President, or an',' Vice-President, Assistant Vice-President, Resident Vice-President or Attorney-in-Fact. may execute for
I aqcJ in behalf of the Company any and all bonds, undertak:ngs, recogmzances, contracts and other writings m the nature thereof, the
same to be attested when necessary by the Secretary. an .Assistant Secretary or a Resident .Assistant Secre~'ary and the seal of the
Company affixed thereto, and that the President or an.~ \gee-President ma~. appoint and authorize Resident V~ce-Presidents, Resident
· \ssi_,,tant Secretaries and .-\ttorneys-in-Fact to so execute or atte,q to the execuhon of all such writings on behalf of the Company and
I to a~'f~x tke seal of the Company thereto.
:2. &ny ~uch writing executed in accordance with the~e Rules shall be as binding upon the Compan,~ in any case as though signed
by the President and attesi'ed by the Secretar.v.
.3'~ Th.e signature of the President or a V~ce-President and the seal of the Company may' be affixed by facsimile on any power of
attorne~ granted pursuant to th~$ Resolution. and the signature o~ a certifying officer and the seal of tl:e Company ma.,,.- be affixed by
facsimile to any certificate oi an,,.-' such po~ver, and any such po;~-er or certificate bearing such facsimile signature and seal shall be valid
and binding on the Company.
;4t. Such Resident Officers and Attorneys-in-Fact shall have autherity to certify o~ verify copies of this Resolution. the By-Laws of the
i Company and any affidavit or record of the Company necessary to the dE, charge of their duties.
i5! The passage of this Resolution does not revoke any earlier authority granted by Resolution ol: the Board of Directors on June 9,
1953.-
does hereby nominate, constitute and appoint ~.~. GIBSOn, JO~.
I W. LAWRENCE BROWN, JANICE G. CORREY and DOROTHY VALEK, all of the City of Dallas,
State of Texas
i , each individually if there be more than one named,
its true and lawful attorney-in-fact, to make, execute., seal and deliver on its behalf, and as its act and deed
any and all bonds, undertakings, recognizances, contracts and other writings in the nature thereof. And the
execution of such writings in pursuance of these presents, shall be as binding upon said Company, as fully
I and amply as if they' had been duly executed and acknowledged by' the regularly elected officers of the
Company at its principal office.
IN WITNESS \.VHEREOF, the said c. DANIEL DRAKE Vice-President
I has hereunto subscribed his name and affixed the corporate seal of the said INSURANCE COMPANY OF
NORTH AMERICA this ............... 16_t_h ......................... day of ........ D~-.~b~.~ .......................... 19 ..... 2.8 ........
i INSURANCE COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA
~SEAb by ......... _C._,..D.~.N~.~g. _ _DRAYS_ ...........................................
Vice-President
I STATE OF PENNSYLVANIA
COUNTY OF PHILADELPHIA ss.
On this ............. ~.__6..t_~_ ...................... day of ........... ..°.~.t__.°__b..e.~ ................. A. D. 19__._7_..8. ......... before me. a Notary
i Public of the Commom. vealth of Pennsylvania in and for the County of Philadelphia, came ..............................................
.................... -C-t]~-A~-~-~--g---P---RA--'--K--E- ....................................................................................... Vice-President o~ the INSURANCE
COMPANY OF NORTH AMERICA to me personally known to be the individual and officer who executed the preceding
instrument, and he ackno~vledged that he executed the same; that the seal affixed to the preceding instrument is the
i corporate seal of said Company: that the said corporate seal and his signature were duly' affixed by the authority and
direction of the said corporahon, aha that Resolution, adopted by the Board of Directors of said Company. referred to
in the preceding instrument, is now in force.
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my official seal at the City of Philadelphia,
i the day and year first above written ~%UREEN SCHELL
.. . ..................................................................
-~..~,~ commission expires ~ugust 13, 1979
.~1'~'., t~e undersigned Assistant Secretary of INSURANCE COMPANY OF NORTH A~f4~CA, do hereb~ certify that ::
I. ~'~:~~r~I"POWER the foregoing is a full, true/~illd correct co']~~ull forc~ and effect.
OF
ATTORNEY,
of
which
'-.~ ~, ~ . ~-,~:!41~ ~,'itness whereof, I have here_u~to subscribed my na~e as Assi.~m'rt~S~'cretary, an .o~ffix, j~:~ corp, o'~te seal
'?~.I~.~...~oration, th~s .............. ~ ......... [~ ........... d~y of .....
I ......
$B.11; 7/7,5 Printecl In U.S.A. Assistant Secretary
(Workmon's Compensation & Liability)
CERTIFICATE
OF
INSURANCE
tank
Proiect Constr. of 500,000 gal. Ground storage kocaHon Coppe]lo Texas
Owner c'-~ ,~ C~pp~l 1 Address Coppell .Texas
-i-y
Contract0.r(Insured)Contra~ R~i~der~ Address Grand Prairie. Texas
The undersigned hereby certifies that the following policies, subject to their terms, conditions and exclusions have
been Issued by the named companies to the above Insured and are presently in full force and effect:
A. WORKMEN'~ COMPENSATION:
Policy No. WC005440471M Expiration Date. 5/1/81
Insurance Co- Transportation Ins. Co. Address Dallas, Texas
COVERAGE: Statutory Workmen's Compensation.- Employers Liabil'ily Limit $100,000 .Each Accident.
Locations covered Coppell, Texas
B. COMPREHENSIVE GENERAL LIABILITY & PROPERLY DAMAGE:
Policy No. c.~pog4770227,'~ Expiration Date - 5/1/81
Insurance Co. Transportation Ins Co. Address Dallas, Texas
LIMITS:
Bod!ly Injury, Including Personal Injury.
$ Each Person Property Damage $ 100,000 Each Occurrence
S ~88j888 Each Occurrence $ 100,000 .Aggregate
$ ~.ggregate Other
COVERAGE PROVIDED (Check Applicable Squares): ....
Yes No Property Damage Liability Includes: Yes No
Premises Operations El' [3 Damage due to blasting (explosion) [] sa
Subcontractor Operations lia [] Damage due to collapse 13 El
Personal Injury sa [] Damage to underground facilities sa []
Completed Operations sa [] Broad Form Property Damage: sa []
Contractual Liability (Per Spec) El [] of Contractor
Op._erations
Other [] El Contractual []
C. COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY & PROPERTY DAMAGE:
Policy No. CCPO04770227 Expiration Date 5/1/81
Insurance Co, mr~n~port~tion Ins. Co. .Address Dallas, Texas
LIMITS:
Bodily Injury $ 250. 000 Each Person Property Damage $_._100,000 - Each Occurrence
$500.000 Each Occurrence Other
COVERAGE PROVIDED - for operation of all owned, non-owned and hired vehicles.
D. UMBRELLA EXCESS .LIABILITY:
Policy No. M863316 Expiration Date 5/8/81
.- Insurance Co. Mission Ins, Co Address Houston, Texas
LIMITS: Single Limit Bodilt, Injury and Property Damage $ ~_,000,000 Each Occurrence.$1,000'000 Aggrega:~
COVERAGE PROVIDED - Applies in excess of the coverages listed above for Employer's Liability,
Comprehensive General, Automobile and Property Damage Coverage.
The undersigned further certifies that in Ihe event of cancellation or any material change in any of the above
policies, ten (10) days prior written not,ce of such cancellallon or change shall be delivered by registered mail to the
above Owner.
NAME OF .AGENCY Alexander & Alexander, Inc/ Addres~Dallas, Teyas
O ;e By.
Specified minimums ~/Authorl~d Insurance Representative
(Signature required)
A. COMPREHENSIVE GENERAL LIABILITY: _.
Bodily Injury: (Incl. Pers. onal Injury) $ .3.00,000 each personl$ ~00,000 each occurrence.
Property Damage: $._.l.Oj0,000 each occurrencel$ ~.(~f~.~000 aggregate.
B. COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY:
Bodily Injury: $.._~0~000 each personl$ ~00~000 each occurrence.
Property Damage: $ - each occurrence.
1
000
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOR
GENERALCOND~IONSOF AGREEMENT
'1. Definition of Terms Page
1.01 Owner, Contractor and Engineer ...................... G-1
1.02 Contract Documents .......................... G-!
1.03 Sub-Contractor ............................ G-1
1.04 Written Notice ............................ G-1
1.05 Work ................................ G-1
1.06 Extra Work .............................. G-1
1.07 Working Day ............................. G-1
1.08 Calendar Day ............................. G-1
1.09 Substantially Completed ......................... G-1
2. Responsibilities of the Engineer and the Contractor
2.01 Owner-Engineer Relationship ....................... G-2
2.02 Professional Inspection by Engineer .................... G-2
2.03 Payments for Work ........................... G-2
2.04 Initial Determinations .......................... G-2
2.05 Objections .............................. G-2
2.06 Lines and Grades ........................... G-2
2.07 Contractor's Duty and Superintendence ................... G-2
2.08 Contractor's Understanding ........................ G-3
2.09 Character of Workmen ......................... G-3
2.10 Contractor's Buildings ......................... G-3
2.11 Sanitation .............................. G-4
2.12 Shop Drawings ............................ G-4
2.13 Preliminary Approval .......................... G-4
2.14 Defects and Their Remedies ....................... G-4
2.15 Changes and Alterations ......................... G-5
3. General Obligations and Responsibilities
3.01 Keeping of Plans and Specifications Accessible ................ G-5
3.02 Ownership of Drawings ......................... G-5
3.03 Adequacy of Design .......................... G-5
3.04 Right of Entry ............................. G-5
3.05 Collateral Contracts ........................... G-5
3.06 Discrepancies and Omissions ....................... G-5
3.07 Equipment, Materials and Construction Plant ................. G-5
3.08 Damages ............................... G-6
3.09 Protection Against Accident to Employees and the Public ............ G-6
3.10 Performance and Payment Bonds ......................... G-6
3.11 Losses from Natural Causes ............................
3.12 Protection of Adjoining Property ......................... G-6
3.13 Protection Against Claims of Sub-Contractors, Et¢ .................
3.14 Protection Against Royalties or Patented Invention ............... G-7
3.15 Laws and Ordinances ............................... G-7
3.16 Assignment and Subletting ............................ G-7
3.17 Indemnification ................................. G-7
3.18 Contractor's Liability Insurance .........................
3.18.1 Certificate of Insurance .............................
4. Prosecution and Progress
4.01 Time and Order of COmpletion .......................... G-8
4.02 Extension of Time ................................ G-9
4.03 Hindrances and Delays .............................. 0-9
5. Measurement and Payment
5.01 Quantities and Measurements ............. · .............. G-9
5.02 Estimated Quantities ............................... G-9
5.03 Price of Work ................................... G-9
5.04 Partial Payment .................................. G-10
5.05 Use of Completed Portions ............................ G-10
5.06 Final Completion and Acceptance ........................ G-10
5.07 Final Payment ................................. G-10
5.08 Payments Withheld ................................ G-10
5.09 Delayed Payments ............................... G-11
6. Extra Work ~nd Claims
6.01 Change Orders .................................. G:11
6.02 Minor Changes .................................. G-11
6.03 Extra Work ....................... . ............ G-11
6.04 Time of Filing Claims .............................. G-12
6.05 Arbitration ..................................... G-12
7. Abandonment of Contract
7.01 Abandonment by Contractor ........................... G-13
7.02 Abandonment by Owner ............................. G-14
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT
1. DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
1.01 OWNER, CONTRACTOR AND ENGINEER. The O~,~,'NER, the CONTRACTOR and
the ENGINEER are those persons or organizations identified as such in the Agreement and are
referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine in gender.
The term ENGINEER means the ENGINEER or his duly authorized representative. The ENGI-
NEER shall be understood to be the ENGINEER of the OWNER, and nothing contained in the
Contract Documents shall create any contractual or agency relationship between the ENGINEER
and the CONTRACTOR.
1.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents shall consist of the Notice to
Contractors (Advertisement), Special Conditions (Instructions to Bidders), Proposal, signed
Agreement, Performance and Payment Bonds (when required), Special Bonds (when required),
General Conditions of the Agreement, Technical Specifications, Plans, and all modifications thereof
incorporated in any of the documents before the execution of the agreement.
The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is called for by any one shall be as
binding as if called for by all. In case of conflict between any of tho Contract Documents, priority
of interpretation shall be in the following order: Signed Agreement, Performance and Payment
Bonds, Special Bonds (if any), Proposal, Special Conditions of Agreement, Notice to Contractors,
Technical Specifications. Plans, and General Conditions of Agreement.
1.03 SUB-CONTRACTOR. The term Sub-Contractor, as employed herein, includes only
those having a direct contract with the CONTRACTOR and it includes one who furnishes material
worked to a special design according to the plans or specifications of this work, but does not
include one who merely furnishes material not so worked.
1.04 WRITTEN NOTICE. Written notice shal'l be deemed to have been duly served if
delivered in ;~erson to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation
for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered, mail to the last business address
known to him who gives the notice.
1.05 WORK. The CONTRACTOR shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machin-
ery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, services, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel,
transportation and other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered
by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both
workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The CONTRACTOR shall, if required,
furnish satisfactory evidence as to t. he kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described
in words which so applied have a well known technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to
such recognized standards.
1.06 EXTRA WORK. The term "Extra Work" as used in this contract shall be understood
to mean and include all work that may be required by the ENGINEER or OWNER to be done by
the CONTRACTOR to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work shown upon the
plans, or reasonably implied by the specifications, and not covered by the CONTRACTOR'S
Proposal, except as provided under "Changes and Alterations", herein.
1.07 WORKING DAY. A "Working Day" is defined as any day not including Saturdays,
Sundays or any legal holidays, in which weather or other conditions, not under the control of
the CONTRACTOR, will permit construction of the principal units of the work for a period of
not less than seven (7) hours between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m.
1.08 CALENDAR DAY. "Calendar Day" is any day of the week or month, no days being
excepted.
1.09 SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED. By the term "substantially completed" is meant.
that the structure has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in condition to
serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment.
G-I ~ ~, :'~ ~'~'o". -'-~
2. RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE ENGINEER AND THE CONTRACTOR
2.01 OWNER-ENGINEER RELATIONSHIP. The ENGINEER will be the O¥~,~ER'S
representative during construction. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the
ENGINEER as the OWNER'S representative during construction are as set forth in the Contract
Documents and shall not be extended or limited without written consent of the OWNER and
ENGINEER. The ENGINEER will advise and consult with the OWNER, and all of OWNER'S
instructions to the CONTRACTOR shall be issued through the ENGINEER.
2.02 PROFESSIONAL INSPECTION BY ENGINEER. The ENGINEER shall make
periodic visits to the site to familiarize himself generally with the progress of the executed work
and to determine if such work generally meets the essential performance and design features and
the technical and functional engineering requirements of the Contract Documents; provided and
except, however, that the ENGINEER shall not be responsible for making an~' detailed, exhaus-
tive, comprehensive or continuous on-site inspection of the quality or quantity of the work or be in
any way responsible, directly or indirectly, for the construction means, methods, techniques, se-
quences, quality, procedures, programs, safety precautions or lack of same incident thereto or in
connection therewith. Notwithstanding any other provision of this agreement or any other Contract
Document, the ENGINEER shall not be in any way responsible or liable for any acts, errors,
omissions or negligence of the CONTRACTOR, any subcontractor or any of the CONTRACTOR'S
or subeontraetor's agents, servants or employees or any other person, firm or corporation perform-
ing or attempting to perform any of the work.
2.03 PAYMENTS FOR WORK. The ENGINEER shall review CONTRACTOR'S applications
for payment and supporting data, determine the amount owed to the CONTRACTOR and approve,
in writing, payment to CONTRACTOR in such amounts; such approval of payment to CONTRAC-
TOR constitutes a representation to the OWNER of ENGINEER'S professional judgment that the
work has progressed to the point indicated to the best of his knowledge, information and belief,
but such approva, l of an application for payment to CONTRACTOR shall not be deemed as a
representatior~ by ENGINEER that ENGINEER has made any examination to determine how or
for what purpose CONTRACTOR has used the moneys paid on account of the Contract price.
2.04 INITIAL DETERMINATIONS. The ENGINEER initially shall determine all claims,
disputes and other matters in question between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER relating to
the execution or progress of the work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents and the
ENGINEER'S decision shall be rendered in writing within a reasonable time. Should the ENGI-
NEER fail to make such decision within a reasonable time, appeal to arbitration may be taken
as if his decision had been rendered against the party appealing.
2.05 OBJECTIONS. In the event the ENGINEER renders any decision which, in the
opinion of either party hereto, is not in accordance with the meaning and intent of this contract,
either party may file with the ENGINEER within thirty days his written objection to the decision,
and by such action may reserve the right to submit the question so raised to arbitration as
hereinafter provided.
2.06 LINES AND GRADES. Unless otherwise specified, all lines and grades shall be
furnished by the ENGINEER or his representative. Whenever necessary, construction work shall
be suspended to permit performance of this work, but such suspension will be as brief as practicable
and the CONTRACTOR shall be allowed no extra compensation therefor. The CONTRACTOR
shall give the ENGINEER ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed.
All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the CONTRACTOR, and in case of careless
destruction or removal by him or his employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced at the
CONTRACTOR'S expense.
2.07 CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE. The CONTRACTOR shall give
adequate attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on
the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants. The
superintendent shall represent the CONTRACTOR in his absence and all directions given to him
shall be as binding as if given to the CONTRACTOR.
G-2
The CONTRACTOR is and at all times shall remain an independent contractor, solely
responsible for the manner and method of completing his work under this contract, with full
power and authority to select the means, method and manner of performing such work, so long as
such methods do not adversely affect the completed improvements, the OWNER and ENGINEER
being interested only in the result obtained and conformity of such completed improvements to
the plans, specifications and contract.
Likewise, the CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the safety of himself, his employ-
ees and other persons, as well as for the protection of the safety of the improvements being erected
and the property of himself or any other person, as a result of his operations hereunder. Engineer-
ing construction drawings and specifications as well as any additional information concerning the
work to be performed passing from or through the ENGINEER shall not be interpreted as
requiring or allowing CONTRACTOR to deviate from the plans and specifications, the intent of
such drawings, specifications and any other such instructions being to define with particularity the
agreement of the parties as to the work the CONTRACTOR is to perform. CONTRACTOR shall be
fully and completely liable, at his own expense, for design, construction, installation and use, or
non-use, of all items and methods incident to performance of the contract, and for all loss, damage
or injury incident thereto, either to person or property, including, without, limitation, the adequacy
of all temporary supports, shoring, bracing, scaffolding, machinery or equipment, safety precau-
tions or devices, and similar items or devices used by him during construction.
Any review of work in process, or any visit or observation during construction, or any
clarification of plans and specifications, by the ENGINEER, or any agent, employee, or represen-
tative of either of them, whether through personal observation on the project site or by means of
approval of shop drawings for temporary construction or construction processes, or by other means
or method, is agreed by the CONTRACTOR to be for the purpose of observing the extent and
nature of work completed or being performed, as measured against the drawings and specifications
constituting the contract, or for the purpose of enabling CONTRACTOR to more fully understand
the plans and specifications so that the completed construction work will conform thereto, and
shall in no way relieve the CONTRACTOR from full and complete responsibility for the proper
performance of his work on the project, including but without limitation the propriety of means
and methods of the CONTRACTOR in performing said contract, and the adequacy of any designs,
plans or other facilities for accomplishing such performance. Deviation by the CONTRACTOR
from plans and specifications that may have been in evidence during any such visitation or
observation by the ENGINEER, or any of his representatives, whether called to the CONTRAC-
TOR'S attention or not shall in no way relieve CONTRACTOR from his responsibility to complete
all work in accordance with said plans and specifications.
2.08 CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING. It is understood and agreed that the CON-
TRACTOR has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work,
the conformation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of the materials to be encoun-
tered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of
the work, the general and local conditions, and all other matters which can ;.n any way affect the
work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee
of the OWNER or ENGINEER either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or
modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained.
2.09 CHARACTER OF WORKMEN. The CONTRACTOR agrees to employ only orderly
and competent men, skillful in the performance of the type of work required under this contract,
to do the work: and agrees that whenever the ENGINEER shall inform him in writing that any man
or men on the work are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful or disorderly, such man or men
shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the
ENGINEER'S written consent.
2.10 CONTRACTOR'S BUILDINGS. The building of structures for housing men, or the
erection of tents or other forms of protection, will be permitted only at such places as the
ENGINEER shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structures
shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the ENGINEER.
2.11 SANITATION. Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work,
properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the CONTRAC-
TOR in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the ENGINEER, and their use
shall be strictly enforced.
2.12 SHOP DRAWINGS. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER. with such
promptness as to cause no delay in his own work or in that of any other Contractor. four checked
copies, unless otherwise specified, of all shop and. or setting drawings and schedules required for
the work of the various trades, and the ENGINEER shall pass upon them with reasonable prompt- _
ness, making desired corrections. The CONTRACTOR shall make any corrections required by the
ENGINEER, file with him two corrected copies and furnish such other copies as may be needed.
The ENGINEER'S approval of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR
from responsibility for deviations from drawings or specifications, unless he has in writing called -
the ENGINEER'S attention to such deviations at the time of submission, nor shall it relieve him
from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedules. It shall be the CONTRAC-
TOR'S responsibility to fully and completely review all shop drawings to ascertain their effect on
his ability to perform the required contract work in accordance with the plans and specifications
and within the contract time.
Such review by the ENGINEER shall be for the sole purpose of determining the sufficiency
of said drawings or schedules to result in finished improvements in conformity with the plans and
specifications, and shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his duty as an independent contractor
as previously set forth, it being expressly understood and agreed that the ENGINEER does not
assume any duty to pass upon the propriety or adequacy of such drawings or schedules, or
any means or methods reflected thereby, in relation to the safety of either person or property
during CONTRACTOR'S performance hereunder.
2.13 PRELIMINARY APPROVAL. The ENGINEER shall not have the power to waive the
obligations of this contract for the furnishing by the CONTRACTOR of good material, and of
his performing good work as herein described, and in full accordance with the plans and specifica-
tions. No failure or omission of the ENGINEER to discover, object to or condemn any defective
work or material shall release the CONTRACTOR from the obligations to fully and properly
perform the contract, including without limitations, the obligation to at once tear out, remove and
properly replace the same at any time prior to final acceptance upon the discovery of said defective
work or material: provided, however, that the ENGINEER shall, upon request of the CONTRAC-
TOR, inspect and accept or reject any material furnished, and in event the material has been once
accepted by the ENGINEER, such acceptance shall be binding on the OWNER, unless it can be
clearly shown that such material furnished does not meet the specifications for this work.
Any questioned work may be ordered taken up or removed for re-examination, by the
ENGINEER, prior to final acceptance, and if found not in accordance with the specifications for _
said work, all expense of removing, re-examination and replacement shall be borne by the
CONTRACTOR, otherwise the expense thus incurred shall be allowed as EXTRA WORK, and
shall be paid for by the OWNER; provided that, where inspection or approval is specifically
required by the specifications prior to performance of certain w~rk, should the CONTRACTOR
proceed with such work without requesting prior inspection or a~,oroval he shall bear all expense of
taking up, removing, and replacing this work if so directed by the ENGINEER.
2.14 DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES. It is further agreed that if the work or any part
thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the
same, shall be deemed by the ENGINEER as unsuitable or not in conformity with the speci-
fications, the CONTRACTOR shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the ENGINEER,
forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in
full accordance with this contract.
2.15 CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that the OWNER
may make such changes and alterations as the OWNER ma)' see fit, in the line, grade, form,
dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or an)' part thereof, either before
or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the
accompanying Performance and Payment Bonds.
If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not
constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be
dispensed with, except as provided for unit price items under Section 5 "Measurement and Pay-
ment.'' If the amount of work is increased, and the work can fairly be classified under the speci-
fications, such increase shall be paid for according to the quantity actually done and at the unit
price, if any, established for such work under this contract, except as provided for unit price
items under Section 5 "Measurement and Payment;" otherwise, such additional work shall be paid
for as provided under Extra Work. In case the OWNER shall make such changes or alterations as
shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work,
then the OWNER shall recompense the CONTRACTOR for any material or labor so used,
and for any actual loss occasioned by such change, due to actual expenses incurred in preparation
for the work as originally planned.
3. GENERAL OBLIGATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES
3.01 KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE. The ENGINEER shall
furnish the CONTRACTOR with an adequate and reasonable number of copies of all plans and
specifications without expense to him, and the CONTRACTOR shall keep one copy of the sa,.~e
constantly accessible on the work, with the latest revisions noted thereon.
3.02 OWNERSHIP OF DRAWINGS. All drawings, specificati~s and copies thereof furnished
by the ENGINEER shall not be reused on other work, and, with the exception of the signed
contract sets, are to be returned to him on request, at the completion of the work. All models are
the property of the OWNER.
3.03 ADEQUACY OF DESIGN. It is understood that the OWNER believes it has employed
competent engineers and designers. It is, therefore, agreed that the OWNER shall be responsible for
the adequacy of the design, sufficiency of the Contract Documents, the safety of the structure and
the practicability of the operations of the completed project; provided the CONTRACTOR has
complied with the requirements of the said Contract Documents, all approved modifications
thereof, and additions and alterations thereto approved in writing by the OWNER. The burden of
proof of such compliance shall be upon the CONTRACTOR to show that he has complied with the
said requirements of the Contract Documents, approved modifications thereof and all approved
additions and alterations thereto.
3.04 RIGHT OF ENTRY. The OWNER reserves the right to enter the property or location
on which the works herein contracted for are to be constructed or installed, by such agent or agents
as he may elect, for the purpose of inspecting the work, or for the purpose of constructing or
installing such collateral work as said OWNER may desire.
3.05 COLLATERAL CONTRACTS. The OWNER agrees to provide by separate contract or
otherwise, all labor and material essential to the completion of the work specifically excluded from
this contract, in such manner as not to delay the progress of the work, or damage said CONTRAC-
TOR, except where such delays are specifically mentioned elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
3.06 DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS. It is further agreed that it is the intent of this
contract that all work must be done and all material must be furnished in accordance with the
generally accepted practice, and in the event of any discrepancies between the separate contract
documents, the priority of interpretation defined under "Contract Documents" shall govern. In
the event that there is still any doubt as to the meaning and intent of any portion of the contract,
specifications or drawings, the ENGINEER shall define which is intended to apply to the work.
3.07 EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION PLANT. The CONTRACTOR
shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials,
supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, all means of construction,
and any and all parts of the work, whether the CONTRACTOR has been paid, partially paid, or not
paid for such work, until the entire work is completed and accepted.
G-5 ~) ...... ~ ....... .~,-~ ,~-,
3.08 DAMAGES. In the event the CONTRACTOR is damaged in the course of the comple-
tion of the work by the act, neglect, omission, mistake or default of the O~'.~ER, or of the
ENGINEER, or of any other CONTRACTOR employed by the OWNER upon the work, thereby
causing loss to the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER agrees that he will reimburse the CONTRACTOR
for such loss. In the event the OWNER is damaged in the course of the work by the act, negligence,
omission, mistake or default of the CONTRACTOR, or should the CONTRACTOR unreasonably
delay the progress of the work being done by others on the job so as to cause loss for which the
OWNER becomes liable, then the CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the OWNER for such loss.
3.09 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC. The
CONTRACTOR shall at all times exercise reasonable precautions for the safety of employees and
others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of Federal, State, and
Municipal safety laws and building and construction codes. :-MI machinery and equipment, and
other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in
Construction" of the Associated General Contractors of America except where incompatible with
Federal, State, or Municipal laws or regulations. The CONTRACTOR shall provide such machinery
guards, safe walkways, ladders, bridges, gangplanks, and other safety devices. The safety precautions
actually taken and their adequacy shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR, acting at
his discretion as an independent contractor.
3.10 PERFORM:~NCE :4aN'D PAYMENT BONDS. Unless otherwise specified, it is further
agreed by the parties to this Contract that the CONTRACTOR will execute separate performance
and payment bonds, each in the sum of one hundred (100) percent of the total contract price, in
standard forms for this purpose, guaranteeing faithful performance of the work and the fulfillment
of any guarantees required, and further guaranteeing payment to all persons supplying labor and
materials or furnishing him any equipment in the execution of the Contract, and it is agreed that
this Contrac~ shall not be in effect until such performance and payment bonds are furnished and
approved by the OWNER.
Unless otherwise approved in writing by the O'~.~ER, the surety company underwriting the
bonds shall be acceptable according to the latest list of companies holding certificates of authority
from the Secretary of the Treasury of the United States.
Unless otherwise specified, the cost of the premium for the performance and payment bonds
shall be included in the CONTRACTOR'S proposal.
3.11 LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES. Unless otherwise specified, all loss or damage to
the CONTRACTOR arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the
elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance in the prosecution of the same, or from unusual
obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be
sustained and borne by the CONTRACTOR at his own cost and expense.
3.12 PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY. The said CONTRACTOR shall take
proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered,
which might be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under
this Agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall
be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all
adjoining property. The CONTRACTOR agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the OWNER
and ENGINEER against any claim or claims for damages due to any injury to any adjacent or
adjoining property, arising or growing out of the performance of the contract; but any such
indemnity shall not apply to any claim of any kind arising out of the existence or character
of the work.
3.13 PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUB-CONTRACTORS, LABORERS, MATER-
1ALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES. The CONTRAC-
TOR agrees that he will indemnify and save the OV~ER and ENGINEER harmless from all claims
growing out of the lawful demands of sub-contractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen
and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies, including
commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this contract. When so desired by
the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the
nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If the CONTRACTOR fails
so to do, then the OWNER may at the option of the CONTRACTOR either pay directly any
unpaid bills, of which the OWNER has written notice, or withhold from the CONTRACTOR'S
unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to liquidate any and all such
lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged,
whereupon payments to the CONTRACTOR shall be resumed in full, in accordance with the terms
of this contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any
obligation upon the OWNER by either-the CONTRACTOR or his Surety.
3.14 PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENTED INVENTION. The CON-
TRACTOR shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design,
device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement
with the patentee or owner. The CONTRACTOR shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of
any patent or copyright rights and shall indemnify and save the OWNER and ENGINEER harmless
from any loss on account thereof, except that the OWNER shall defend all such suits and claims
and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or
the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required by the OWNER;
provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the
CONTRACTOR, then CONTRACTOR shall indemnify and save OWNER harmless from any loss
on account thereof. If t~:e material or process specified or required by the OWNER is an infringe-
ment, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives such
information to the OWNER.
3.15 LAWS AND ORDINANCES. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times observe and comply
with all Federal, State and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner affect the
contract or the work, and shall indemnify and save harmless the OWNER and ENGINEER against
any claim arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations whether by the
CONTRACTOR or his employees, except wliere such violad~ions are called for by the provisions
of the Contract Documents. If the CONTRACTOR observes that the plans and specifications are
at variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the ENGINEER in writing, and any necessary
changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. If the CONTRAC-
TOR performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations,
and without such notice to the ENGINEER, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom. In case the
OWNER is a body politic and corporate, the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the
same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the
OWNER may enter into contract, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this
contract, to the same effect as though embodied herein.
3.16 ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that he will
retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract and
that he will not assign by Power of Attorney, or otherwise, or sublet said contract without the
written consent of the ENGINEER, and that no part or feature of the work will be sublet to
anyone objectionable to the ENGINEER or the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR further agrees
that the subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance
of this contract, shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from his full obligations to the OWNER, as
provided by this Agreement.
3.17 INDEMNIFICATION. The CONTRACTOR shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless
the OWNER and the ENGINEER and their resoective officers, agents and employees, from and
against all damages, claims, losses, demands, suits, judgments and costs, including reasonable
attorneys' fees and expenses, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the work,
provided that any such damages, claim, loss, demand, suit, judgment, cost or expense:
(1) Is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death or to injury
to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itself)
including the loss of use resulting therefrom; and,
G-7 e b)' Texis ~ct,on. A.~E 1971
(2) Is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of the
Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed
by any one of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be
liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by a party
indemnified hereunder.
The obligation of the CONTRACTOR under this Paragraph shall not extend to the liability
of the ENGINEER, his agents or employees arising out of the preparation or approval of maps,
drawings, reports, surveys, Change Orders, designs or specifications, or the giving of or the
failure to give directions or instructions by the ENGINEER, his agents or employees, provided
such giving or failure to give is the primary cause of the injury or damage.
3.18 INSURANCE. The CONTRACTOR at his own expense shall purchase, maintain and
keep in force such insurance as will protect him from claims set forth below which may arise out
of or result from the CONTRACTOR'S operations under the Contract, whether such operations
be by himself or by any Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of
them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:
(1) Workmen's ~:ompensation claims, disability benefits and other similar
employee benefit acts;
(2) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or
disease, or death of his employees, and claims insured by usual bodily
injury liability coverages;
(3) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death
of any person other than his employees, and claims insured by usual
bodily injury liability coverages; and
(4) Claims for damages because of injury to or destruction of tangible
property, including loss of use resulting therefrom.
3.18.1 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE. Before commencing any of the work, CONTRAC-
TOR shall file with the OWNER valid Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the OWNER and the
ENGINEER. Such Certificates shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies
will not be cancelled until at least fifteen days' prior written notice has been given to the OWNER.
The CONTRACTOR shall also file with the OWNER valid Certificates of Insurance covering
all sub-contractors.
~,. PROSECUTION .~ND PROGRESS
4.01 TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION. It is the meaning and intent of this contract,
unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the CONTRACTOR shall be allowed to prosecute
his work at such times and seasons, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be
most conducive to economy of construction: provided, however, that the order and the time of
prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in
accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion
designated in the Proposal: provided, also, that when the OWNER is having other work done, either
by contract or by his own force, the ENGINEER may direct the time and manner of constructing
the work done under this contract, so that conflict will be avoided and the construction of the
various works being done for the OWNER shall be harmonized.
The CONTRACTOR shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the
ENGINEER, schedules which shall show the order in which the CONTRACTOR proposes to
carry on the work, with dates at which the CONTRACTOR will start the several parts of the work,
and estimated dates of completion of the several parts.
G-8 ~ b, ~- ........... ~ .....
4.02 EXTENSION OF TIME. Should the CONTRACTOR be delayed in the completion
of the work by any act or neglect of the OWNER or ENGINEER, or of any employee of either,
or by other contractors employed by the OWNER, or by changes ordered in the work, or by
strikes, lockouts, fires, and unusual delays by common carriers, or unavoidable cause or causes
beyond the CONTRACTOR'S control, or by any cause which the ENGINEER shall decide justifies
the delay, then an extension of time shall be allowed for completing the work, sufficient to
compensate for the delay, the amount of the extension to be determined by the ENGINEER,
provided, however, that the CONTRACTOR shall give the ENGINEER prompt notice in writing
of the cause of such delay.
4.03 HINDRANCES AND DELAYS. No claims shall be made by the CONTRACTOR for
damages resulting from hindrances or delays from any cause (except where the work is stopped by
order of the O~,~,.~ER) during the progress of any portion of the work embraced in this contract.
In case said work shall be stopped by the act of the OWNER, then such expense as in the judgment
of the ENGINEER is caused by such stoppage of said work shall be paid by the OWNER to the
CONTRACTOR.
5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
5.01 QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS. No extra or customary measurements of
any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured and.-'or computed length, area, solid contents,
number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided.
5.02 ESTIMATED QUANTITIES. This agreement, including the specifications, plans and
estimate, is intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder.
Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of work to be done and material
to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for
estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing the proposals offered for the work.
It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and material to be furnished
under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for
payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of
such work done and the material furnished.
Where payment is based on the unit price method, the CONTRACTOR agrees that he will
make no claim for damages, anticipated profits or otherwise on account of any differences which
may be found between the quantities of work actually done, the material actually furnished
under this contract and the estimated quantities contemplated and contained in the proposal;
provided, however, that in case the actual quantity of any major item should become as much
as 20% more than, or 20%. less than the estimated or contemplated quantity for such items, then
either party to this Agreement, upon demand, shall be entitled to a revised consideration upon the
portion of the work above or below 20~ of the estimated quantity.
A "Major Item" shall be construed to be any individual bid item incurred in the proposal that
has a total cost equal to or greater than five (5) per cent of the total contract cost, computed on the
basis of the proposal quantities and the contract unit prices.
Any revised consideration is to be determined by agreement between the parties, otherwise
by the terms of this Agreement, as provided under "Extra Work."
5.03 PRICE OF WORK. In consideration of the furnishing of all the necessary labor,
equipment and material, and the completion of all work by the CONTRACTOR, and on the
completion of all work and of the delivery of all material embraced in this Contract in full
conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the OWNER agrees to pay
the CONTRACTOR the prices set forth in the Proposal hereto attached, which has been made a
part of this contract. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to receive such prices in full for furnishing
all material and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also for all expense incurred by him, and
for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to
this Agreement.
G-9 o b:. Tex~ !~¢uon A$CE 1971
5.04 PARTIAL PAYMENTS. On Or before the 10th day of each month, the CONTRACTOR
shall prepare and submit to the ENGINEER for approval or modification a statement showing as
completely as practicable the total value of the work done by the CONTRACTOR up to and
including the last day of the preceding month; said statement shall also include the value of all
sound materials delivered on the site of the work that are to be fabricated into/.he work.
The OWNER shall then pay the CONTRACTOR on or before the 15th day of the current
month the total amount of the approved statement, less 10 per cent of the amount thereof.
which 10 per cent shall be retained until final payment, and further less all previous payments
and all further sums that may ~oe retained by tile OWNER under the terms of this Agreement.
It is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to completion and some unexpected
and unusual delay occurs due to no fault or neglect on the part of the CONTRACTOR, the
OWNER may--upon written recommendation of tile ENGINEER--pay a reasonable and equitable
portion of the retained percentage to the CONTRACTOR. or the CONTRACTOR at the OWNER'S
option, may be relieved of the obligation to fu!!v complete the work and, thereupon, the CON-
TRACTOR shall receive payment of the balance due him under the contract subject only to the
conditions stated under "Final Payment."
5.05 USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS. The OWNER shall have the right to take possession
of and use any completed or partially completed portions of the work, notwithstanding the time
for completing the entire work or such portions may not have expired but such taking possession
and use shall not be deemed an acceptance of any work not completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents. If such prior use increases the cost of or delays tile work, the CONTRACTOR
shall be entitled to such extra compensation, or extension of time, or both, as the ENGINEER may
determine.
The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER when, in the CONTRACTOR'S opinion,
the contract is "substantially completed" and when so notifying the ENGINEER, the CONTRAC-
TOR shall furnish to the ENGINEER in writing a detailed list of unfinished work. The ENGINEER
will review the CONTRACTOR'S list of unfinished work and will add thereto such items as the
CONTRACTOR has failed to include. The "substantial completion" of the structure or facility shall
not excuse the CONTRACTOR from performing all of the work undertaken, whether of a minor or
major nature, and thereby completing the structure or facility in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
5.06 FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE. Within ten (10) days after the CON-
TRACTOR has given the ENGINEER written notice that the work has been completed, or
substantially completed, the ENGINEER and the OWNER shall inspect the work and within
said time, if the work be found to be completed or substantially completed in accordance with
the Contract Documents, the ENGINEER shall issue to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR his
Certificate of Completion, and thereupon it shall be the duty of the OWNER within ten (10) days
to issue a Certificate of Acceptance of the work to the CONTRACTOR or to advise the CONTRAC-
TOR in writing of the reason for non-acceptance.
5.07 FINAL PAYMENT. Upon the issuance of the Certificate of Completion, the ENGI-
NEER shall proceed to make final measurements and prepare final statement of the value of all
work performed and materials furnished under the terms of the Agreement and shall certify same
to the OWNER, who shall pay to the CONTRACTOR on or after the 30th day. and before t. he
35th day, after the date of the Certificate of Completion, the balance due the CONTRACTOR
under the terms of this Agreement, provided he has fully performed his contractual obligations
under the terms of this contract: and said payment shall become due in any event upon said
performance by the CONTRACTOR. Neither the Certificate of Acceptance nor the final payment,
nor any provision in the Contract Documents, shall relieve the CONTRACTOR of the obligation for
fulfillment of any warranty which may be required.
5.08 PAYMENTS WITHHELD. The OWNER may, on account of subsequently discovered
evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certificate to such extent as may be
necessary to protect himself from loss on account of:
G-10
(a) Defective work not remedied.
(b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims.
(c) Failure of the CONTRACTOR to make payments properly to sub-
contractors or for material or labor.
(d) Damage to another contractor.
(e) Reasonable doubt that the work can be completed for the unpaid
balance of the contract amount.
(f) Reasonable indication that the work will not be completed within
the contract time.
When the above grounds are removed or the CONTRACTOR provides a Surety Bond
satisfactory to the OWNER, which will protect the OWNER in the amount withheld, payment
shall be made for amounts withheld because of them.
5.09 DELAYED PAYMENTS. Should the OWNER fail to make payment to the CONTRAC-
TOR of the sum named in any partial or final statement, when payment is due, then the OWNER
shall pay to the CONTRACTOR, in addition to the sum shown as due by such statement, interest
thereon at the rate of six (6) per cent per annum, unless otherwise specified, from date due as
provided under "Partial Payments" and "Final Payments," until full.~ paid, which shall fully
liquidate any injury to the CONTRACTOR growing out of such delay in payment, but the right
is expressly reserved to the CONTRACTOR in the event payments be not promptly made,
as provided under "Partial Payments," to at any time thereafter treat the contract as abandoned
by the OWNER and recover compensation, as provided under "Abandonment of Contract," unless
such payments are withheld in accordance with the provisions of "Payments Withheld."
6. EXTRA WORK AND CLAIMS
6.01 CHANGE ORDERS: Without invalidating this Agreement, the OWNER may, at any
time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions to the work; such changes will
be authorized by Change Order to be prepared by the ENGINEER for execution by the OWNER
and the CONTRACTOR. The Change Order shall set forth the basis for any change ir, contract
price, as hereinafter set forth for Extra Work, and any change in contract time which may result
from the change.
In the event the CONTRACTOR shall refuse to execute a Change Order which has been
prepared by the ENGINEER and executed by the OWNER, the ENGINEER may in writing
instruct the CONTRACTOR to proceed with the work as set forth in the Change Order and the
CONTRACTOR may make claim against the OWNER for Extra Work involved therein, as herein-
after provided.
6.02 MINOR CHANGES: The ENGINEER may authorize minor changes in the work not
inconsistent with the overall intent of the Contract Documents and not involving an increase in
Contract Price. If the CONTRACTOR believes that any minor change or alteration authorized
by the ENGINEER involves Extra Work and entitles him to an increase in the Contract Price,
the CONTRACTOR shall make written request to the ENGINEER for a written Field Order.
In such case, the CONTRACTOR by copy of his communication to the ENGINEER or
otherwise in writing shall advise the OWNER of his request to the ENGINEER for a written
Field Order and that the work involved may result in an increase in the Contract Price.
Any request by the CONTRACTOR for a change in Contract Price shall be made prior to
beginning the work covered by the proposed change.
6.03 EXTRA WORK: It is agreed that the basis or' compensation to the CONTRACTOR for
work either added or deleted by a Change Order or for which a claim for Extra Work is made shall
be determined by one or more of the following methods:
G-11 ~ by Tez= .c~t~on. A.~CE 1971
Method (A)--By agreed unit prices; or
Method (B)--By agreed lump suni: or
Method (C)--If neither Method (A) nor Method (B) be agreed upon before
the Extra Work is commenced, then the CONTRACTOR shall
be paid the "actual field cost" of the work, plus fifteen (15)
percent.
In the event said Extra Work be performed and paid for under Method (C), then the pro-
visions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the
cost to the CONTRACTOR df all workmen, such as foreman, timekeepers, mechanics and
laborers, and materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time
actually employed or used on such Extra Work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily
incurred, together with all power, fuel, lubricants, water and similar operating expenses, also all
necessary incidental expenses incurred directly on account of such Extra Work, including Social
Security, Old Age Benefits and other payroll taxes, and, a rateable proportion of premiums on
Performance and Payment Bonds and Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage
and Workmen's Compensation, and all other insurance as may be required by any law or ordinance,
or directed by the OWNER, or by them agreed to. The ENGINEER may direct the form in which
accounts of the "actual field cost" shall be kept and the records of these accounts shall be made
available to the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER or OWNER may also specify in writing, before the
work commences,-the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equip-
m~nt to be used: otherwise these matters shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR. Unless
otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by
using 100 per cent. unless otherwise specified, of the latest schedule of Equipment Ownership
Expense adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practicable the
terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the Written
Extra Work Order. The fifteen (157k) per cent of the "actual field cost" to be paid the CONTRAC-
TOR shall cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead, general superintendence and field
office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the "actual field
cost" as herein defined, save that where the CONTRACTOR'S Camp or Field Office must be
maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work; then the cost to maintain and operate the
same shall be included in the "actual field cost."
No claim for Extra Work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by the
ENGINEER. In case any orders or instructions, either oral or written, appear to the CONTRAC-
TOR to involve Extra Work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the
construction time, he shall make written request to the ENGINEER for written order authorizing
such Extra Work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute
Extra Work, or as to the payment therefor, and the ENGINEER insists upon its performance,
the CONTRACTOR shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order
and shall keep an accurate account of the "actual field cost" thereof, as provided under Method
(C). The CONTRACTOR will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to
arbitration, as hereinbelow provided.
6.04 TIME OF FILING CLAIMS. It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all
questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the CONTRACTOR shall be in writing and
filed with the ENGINEER within thirty (30) days after the ENGINEER has given any directions,
order or instruction to which the CONTRACTOR desires to take exception. The ENGINEER
shall reply within thirty (30) days to such xvritten ,~xceptions ny the CONTRACTOR and render
his final decision in writing. In case the CONTRACTOR should appeal from the ENGINEER'S
decision, any demand for arbitration shall be filed with the ENGINEER and the OWNER in
writing within ten (10) days after the date of delivery to CONTRACTOR of the ENGINEER'S
final decision. It is further agreed that final acceptance of the work by the OWNER and the
acceptance by the CONTRACTOR of the final payment shall be a bar to any claims by either
party, except where noted otherwise in the Contract Documents.
6.05 ARBITRATION. All questions of dispute under this Agreement shall be submitted
to arbitration at the request of either party to the dispute. The parties may agree upon one
arbiter, otherwise, there shall be three, one named in writing by each party, and the third chosen
G-12 :~ ...........................
When the work shall have been substantially completed the CONTRACTOR and his Surety
shall be so notified and Certificates of Completion and Acceptance, as provided in Paragraph 5.06
hereinabove, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to
by the ENGINEER as being correct, shall then be prepared and delivered to the CONTRACTOR
and his Surety, whereupon the CONTRACTOR and/or his Surety, or the OWNER as the case may
be, shall .pay the balance due as reflected by said statement, within fifteen (15) days after the date
of such Certificate of Completion.
In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less
than that which would have been the cost to the OWNER had the work been completed by the
CONTRACTOR under the terms of this contract; or when the CONTRACTOR and/or his Surety
shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the OWNER, then all machinery, equipment,
tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the CONTRACTOR
and/or his Surety. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the
CONTRACTOR and/or his Surety fail to pay the amount due the OWNER within the time
designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies
on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and
materials, shall be mailed to the CONTRACTOR and his Surety at the respective addresses
designated in this contract, provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will
satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at
the risk of the CONTRACTOR and his Surety subject only to the duty of the OWNER to exercise
ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of said notice the
OWNER may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum
derived from such sale to the credit of the CONTRACTOR and his Surety. Such sale may be made
at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the OWNER may elect. The OWNER
shall release any machinery, equipment, tools,~ materials, or supplies, which remain on the work,
and belong to persons other than the CONTRACTOR or his Surety, to their proper owners.
The books on all operations provided herein shall be open to the CONTRACTOR and his Surety.
7.02 ABANDONMENT BY OWNER. In case the OWNER shall fail to comply with the
terms of this contract, and should fail or refuse to comply with said terms within ten (10) days
after written notification by the CONTRACTOR, then the CONTRACTOR may suspend or
wholly abandon the work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools and equipment, and
all materials on the site of work that have not been included in payments to the CONTRACTOR
and have not been wrought into the work. And thereupon the ENGINEER shall make an estimate
of the total amount earned by the CONTRACTOR, which estimate shall include the value of all
work actually completed by said CONTRACTOR (at the prices stated in the attached proposal
where unit price~ are used), the value of all partially completed work at a fair and equitable
price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by
the terms of this contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the
CONTRACTOR to carry the whole work to completion and which cannot be utilized. The
ENGINEER shall then make a final statement of the balance due the CONTRACTOR by deducting
from the above estimate all previous payments by the OWNER and all other sums that may be
retained by the OV~ER under the terms of this A~reement and shall certifv same to the OWNER
who shall pay to the CONTRACTOR on or before thirty (30) days after the date of the notification
by the CONTRACTOR the balance shown by said final statement as due the CONTRACTOR,
under the terms of this Agreement.
by the two arbiters so selected; or if the arbiters fail to select a third within ten (10) days,
he shall be chosen by a District Judge serving the County in which the major portion of the
project is located, unless otherwise specified. Should the party demanding arbitration fail to
name an arbiter within ten (10) days of the demand, his right to arbitrate shall lapse, and the
decision of the ENGINEER shall be final and binding on him. Should the other party fail to
choose an arbiter within ten (10) days, the ENGINEER shall appoint such arbiter. Should either
party refuse or neglect to supply the arbiters with any papers or information demanded in
writing, the arbiters are empowered by both parties to take ex parte proceedings.
The arbiters shall act with promptness. The decision of any two shall be binding on both
parties to the contract. The decision of the arbiters upon any question submitted to arbitration
under this contract shall be a condition precedent to any right of legal action. The decision of
the arbiter or arbiters may be filed in court to carry it into effect.
The arbiters, if they deem the case demands it, are authorized to award the party whose
contention is sustained, such sums as they deem proper for the time, expense and trouble incident
to the appeal, and if the appeal was taken without reasonable cause, they may award damages for
any delay occasioned thereby. The arbiters shall fix their own compensation, unless otherwise
provided by agreement, and shall assess the cost and charges of the arbitration upon either or both
parties. The award of the arbiters must be made in writing.
7. ABANDONMENT OF CONTRACT
7.01 ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR. In case the CONTRACTOR should abandon
and fail or refuse to resume work within ten (10) days after written notification from the OWNER,
or the ENGINEER, or if the CONTRACTOR fails to comply with the orders of the ENGINEER,
when such orders are consistent ~with the Contract Documents, then, and in that case, where
performance and payment bonds exist, the Sureties on these bonds shall be notified in writing and
directed to complete the work, and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the CONTRACTOR.
After receiving said notice of abandonment the CONTRACTOR shall not remove from the
work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same,
together with any materials and equipment under contract for the work, may be held for use on the
work by the O~,~,~ER or the Surety on the performance bond, or another contractor in completion
of the work: and the CONTRACTOR shall not receive any rental or credit therefor (except when
used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under Section 6,
Extra Work and Claims), it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will
ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement.
Where there is no performance bond provided or in ease t~e Surety should fail to commence
compliance with the notice for completion hereinbefore provided for, within ten (10) days after
service of such notice, then the OWNER may provide for completion of the work in either of the
following elective manners:
7.01.1 The OV~ER may thereupon employ such force of men and use such machinery,
equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said OWNER may deem necessary to complete the
work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies
to said CONTRACTOR, and expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the OWNER out
of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the CONTRAC-
TOR under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would
have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the CONTRACTOR,
then said CONTRACTOR shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum
which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said
CONTRACTOR, then the CONTRACTOR and/or his Surety shall pay the amount of such
excess to the O'~,~ER: or
7.01.2 The OV~ER under sealed bids, after five (5) days notice published one or more
times in a newspaper having general circulation in the county of the location of the work, may
let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions
which are provided in this contract. In case any increase in cost to the OWNER under the new
contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be
charged to the CONTRACTOR and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefor. However,
should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than what would have been
the cost to complete under this contract, the CONTRACTOR and/or his Surety shall be credited
therewith.
G-13 ~ ~' ~'"' ~°~ '~ ~-~:
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
1. GENERAL
The provisions of these Special Conditions shall govern in
the event of any conflict between the provisions of the
General Conditions of Where Article of the
Agreement.
any
General Conditions is modified or any Paragraph, Subpara-
graph or Clause thereof is modified or deleted by these
Special Conditions, the unaltered provision of that Article,
Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause shall remain in effect.
2. ENGINEER
The word "ENGINEER" in these Specifications shall be under-
stood as referring to Hogan and Rasor, Inc., 2730 Republic
National Bank Tower, Dallas, Texas 75201, ENGINEER of the
OWNER, or such other ENGINEER, Supervisor or Inspector as may
be authorized by said OWNER to act in any particular position.
t 3. EXAMINATION OF SITE OF PROJECT
Prospective bidders shall make a careful examination of
existing structures, site of the projects, soil and water
conditions to be encountered, improvements to be protected,
disposal sites for surplus materials not designated to be
.... salvaged materials, and methods of providing ingress and
egress to private properties and of handling traffic during
construction of the entire project.
4. QUALIFICATIONS OF LOW BIDDER
Before being awarded a contract, the low bidder shall submit
such evidence as the ENGINEER may require to establish his
financial responsibility, experience, and possession of such
equipment as may be needed to prosecute the work in an
expeditious, safe and satisfactory,manner.
Should the low bidder fail to produce evidence satisfactory
to the ENGINEER on any of the foregoing points, he may be
disqualified and the work awarded to the next low bidder so
qualifying.
5. AWARD OF THE CONTRACT
The OWNER, acting through its authorized representatives,
will notify the successful bidder, in writing, within sixty
(60) days after the date of receiving bids of its acceptance
of his proposal. The CONTRACTOR shall complete the execution
of the required Bond and Contract within ten (lO) days of
such notice.
SC-1
- 6 · ADDE,DA
Bidders desiring furthur information, or interpretation of
the Plans or Specifications must make request for such
-" information to the ENGINEER, prior to forty-eight (48) hours
before the bid opening. Answers to all such requests will be
I given in writing to all bidders, in Addendum form, and all
-- Addenda will be bound with, and made a part of, the Contract
Documents. No other explanation or interpretation will be
I considered official or binding. Should a bidder find dis-
, - crepancies in, or omissions from the Plans, Specifications,
I or other Contract Documents, or should he be in doubt as to
their meaning, he should at once notify the ENGINEER in order
F
~ _. that a written Addendum may be sent to all bidders. Any
i Addenda issued prior to twenty-four (24) hours of the opening
of bids will be mailed or delivered to each CONTRACTOR con-
F templating the submission of a proposal on this work. The
-- proposal as submitted by the CONTRACTOR will be so construc-
L. ted as to include any Addenda if such are issued by the
ENGINEER prior to twenty-four (24) hours of the opening of
r- bids.
7. PERMITS AND RIGHT-OF-WAY
The OWNER will provide rights-of-way for the purpose of con-
struction without cost to the CONTRACTOR by securing permits
in areas of public dedication or by obtaining easements
across privately owned property. It shall be the responsibi-
lity of the CONTRACTOR, prior to the initiation of construc-
tion on easements through private property, to inform the
property owner of his intent to begin construction. Before
beginning construction in areas of public dedication, the
CONTnACTOR shall inform the agency having jurisdiction in the
area prior to the initiation of the work.
8. CONSTRUCTION IN PUBLIC ROADWAYS AND PRIVATE DRIVEWAYS
No public road shall be entirely closed overnight. It shall
be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to build and maintain
all weather by-passes and detours, if necessary, and to pro-
perly light, barricade and mark all by-passes and detours
that might be required on and across the road involved in the
work included in this Contract.
The CONTRACTOR shall make every effort to complete construc-
tion and allow immediate access to adjacent property at all
driveway entrances located along the roads. Owners or
tenants of improvements where access and/or entrance drives
are located shall be notified at least eight (8) hours prior
SC-2
to the time the construction will be started at their drive-
ins or entrances and informed as to the length of time drive-
ways will be closed, which period shall not exceed six (6)
hours.
The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all road and entrance
reconstruction and repairs and maintenance of same, for a
period of one (1) year from the date of such reconstruction.
In the event the repairs and maintenance are not made immedi-
~ . ately to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER, and it becomes
necessary for the OWNER to make such repairs, the CONTRACTOR
shall reimburse the OWNER for the cost of such repairs.
The CONTRACTOR shall, at all times, keep a sufficient width
of the roadway clear of dirt and other material to allow the
free flow of traffic. The CONTRACTOR shall assume any and
all responsibility for damage, personal or otherwise, that
may be caused by the construction along public roadways or
private driveways.
i.. 9. REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS
Where reference is made in these specifications to specifica-
- tions complied by other agencies, organizations or depart-
ments, such reference is made for expediency and standardiza-
tion from the material suppliers' point of view, and such
ispecifications referred to are hereby made a part of these
specifications. Reference to other standard specifications
shall be to the latest revision of the specifications.
( 10. PUBLIC UTILITIES AND OTHER PROPERTY TO BE CHANGED
I
In case it is necessary to change or move the property of any
owner of a public utility, such property shall not be moved
or interfered with until ordered to do so by the'ENGINEER.
The right is reserved to the Owner of public utilities to
.. enter upon the limits of the project for the purpose of
making changes or repairs property may
such
of
their
that
be
made necessary by performance of this Contract.
11. TRADE NAMES AND MATERIALS
%
No material which has been used by the CONTRACTOR for any
temporary purpose whatever is to be incorporated in the per-
manent structure without written consent of the ENGINEER.
Where materials or equipment are specified by a trade or
brand name, it is not the intention of the OWNER to dis-
criminate against an equal product of another manufacturfer,
SC-3
but rather to set a definite standard of quality or perfor-
mance, and to establish an equal basis for the evaluation of
bids. Where the words "equivalent", "proper", or "equal to"
are used, they shall be understood to mean that the item
referred to shall be proper, the equivalent of, or equal to
some other item, in the opinion or judgment of the ENGINEER.
Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be the best
of their kinds and shall in all cases fully equal
respective
to approved samples. Notwithstanding that the words "or
equal to" or other such expressions may be used in the speci-
fications in connection with a material, manufactured article
or process, the material, article or process specifically
designated shall be used, unless a substitute shall be
approved in writing by the ENGINEER, and the ENGINEER shall
have the right to require the use of such specifically desig-
nated material, article or process.
1 2 PROJECT MAI NTENANCE
The CONTRACTOR shall maintain and keep in good repair the
improvements covered by these plans and specifications during
the life of his contract.
1 3. EXISTING STRUCTURES
The plans show the locations of all known surface and subsur-
face structures. However, the OWNER assumes no responsibi-
lity for failure to show any or all of these structures on
the Plans, or to show them in their exact location. It is
mutually agreed that such failure shall not be considered
sufficient basis for claims for additional compensation for
extra work or for increasing the.pay quantities in any manner
whatsoever, unless the obstruction encountered is such as to
necessitate changes in the lines or grades, or requires the
building of special work, provisions for which are not made
in the plans and proposal, in which case the provisions in
these specifications for extra work shall apply.
14. USE OF EXPLOSIVES
Use uf explosives will be allowed only upon written instruc-
tions of the ENGINEER.
Should the CONTRACTOR elect to use explosives in the prose-
cution of the work, the utmost care shall be exercised so as
not to endanger life or property. The OWNER shall not be
liable for damages done by the CONTRACTOR in the use of
explosives. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the proper repre-
sentative of any public service, corporation, any company, or
any individual, not less than eight (8) hours in advance of
the use of explosives which might endanger or damage their or
SC -4
his property along or adjacent to the work. Whenever explo-
sives are stored or kept, they shall be stored in a safe and
secure f~nner and all storage places be plainly marked
"DANGEROUS EXPLOSIVES", and shall be under the care of a
competent watchman at all times.
BARRICADES, LIGHTS AND WATCHMEN
Where the work is carried on in or adjacent to any street,
alley or public place, the CONTRACTOR shall at his own cost
and expense furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights
and danger signals, shall provide such watchmen, and shall
provide such other precautionary measures for the protection
of persons or property and of the work as are necessary.
Barricades shall be painted in a color that will be visible
at night. From sunset to sunrise the CONTRACTOR shall fur-
nish and maintain at least one light at each barricade and
sufficient number of barricades shall be erected to keep
vehicles from being driven on or into any work under con-
struction. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish watchmen in suffi-
cient numbers to protect the work.
The CONTRACTOR will be held responsible for all damage to the
work due to failure of barricades, signs, lights, and watch-
men to protect it, and whenever evidence is found of such
damage, the ENGINEER may order the damaged portion immediate-
ly removed and replaced by the CONTRACTOR at his cost and
expense. The CONTRACTOR'S responsibility for the maintenance
of barricades, signs and lights, and for providing watchmen
shall not cease until the project shall have been accepted by
the OWNER.
The CONTRACTOR shall use only battery powered lights, en-
closed lantern or other lights satisfactory to the ENGINEER.
Smudge Pots or other lights which have an open flame will not
be permitted.
FENCES, DRAINAGE CHANNELS AND CROP DAMAGE
Boundary fences or other improvements removed to permit the
prosecution of the work shall be replaced in the same loca-
tion and left in a condition as good or better than that in
which they were found.
Where surface drainage channels are disturbed or blocked dur-
ing construction, they shall be restored to their original
condition or grade and cross section after the work of con-
struction is completed.
SC-5
The CONTRACTOR shall not be held liable for unavoidable
damage to crops provided such damage occurs within the
construction easement provided by the OWNER.
17. DISPOSAL OF WASTE AND SURPLUS EXCAVATION
All trees, stumps, slashings, brush or other debris removed
from the Project site or right-of-way as a preliminary to the
construction of the work or its appurtenances shall be re-
moved from the property and disposed of in a manner approved
by the ENGINEER.
All excavated earth in excess of that required for back-
filling shall be removed from the job site and disposed of in
a satisfactory manner except in locations where, in the judg-
ment of the ENGINEER, it can be neatly spread over and along
the ri ght-of-way.
18. WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION
Water used for testing, sterilizing and flushing of pipe
lines, and the tanks or any other purpose incidental to this
project, will be furnished by the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR
shall make the necessary arrangements for securing and/or
J~ transporting such water and shall take such water in a manner
and at such times that will not produce a harmful drain or
decrease of pressure in the OWNER'S water system. The CON-
TRACTOR shall be fully responsible for the draining and dis-
posal of all water used in sterilizing and testing. The
CONTRACTOR shall obtain approval of the OWNER and ENGINEER
of the manner in which the water will be drained and disposed
of.
19. WAGE RATES
All employees of the CONTRACTOR on the work to be performed
under this Contract shall be paid the prevailing wage scale
in this locality for work of a similar character.
20. GUARANTY AGAINST DEFECTIVE WORK
The CONTRACTOR shall indemnify the OWNER against any repairs
which may become necessary to any part of the work performed
under the Contract, arising from defective workmanship or
materials used therein, for a period of one (1) year from the
date of final acceptance of the work.
SC -6
21. COORDINATION WITH OTHERS
In the event other contractors are doing work in the same
area simultaneously with this project, the CONTRACTOR shall
coordinate his proposed construction with that of the other
contractors.
The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate all work with the OWNER'S
utility department to prevent prolonged interruption of
service to any customer.
22. CLEANUP
At the conclusion of the work, all tools, temporary struc-
tures and materials belonging to the CONTRACTOR shall be
promptly removed and all dirt, rubbish and other foreign
substances shall be disposed of.
The CONTRACTOR shall thoroughly clean all equipment and
materials installed by him and shall deliver over such
materials and equipment undamaged in a bright, clean,
polished and new appearing condition.
23. CONTRACTOR'S AND SUBCONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE
The CONTRACTOR shall not commence work under this Contract
until he has obtained at his expense all insurance required
under this section of the General Conditions and by the Con-
tract Documents, and such insurance has been approved by the
OWNER, nor shall the CONTRACTOR allow any subcontractor to
commence work on any subcontract until all similar insurance
required of the subcontractor has been so obtained and ap-
proved. Such insurance shall remain in full force and effect
on all phases of the work, whether or not the work is occu-
pied or utilized by the OWNER, until all work under the
Contract is completed and has been accepted by the OWNER.
Nothing contained in the insurance requirements shall be
construed as limiting the extent of the CONTRACTOR'S
responsibility for payment of damages resulting from his
operations under the Contract.
Any insurance bearing an adequacy of performance will be
maintained after completion of the project for the full
guarantee period.
The CONTRACTOR shall obtain and maintain for the full period
of the Contract the following types of insurance in the form,
minimum limits and amounts herein specified or as may be
otherwise required in the Contract Documents. The CONTRACTOR
shall automatically renew any policy which expires during the
performance of his Contract and notify the OWNER and ENGINEER
of such a renewal prior to expiration date.
SC-7
a. Workmen's Compensation including Occupational Disease,
and Employer's Liability Insurance
Before commencement of the work, the CONTRACTOR shall
take out and maintain during the life of this Contract
Statutory Workmen's Compensation Insurance and Occupa-
tional Disease Disability Insurance for all of his em-
ployees to be enga§ed in work under this Contract, and
in case any work is sublet, the CONTRACTOR shall require
the subcontractor similarly to provide Workmen's Compen-
sation and Occupational Disease Disability Insurance for
the latter's employees engaged in such work unless such
employees are covered by the protection afforded by the
CONTRACTOR'S insurance. In case any class of employees
engaged in hazardous work under the Contract is not pro-
tected under the Workmen's Compensation Statute, or in
case there is no applicable Workmen's Compensation
Statute, the CONTRACTOR shall provide, and shall cause
each subcontractor to provide adequate insurance for the
protection of his employees not otherwise protected.
b. Public Liability and Property Dama§e Insurance
(Note "Indemnity" clause hereinafter)
F'
Before commencement of the work, the CONTRACTOR shall
submit written evidence that he and all his Sub-Contrac-
tors have obtained for the period of the Contract full
Comprehensive General Liability and Property Damage In-
surance coverage. This coverage shall protect the CON-
TRACTOR; the OWNER; the ENGINEER, its engineers; and
each of the officers, agents and employees; from claims
for damages for bodily or personal injury, sickness or
disease, including death, and from claims for dama§es to
property, which may arise directly or indirectly out of,
or in connection ~rcih the performance of work under this
Contract by the CONTRACTOR, by any of his Sub-Contrac-
tors, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed of
either of them, or under the control of either of them,
and the minimum amount of such insurance shall be as
follows unless higher minimum amounts are otherwise
required in the Contract Documents:
Public Liability Insurance in an amount not
less than Two Hundred Fifty Thousand Dollars
($250,000) for damages arising out of bodily
or personal injury, sickness or disease, or
death of one person and subject to the same
limit for each person and in an amount not
SC -8
1 ess than Five Hundred Thousand Dollars
($500,000) in any one occurance; and
Property Damage Insurance in an amount
not less than Three Hundred Thousand
Dollars ($300,000) for all damages
arising out of injury to or destruction
of property of others in any one occur-
rence with an aggregate limit in the
same amount,
The Property Damage portion of this coverage shall
include where applicable explosion, collapse and under-
ground exposure coverage. In addition, where Completed
Operation Insurance coverage is applicable, such coyer-
age will be maintained after completion and acceptance
of the project for the full guarantee period.
Automobile Liability and Property Damage Insurance
Before commencement of the work, the CONTRACTOR shall
submit written evidence that he and all his Sub-Contrac-
tors have obtained Automobile Liability and Property
Damage Insurance coverage on all self-propelled vehicles
used in connection with the Contract, whether owned,
non-owned, or hired. The liability limits shall be not
less than Two Hundred Fifty Thousand Dollard ($250,000)
for injury or death of one person and in an amount not
less than Five Hundred Thousand Dollars ($500,000) in
any one occurrence; and Property Damage limits of not
less than Three Hundred Thousand Dollars ($300,000) in
any one occurrence.
Contractual Liability Coverage
Each and every policy for Liability Insurance carried by
each CONTRACTOR and Sub-Contractor will include a "Con-
tractual Liabilty Coverage" endorsement sufficiently
broad to insure the provision titled "Indemnity" here-
inafter set forth.
Indemnity
The CONTRACTOR shall defend, indemnify and hold harm-
less the OWNER; the ENGINEER, its engineers; and each of
the officers, agents, servants and employees; from any
and all suits, actions, claims, losses or damage of any
character and from all expenses incidental to the
defense of such suits, actions or claims, based upon
or arising out of or alleged to be based upon or arising
out of (1) any injury, disease, sickness or death of any
person or persons, (2) any damages to any property
SC -9
'- including in part loss of use thereof, caused by any act
or omission of the CONTRACTOR, of any Sub-Contractor of
the CONTRACTOR, or by their officers, agents, servants,
employees, or anyone else under the CONTRACTOR'S direc-
tion and control, and arising out of, occurring in con-
.. nection with, resulting from, or caused by the perfor-
mance of any work or services called for by the Contract
~ or from conditions created by the performance or non-
performance of said work or services, but not including
~ the sole negligence of any party herein indemnified.
f. Evidence of Insurance Coverage
I Before commencement of any work, the CONTRACTOR shall
submit written evidence that he and all his Sub-Contrac-
· tors have obtained the minimum insurance required by the
I_ Contract Documents. Such written evidence shall be in
the form of a Certificate of Insurance (see attached
form) executed by the CONTRACTOR'S insurance carrier
I' showing such policies in force for the specified period
m or by furnishing a copy of the actual policy or
policies. Each policy or certificate will bear an
endorsement or statement waiving right of cancellation
[-- reduction in without ten (lO) notice in
or
coverage
days
writing to be delivered by registered mail to the OWNER,
I'
SC-lO
24. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY
The CONTRACTOR agrees that time is the essence of this
Contract, and that for each day of delay beyond the number of
calendar days herein agreed upon for the completion of the
work herein specified and contracted for (after due allowance
for such extension of time as is provided for in the General
Conditions of Agreement), the OWNER may withhold, permanently
from the CONTRACTOR'S total compensation, the sum of One Hun-
dred Dollars ($100.00) as stipulated damages for such delay.
25. EXCAVATION IN HIGHWAY RIGHTS-OF-WAY
No trench excavation within a highway right-of-way shall be
carried closer than thirty (30) feet to all pavement edges
without written permission of the Highway Department. No
dirt from trench excavation shall be piled on roadway
shoulders, slopes, ditches, and berms shall be restored to
their original condition.
The CONTRACTOR shall notify the Highway Department of his
construction schedule not less than five (5) days prior to
commencing the work within the right-of-way. The CONTRACTOR
shall, in any event, conform to the requirements of the Texas
Department of Highways and Public Transportation as to their
methods of construction and time of construction.
26. PROVISIONS FOR REROUTING AND DETOUR OF TRAFFIC
The CONTRACTOR will be required to furnish all barricades,
lights, signs and flagmen where it becomes necessary to
reroute traffic during the time construction is in progress
in the City streets or highways. The detour will be deter-
mined by the ENGINEER and approved by the OWNER and the Texas
Highway Department.
SC-11
27. SAFETY
In accordance with generally accepted construction practices,
the CONTRACTOR will be solely and completely responsible for
conditions of the job site, including safety of all persons
and property during performance of the work. This require-
ment will apply continuously and will not be limited to nor-
mal working hours.
The duty of the ENGINEER-ARCHITECT to conduct construction
review of the CONTRACTOR'S performance is not intended to
include review of the adequacy of the CONTRACTOR'S safety
measures, in, on or near the construction site.
28. EXISTING UTILITIES AND SERVICE LINES
The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the protection of all
existing utilities or service lines crossed or exposed by his
construction operations. Where existing utilities or service
lines are cut, broken or damaged, the CONTRACTOR shall
replace or repair the utilities or service lines with the
same type of original material and construction, or better,
at his own cost and expense. Where proposed water mains
cross under existing sanitary sewer mains or service
laterals, the sanitary sewer shall be replaced with cast-
iron soil pipe as shown on the detail in the plans.
Cast-iron pipe and concrete collars will not be measured or
paid for as a separate item, but the cost shall be included
in the various items listed in the Proposal.
29. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
Subsequent to award and prior to any construction, a pre-
construction conference will be held between the OWNER,
ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare and
present to the OWNER at the pre-construction conference, a
tentative schedule of the sequence in which the work will
be performed. The schedule should include the following
information:
1. Sequence in which the construction of each section
of work will be done.
2. Schedule of estimated payments based upon work
completed.
3. Period of approximate time in constructing and
initiating into service each section of work.
SC-12
4. Coordination of work using two (2) or more crews.
5. Schedule of possible night work in making tie-ins.
The above information, as provided by the CONTRACTOR, will be
used as a guide in evaluating a program in which other con-
struction work for the OWNER may be scheduled in a practical
manner.
Also, the information may be given to those concerned with
emergency equipment (fire-fighting equipment, police,
ambulance, etc.) in the area so that they may be rerouted to
their respective destinations without needless delay.
30. LINES AND GRADES
Under Section 2.01 of the GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT
after the first sentence, "unless otherwise specified, all
lines and grades shall be furnished by the OWNER or his
representative," add the following sentence:
"The ENGINEER will furnish stakes and elevations to enable
the CONTRACTOR to set forms for the construction of the
improvements. The furnishing of the stakes and elevations
does not relieve the CONTRACTOR of the responsibility of
checking to insure that the new improvements are constructed
to the lines and grades shown on the plans.
The CONTRACTOR shall take every precaution to prevent the
removal or disturbance of the construction stakes established
by the ENGINEER for this project. Should any of the stakes
be removed or otherwise disturbed through carelessness of the
CONTRACTOR, the stakes will be replaced at the expense of the
CONTRACTOR.
It may be founO necessary for the ENGINEER and OWNER to make
whatever revisions necessary in alignment, grades and
materials where during construction there is found to be
existing conditions which would warrant a more practical and
economical installation. The CONTRACTOR will be paid only
for the materials actually installed as listed in the Pro-
posal and any other compensation for the revision will not be
considered."
SC-13
31. DEWATERING EXCAVATIONS
The prospective bidders shall make sufficient subsurface
explorations to determine the location of ground water which
might be encountered. If directed by the ENGINEER, the
CONTRACTOR shall, at his own expense, utilize a well point
pumping system in order to place concrete in dewatered
excavations.
32. COPIES OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS FURNISHED
Five (5) sets of plans and specifications shall be furnished
to the CONTRACTOR, at no charge, for construction purposes.
If plans have been reduced to one-half size, three (3) sets
of those together with two (2) sets reproduced on the
original scale shall constitute the five (5) sets of plans
furnished to the CONTRACTOR. Additional copies may be
obtained at cost of reproduction upon request by the
CONTRACTOR.
33. TERMINOLOGY
Throughout these specifications, the word "shall" denotes
mandatory. The word "may" implies only permission. All
other "terms" or "word phrases" shall be interpreted as
having the meaning customarily ascribed to them by the
several building trades of the United States.
34. DATA AND MEASUREMENTS
The data given herein and shown on the drawings is as
accurate as could be obtained; its accuracy is not guaran-
teed. The CONTRACTOR must take all levels, locations,
measurements and dimensions at the job site and adapt his
work into the exact building construction. Scaled measure-
ments taken from prints are not considered for more than
reference; the larger scale drawings take precedence over the
smaller scale, and shop drawings take precedence over all
others.
SC-14
35. LOCATION OF PROJECT
This project is located in the vicinity of the City of Coppell,
Texas. The map showing the general location of this project
is included with the construction plans.
36. SCOPE OF WORK
The work to be performed under this Contract include furnish-
ing all material, labor, supervision, tools and equipment
necessary for the construction of a 500,O00-Gallon Ground
Storage Tank, complete with Sump Pump, High Service Pumps,
motors, metering and control equipment and all other related
appurtenances.
37. TIME FOR COMPLETION
The time allowed for the completion of all items of work
shall be as stated in the Proposal of this contract, how-
ever, such time shall not exceed two hundred forty (240)
consecutive calendar days, which time shall begin the
tenth (lOth) day after the issuance of the "Notice to
Proceed". The "Notice to Proceed" shall consist of a
written request by the ENGINEER for the CONTRACTOR to
proceed with the construction of the Project.
38. PREQUALIFICATION INFORMATION
The low bidder will be required to submit the following
information to the ENGINEER.
1. A list of other similar projects completed and the
approximate cost.
2. A list of the projects presently under construction,
the percentage complete and the estimated project cost.
3. A list of the equipment that will be available for con-
structing this project.
4. The name (s) of the superintendent (s) that will be on
this project and their experience in this type work.
5. The approximate number of personnel (laborers, concrete
finishers, etc.) that will be on this project.
SC-15
6. The list of sub-contractors (if any) proposed for this
project.
7. A financial statement of your firm. This will be kept
confidential and will be returned tO you promptly after
our review.
8. The name of the company which would furnish the perfor-
mance and payment bonds and the insurance on this
project.
9. A preliminary schedule of the anticipated progress of
construction.
10. A list of the major equipment suppliers which will be
furnishing the materials for this project.
39. FORMS, PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
Forms of proposal, contract, bonds, and plans and specifica-
tions are on file at the office of Mr. James R. Elium III,
City Administrator, City Hall, Coppell, Texas, and also at
the office of Hogan and Rasor, Inc., 2730 Republic National
Bank Tower, Dallas, Texas, and may be obtained at the office
of the ENGINEER upon deposit of Twenty-Five Dollars ($25.00),
which sum so deposited will be refunded, provided the prospec-
tive bidder complies with one of the following requirements:
a. If no proposal will be sumitted: All documents
will be returned to the office of the ENGINEER not
later than forty-eight (48) hours after the time
and date of receiving proposals; or
b. If proposal is submitted: All documents, except
proposal forms submitted as bid must be returned
to the office of the ENGINEER within five (5)
calendar days after the time and date of receiving
proposals.
Provided the prospective bidder complies with neither of the
two above requirements, the sum of Twenty-Five Dollars
($25.00) shall become the property of the OWNER.
SC-16
40. FIRE HYDRANTS AND VALVES
All fire hydrants used in this project shall be Mueller
Improved, A-24015, or approved equal, designed for a minimum
valve opening of 5-1/4 inches, two 2-1/2-inch hose nozzles,
one steamer nozzle and a mechanical joint inlet.
All fire hydrants used in this project shall be painted of a
particular color as selected by the Owner.
All gate valves shall be Mueller or approved equal, equipped
with an adjustable cast-iron valve box. All valve boxes
shall have a concrete pad poured around the top of the valve
box in accordance with the detail shown on the plans. The
locations at which these pads are to be poured shall be
determined by the ENGINEER.
41. HYDROSTATIC TESTING AND STERILIZATION OF THE WATER MAINS
The CONTRACTOR shall test and sterilize all water mains and
the reservoir in accordance with the applicable specifica-
tions included herein.
-- 42. PROTECTION OF DUCTILE AND GRAY CAST-IRON PIPE WITH
POLYE'I HYLENE ENCASEMENT
All ductile and cast iron pipe shall be protected with an
approved polyethylene encasement as per the American National
Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Gray and Ductile
Cast Iron Piping for Water and Other Liquids. (ANSI A21.5 -
"' 1972 and AWWA C105-72, First Edition). There will be no
additional compensation for Polyethylene Encasement. All
cost for .labor, materials and equipment necessary for
-. installation of Polyethylene Encasement, shall be included
in the price bid for Ductile Iron Pipe, complete in place.
43. PROJECT SIGN
A sign of the size and design as noted on the following
Pa9e shall be constructed and erected at a site to be de-
termined at the pre-construction conference.
No separate payment will be made for the work covered by
this section of the specifications and all cost in con-
nection therewith shall be included in the various items
of work listed in the proposal.
SC-17
SIGN
-- NAME)
;__, ( pROJECT
~: : CITY OF COPPELL PROJECT-
=
tZ3
~.. HOGAN l& RASOR,.INC.-ENG~NEERS-q
..... 'cdT-
'-'cd: CONTRACTORS NAME
SIGN LAYOUT AND MESSAGE
8'-0" - I. Sign Panel to be :5/4" Exterior
.... J ='-s' 2'-S' 2'-e' J Plywood
I I
Frame to be 2"x4" Stock
Frame to be Painted Fiat Black
i o 4. Paint Background of Sign WhJte
/j ~ 5. Paint Project Name in White Lettere
on Red Background.
~ ~ '~ . ~ ~ 6. "HOGAN. a RASOR, INC." to be
!// 'o Painted in Glossy Red.
.I
(~// J -,~ ,,,,- -(0- -~.!// -~' ~ -'~ 7. Paint Balance of Message in
- l]J I ~ mos~y mock.
'
I J ! -~, 8~ Ali Paint to be Exterior Base Paint
SIGN FRAME DETAIL
44. DEWATERING EXCAVATIONS
The prospective bidders shall make sufficient subsurface
explorations to determine the location of ground water which
might be encountered. If directed by the Engineer, the Con-
tractor 'shall, at his own expense, utilize a well point
pumping system in order to place the concrete in dewatered
excavations.
45. FOUNDATIONS AND SUPPORT
The Contractor will provide all foundations and pads for
equipment as shown. The Contractor shall check sizes to
determine if the foundations as shown will fit equipment he
proposes to install. Any changes required shall be reported
to the Engineer in writing.
The Contractor shall furnish shop drawings showing number
and type of anchor bolts required in foundations, to the
Engineer.
46. TESTING
A sufficient number of soil and material tests may be
directed by the Engineer to determine compliance with these
specifications. All tests shall be performed by a qualified
testing laboratory approved by the Engineer and all tests
will be paid for by the Owner.
47. SOIL BORINGS
The Owner has caused various core borings or auger borings to
be taken at the site. This data is not in any way guaranteed
to be representative of actual subsurface materials that will
be encountered. No extra compensation will be allowed for
any differences between soil data indicated and that which is
actually encountered.
A soil report is available for use by the Contractor, in the
City Hall, Coppell, Texas, or in the office of the Engineer,
2730 Republic National Bank Tower, Dallas, Texas 75201.
48. DURING CONSTRUCTION
During construction of the work, the Contractor shall, at all
times, keep the site of the work and adjacent premises as
free from material, debris, and rubbish as is practicable and
shall remove same from any portion of the site, if, in the
opinion of the Engineer, such material, debris, or rubbish
constitutes a nuisance or is objectionable.
The Contractor shall remove from the site all of his surplus
materials and temporary structures when no further need
therefor develops.
SC-1.8
49. SERVICE OF MANUFACTURER'S ENGINEER
The contract price shall include the cost of a competent and
experienced engineer or superintendent, when required, who
shall represent the manufacturer of any equipment or pieces
of equipment installed, to assist in the installation, adjust-
ing, testing and putting into operation above equipment in
conformity with the Contract Documents. After the equipment
is placed in permanent operation by the Owner, such engineer
or superintendent shall make all adjustments and tests re-
quired by the Engineer to prove that such equipment is in
proper and satisfactory operating condition.
50. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
The Contractor, through qualified personnel, shall adequately
instruct designated personnel of the Owner in the operation
and care of all equipment installed.
The Contractor shall also furnish and deliver to the Engineer
--- three (3) sets of instructions, technical bulletins and any
other printed matter, such as diagrams, prints or drawings,
containing full information required for the proper opera-
tion, maintenance and repair of the equipment installed and
the ordering of replacement parts.
51. COST BREAKDOWN
Immediately after being awarded a contract for the work, the
Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a cost breakdown
of each lump sum bid. Such a breakdown shall be in suffi-
cient detail to permit its use in the preparation of progress
estimates by the Engineer. Progress paj~nents for materials
and equipment on hand shall be based on invoice prices and
invoice copies must be presented to the Engineer.
52. LIGHT AND POWER
The Contractor shall provide, at his own expense, temporary
lighting facilities required for the proper prosecution and
inspection of the work.
53. FINAL FIELD TESTS
Upon completion of the work and prior to final pa~vment, all
equipment and appliances installed under this Contract shall
be subjected to acceptance tests as specified or required to
prove compliance with the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall furnish labor, fuel, energy, water, and
all other material, equipment, and instruments necessary for
all acceptance tests, at no additional cost to the City.
SC-19
54. ALTERNATE BID
The Alternate Bid as indicated on page P & BS-3 shall include
all work as shown on the Plans or as specified and described
in this proposal with the following exception.
Installation of Butterfly Valves (Dresser 450 or an
Approved Equal) for all valves 8-inch and larger.
55. CHECK VALVES
All check valves shall be slow operating silent check valves
to prevent water hammer as APCO, 600 Series, Clow F-5390
Globe Type, or an Approved Equal.
56. REQUIREMENTS OF THE STATE WATER ADMINISTRATION
The following Section 17.135 of the State Water
Administration shall be included as a part of this
project:
§ 17.135. Construction Contract Requirements
The governing body of each political subdivision receiving financial
assistance from the board shall require in all contracts for the construc-
tion of a project;
(1) that payment be made in partial pa)~nents as the ~'ork pro-
greases;
(2) that each partial payment shall not exceed 90 percent of the
amount due at the time of the payment as shown by thc enlrineer of
the project; and
(3) that payment of the 10 percent remaining due upon comple-
tion of the contract shall be made only after:
(Al approval by the engineer for the political subdivision as
required under the bond proceedings; and
(B) certification by the board that the work to be done un-
der the contract has been completed and performed in a satis-
factory manner and in accordance with sound engineering prio-
ciples and practices.
Amended by Acts 1977, 65th Leg., p. 2207, ch. 8?0, § 1, eff.
Former .~ect$on 11.416, ~s s-mended by ~hich. in openlr~ paragraph,, eul~stltut-
Acts 1973. 63rd Leg.. p. 4~$, ch. 19~ ! 1, ed "board" for "fund".
SC-20
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS NO. 1
EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS
1.01 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools,
equipment, and perform all work and services necessary for or
incidental to the furnishing and installation, complete of
all equipment as shown on drawings and as specified, in
accordance with provisions of the Contract Documents, and
completely coordinated with work of all other trades.
B. Although such work is not specifically shown or specified,
furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure, complete, and compatible installation.
1.02 QUALITY STANDARDS
A. Applicable Specifications: Refer to the following
publications or issues listed below.
American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)
A48 - Gray Iron Castings
A36 - Structural Steel
A307 - Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded
Standard Fasteners
American Iron.and Steel Institute (AISI)
1035 - ASM, Metals Handbook
Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association (AEBMA)
National Electrtical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)
MG-1 Motors and Generators
ICS Industrial Controls Systems
American Gear Manufacturer's Association (AGMA)
211.01 Standard for Surface Durability of Helical and
Herringbone Gear Teeth.
221.02 Standard for rating the strength of Helical and
Herringbone Gear Teeth.
GRI-1
260.06 Standard of Shafting, Allowable Torsional
bending Stresses
480.04 Bearings
American National Standard Institute (ANSI)
C50.70 Motor Testing and Temperature Measurement
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply to procedures outlines in the General Requirements
No. 2.
B. Lubrication System. Submit a list of oils and greases of
type reconlnended by respective equipment manufacturer. List
shall identify at least six (6) different lubricant manu-
facturers acceptable. Include with equipment submittals,
detailed locations of lubrication points.
C. Motors, Drives, Gear Motors. Submit copies of equipment
data plates.
D. Equipment Support Foundations. See requirements of these
specifications.
E. Drive Units. Submit copies of equipment data plates.
1.04 EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS
Requirements by these General Requirements apply to all equipment
and supplement detailed equipment specifications but in case of
conflict detailed equipment specifications govern when detailed
equipment specifications are more stringent.
1.05 WORKMANSHIP, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Design, fabricate, and assemble equipment in accord with best
modern engineering and shop practices. Manufacture individ-
ual parts to standard sizes and gauges so that repair parts,
furnished at any time, can be installed in field. Furnish
like parts of duplicate units to be interchangeable.
Insure that equipment has not been in service at any time
prior to delivery, except as required by tests.
B. Unless otherwise specified, provide materials suitable for
service conditions. Furnish iron castings of tough,
close-grained gray iron free from blowholes, flaws of
excessive shrinkage and conforming to ASTM A48, class 30
minimum.
GR1-2
C. Unless otherwise specified, furnish structural and
miscellaneous fabricated steel used in items of equipment in
compliance to Standards of A.I.S.C. Design structural
members in full consideration of shock or vibratory loads.
D. Unless otherwise specified, steel which will be submerged,
all or in part, during normal operation shall have a minimum
nominal thickness of 1/4 in. Use structural steel conforming
to ASTM A36 steel as a minimum standard.
E. Unless otherwise specified, provide shaft material
fabricated of AISI 1045 steel as a minimum standard.
F. Listed Equipment and Substitutions.
(1) See detailed specifications and drawings for other
equipment.
(2) Observe procedures outlined in General Requirements
No. 4.
1.06 LUBRICATION
A. Insure equipment is lubricated by systems which require
attention no more frequently than weekly during continuous
operation. Insure lubrication systems do not require
attention during startup or shutdown and do not waste
lubricants.
B. Owner may select actual brand of lubricant to be used in each
case, and Contractor shall supply selected lubricants in
sufficient quantity to fill lubricant reservoirs and to
replace consumption during testing, startup, and operations
prior to acceptance of equipment by Owner.
C. Unless otherwise specified, design grease type bearings so
that bearings are isolated from adjacent substances being
conveyed. Provide, for grease type bearings which are not
easily accessible, nylon or copper grease tubing properly
protected extended to convenient location. Furnish grease
fittings that are type that prevents over lubrication and
buildup of pressure which is injurious to bearings.
1.07 ANCHOR BOLTS
Obtain and furnish with equipment suitable anchor bolts for each
item of equipment. Obtain anchor bolts, together with templates
or setting drawings, sufficiently early to permit setting bolts
when structural concrete is placed. Furnish two nuts for each
bolt.
GR1-3
Unless otherwise specified, furnish anchor bolts for items of
equipment mounted on baseplates sufficiently long to permit
1-1/2 inches of groutaddition beneath baseplate and to provide
anchorage into structural concrete.
1.08 EQUIPMENT BASES
Unless otherwise specified, install cast iron or welded steel
baseplates provided for each pump and other items of equipment on
a concrete base. Insure baseplate provides necessary anchorage
and structural support for each piece of equipment its driving
assembly. Install pads for anchoring units, raised lip all
around, and complete with a threaded drain connection with
anchor. Anchor baseplates to concrete base with suitable anchor
bolts meeting ASTM A307 criteria and then grout void between
baseplate and pad.
1.09 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT FOUNDATIONS
A. Provide support pads as shown on Structural Detail Sheet for
equipment, whether specifically noted on equipment layouts or
not. Equipment includes but is not necessarily limited to
the following:
(1) Mechanical, Electrical, or Process Equipment.
(2) Fans, Pumps, Motors or Blowers
B. Use sizes of foundations shown on drawings for bid purposes.
Before placing equipment foundation, secure from equipment
manufacturer a certified statement of foundation criteria.
Such review by respective manufacturer shall either:
(1) Approve foundation shown and detailed as adequate
(2) Present in detail what revisions are necessary for
adequate equipment support.
C. Basic Information Requirements. In order to supply the
basics for Engineer review of equipment foundations, the
Contractor shall secure and acknowledge basic information
with equipment submittals. Include, but not necessarily
limit information to the following:
(1) Equipment Dimensions (both horizontal and vertical).
(2) Equipment weight and location of center of gravity.
(3) Criteria for designing vibration or unbalanced forces.
GR1-4
D. Any changes in equipment foundation reinforcing design will
be noted by Engineer on submittal information.
E. Do not construct foundations until approved equipment foun-
dations are available.
1.10 DRIVE UNITS
Size drive equipment capable of supporting full load, including
losses in speed reducers and power transmission. Nominal Input
horsepower rating of each gear or speed reducer shall be at least
equal to nameplate horsepower of drive motor. Design drive units
for 24-hour continuous service, constructed so oil leakage around
shafts is precluded.
A. Gearmotors. Provide gearmotors rated AGMA Class II and bear
an appropriate AGMA nameplate.
B. Gear Reducers. Each gear reducer is to be totally enclosed,
oil lubricated, with anti-friction bearings throughout.
Worm gear reducers shall have a service factor of at least
1.20. Shaft mounted gear reducers rated AGMA Class II.
Other helical, spiral bevel, and combination bevel-helical
gear reducers have a service factor of at least 1.50. Pro-
vide each gear reducer with an AGMA nameplate.
1.11 SPECIAL TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES
Furnish with equipment special tools, instruments and accessories
for periodic field repair and adjustment required for proper
maintenance. Furnish any special devices required for lifting
or handling equipment.
1.12 PAINTING, COATINGS AND SHOP PAINTING
A. Comply with requirements of other applicable sections in-
cluded herein.
B. Protect steel and iron surfaces by suitable paint or coat-
ings applied in shop. Insure that surfaces which will be
inaccessible after assembly will be protected for life of
equipment. Finish smooth, thoroughly clean and fill as
necessary exposed surfaces to provide a smooth uniform base
for painting. For surfaces to be painted after installation,
shop apply paint with minimum of two coats of primer which
will adequately protect equipment until finish coats are
applied. Shop finish, with a high-grade oil-resistant
enamel, electric motors, speed reducers, starters, and other
self-contained or enclosed components.
GR1-5
1.13 PROTECTION
A. Protect equipment during shipment, handling, and storage by
suitable boxes, crates, or other complete enclosures.
Protect equipment from exposure to elements and keep thor-
oughly dry. Store pumps, motors, electrical equipment, and
other equipment having anti-friction or sleeve bearings in
weathertight warehouses which are maintained at temperature
at least 60 degrees F.
B. Protect painted surfaces against impact, abrasion, discolora-
tion, and other damage. Repaint damaged painted surfaces to
satisfaction of Engineer.
C. Protect electrical equipment, controls, and insulation
against moisture or water damage. When space heaters are
provided in equipment, connect and operate heaters during
storage until equipment is placed in service.
1.14 INSTALLATION CHECK
A. Secure services of experienced, competent, and authorized
representative(s) of equipment manufacturer of each item
of equipment specifically required in detail specifications
to visit site of work and inspect, check, adjust and approve
equipment installation. In each case, representative(s)
shall be present during placement and start-up of equipment.
Insure and require representative(s) of equipment supplier
to be present as often as necessary until troubles are cor-
rected and equipment installation and operation are satis-
factory to Owner.
B. Secure from equipment manufacturer's representative(s) a
written report certifying that equipment (1) has been
properly installed and lubricated; (2) is in accurate align-
ment; (3) is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting
piping or anchor bolts; and (4) has been operated under full
load conditions and that it operated satisfactorily. Secure
and deliver field written report to Owner immediately prior
to leaving job site.
C. No separate payment to be made for installation check.
1.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Prepare operation and maintenance manuals as specified.
B. Include, but not necessarily limited to, following detailed
information in each manual for each type of equipment:
GR1-6
(1) Equipment function, normal operating characteristics,
and limiting conditions.
(2) Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and
checking instructions.
(3) Operating instructions for start-up, routine and normal
operation, regulation and control, shutdown, and
emergency conditions.
(4) Lubrication and maintenance instructions.
(5) Guide to "troubleshooting".
(6) Parts lists, and predicted life of parts subject to wear.
(7) Outline, cross-section, and assembly drawings; engineer-
ing data; and electrical diagrams, including elementary
diagrams, wiring diagrams, connection diagrams and inter-
connection diagrams where applicable.
(8) Test data and performance curves, where applicable.
C. Include operation and maintenance manuals with instructions
or parts lists packed with equipment when delivered.
D. Submit to Engineer, three copies each of these manuals,
printed on 8-1/2 x ll in. size paper with standard 3-hole
punching and temporarily bound in substantial covers bearing
suitable identifications, include contractors name, project
location and job number, prior to date of shipment of
equipment.
E. Reduce drawings or diagrams bound in manuals to an 8-1/2 x ll
in. or ll x 17 in. size. Where reduction is not practicable,
fold larger drawings separately and place in envelopes which
are bound into manuals. Identify on outside of each
envelope.
1.16 ELEVATION
The elevation of site is approximately 443.5 feet (MSL). Furnish
equipment designed to meet stipulated conditions and to operate
satisfactorily at this elevation.
1.17 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify each valve pump, fan, and other units of equipment
which have been assigned designation code number with number
plate corresponding to designation code shown on drawings or
listed in specifications. Assign valve numbers and gate to
every valve or gate whether scheduled, designated or not
specifically noted.
GR1-7
B. Provide number plate with numerals not less than 2 inches
high, except not less than 1/2 inch high for valves 4 inches
and less, stamped on minimum 0.063 inch anodized aluminum
or stainless steel plate and filled with black enamel.
Attach number plate to equipment so that tag cannot be
removed. For valves 4 inches and less, attach number plate
to valve with heavy aluminum or stainless steel chain with
ends soldered together.
1.18 CONSUMABLE ITEMS
A. General: Purchase necessary consumable items and charge
systems as recommended by manufacturers. Provide operating
treatment as well as ~nitial treatment, and turn equipment
over to Owner with adequately charged systems.
B. Names: Prepare a list showing brand names, types and company
names and addresses of local suppliers of all consumable
items.
C. Items. Provide consumable items consisting of, but not
limited to:
(1) Light bulbs
(2) Lubricants
D. Utilities. Provisions for water, gas, electricity, and
related services as specified in Special and/or General
Conditions.
GR1-8
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS NO. 2
SHOP DRAWINGS, PROJECT DATA AND SAMPLES
2.01 GENERAL
Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment,
and perform all work and services necessary for or incidental
to the furnishing, processing, delivery, reproduction and other
necessary functions incidental to scheduling and handling of shop
drawings, project data and samples as indicated on drawings and
or as specified, in accordance with provision of the Contract
Documents, and completely coordinated with work of all trades.
A. Although such work is not specifically shown or specified,
all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and
devices incidental to or necessary for completion of work
under this section shall be furnished and performed as part
of this work.
B. See appropriate sections for specific items for which date
and/or samples are required. See General Conditions for
additional information.
2.02 SUBMITTALS, ADDRESS.
Submit all items to:
Hogan & Rasor, Inc.
2730 Republic Bank Tower
Dallas, Texas 75201
2.03 SUBMITTALS, GENERAL
A. Prime Contractor shall be responsible for and make all
submissions. Transmit all items with two (2) copies of
letter of transmittal, the form of which will be distributed
at preconstruction conference, or is attached hereto.
B. Transmittals will be consecutively numbered.
(1) An item that is resubmitted will retain the original
number but with an added suffix letter starting at A.
(2) The scope of a transmittal shall not change on any
resubmittals.
(3) Only one specification division should be covered by one
letter of transmittal.
GR2-1
(4) Sufficient catalog information together with cuts and
technical data must be submitted to allow an evaluation
to be made to determine that the item submitted is in
compliance with the specifications.
C. Drawings transmitted to the Engineer by other than the Prime
Contractor will be returned to the Prime Contractor without
action of any kind. Drawings will not be returned to sub-
contractors.
D. Submit items sufficiently in advance of date required to
allow reasonable time for review and to allow for resub-
mission if necessary. Drawings submitted without having the
Prime Contractor's stamp of approval will also be returned
without action. Items not submitted in accord with the
provisions of theses requirements of this section will be
returned, without action for resubmission.
E. Provide within 60 days after approvals are received (3) three
Operation-Maintenance Manuals, and warranties in a separate
transmittal. Transmittal numbers for Operation-Maintenance
Manuals shall be original number of approved item plus suffix
"O-M". No action will be taken on manuals or warranties.
2.04 SUBMITTALS, SHOP DRAWINGS PROCEDURE
A. Submit to address indicated above. Identify drawings as to
manufacturer, item, use, type, project designation, speci-
fication section or drawing detail reference, and other
pertinent information.
B. As may be requested, submit one reproducible transparency and
one print of each drawing until approval is obtained. Submit
in or around mailing tube; do not fold. The submission of
prints only is NOT acceptable.
C. Allow clear space for stampqng on right hand side. Contractor
to stamp his approval on drawings prior to submission to
Engineer as indication of his checking and verification of
dimensions and coordination with interrelated items. Marks
on drawings by Contractor shall not be in red. Any marks by
Contractor shall be duplicated on all copies submitted.
Contractor marks on reproducible transparencies shall be
outlined with a rectangular box.
D. Submit standard items like equipment brochures, cuts of
fixtures, or standard catalog sheets or pages. Indicate
exact item or model and all proposed options. Include scale
GR2-2
details, sizes, dimensions, performance characteristics,
capacities, wiring diagrams, controls, and other pertinent
data.
The number of pages in those cases where transparency is not
possible to be supplied is in general minimum of 4 for Engi-
neer plus the number required by the Contractor; however, the
number required by Engineer can be varied and is dependent on
the location of the job and the number of drawings required
by the Owner. The total number of drawings is to be announ-
ced at preconstruction conference and shall not exceed 10.
2.05 SUBMITTALS, SAMPLES
A. Submit two (2) each to address indicated above. Identify
samples as to manufacturer, item, use, type, project
designation, specification section or drawing detail
reference, color range, texture, finish and other pertinent
data.
B. Forward with transmittal letters. Include brochures, shop
drawings, and installation instructions. Contractor to stamp
his approval on samples or transmittals as indication of his
checking and verification of dimensions and coordination with
interrelated items. Resubmit samples of rejected items.
C. Approved samples submitted or constructed, constitute
criterion for judging completed work. Finish work or items
not equal to samples will be rejected.
D. Samples may be retained for comparison purposes and the
Contractor shall remove samples when directed. Contractor
shall pay all costs of furnishing and removing samples.
2.06 SUBMITTALS, APPROVAL OR REJECTION
A. Transmittals returned with Approval are considered ready for
fabrication and/or installation. If for any reason a
transmittal that has an Approval is resubmitted, it must be
accompanied by a letter pointing out the changes that have
been made and the reason for the resubmittal. It shall be
the Contractor's responsibility to assure that previously
approved documents are destroyed when they are superseded by
a resubmittal as such.
B. Transmittals with an Approval combined with an action "To be
Revised and Resubmit" or "Rejected" will be individually
analyzed giving consideration as follows:
GR2-3
(1) If the items or system proposed is acceptable and the
majority of the major individual components (Drawings or
Documents) are in compliance; however, there are some
minor items not in compliance, the portion of the trans-
mittal "To Be Revised" or "Rejected" will not be distri-
buted (unless previously agreed to otherwise). Two (2)
copies or the one (1) transparency of the drawings will
be marked and returned to the Contractor "To Be Revised"
or "Rejected" It shall be the Contractor's responsi-
bility to insure that these items are corrected and
resubmitted. Items marked with an "Approval" will be
fully distributed.
(2) If the items or system proposed are acceptable; however,
the major part of the individual drawings or documents
are incomplete or require revision, the entire submittal
will be given a "To Be Revised" or "Rejected" action.
Again, it is reiterated that this is at the sole dis-
cretion of the Engineer, and some drawings may contain
relatively few or no comments or the statement "Resubmit
to maintain a complete package." Distribution to the
Owner and field will not be made (unless previously
agreed to otherwise).
(3) Approval is general and does not: permit departure from
Contract Documents; relieve Contractor from responsi-
bility for errors in detail, dimensions or related items;
approve departure from previous instructions or details;
components, wiring, etc. required to make item oper-
ational or usable.
(4) Manufacture or fabrication of Items prior to final
approval is at Contractor's own risk.
(5) If proposed equipment deviates from the specifications in
any way, the deviations shall be noted and justification
for said deviation shall be explained in detail. If
explanation is not given, shop drawings will be returned
without action.
GR2-4
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS NO. 3
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
3.01 GENERAL
A. This section covers the furnishing of all labor, materials,
tools, equipment and performing all work and services
necessary or incidental to provide, construct, furnish and
install, complete, all temporary facilities and subsequent
removal as shown on the drawings as specified, in accordance
with the provisions of the Contract Documents, and completely
coordinated with work of all other trades.
B. Although such work is not specifically shown or specified,
furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
C. No separate payment will be made for any work under this
section.
3.02 COLD WEATHER PROTECTION AND TEMPORARY HEAT
A. Heating requirements during construction are divided into two
classes.
(1) All heating required during construction period prior to
enclosure of building, classified as "Cold Weather
Protection." Such heat shall be furnished by each
contractor requiring it. Use heating units of type
approved by Engineer and conforming to safety
codes. Keep equipment and surroundings in a clean and
safe condition.
(2) Building shall be considered as enclosed when it has such
protection at doorways, windows, and other openings which
will provide a reasonable heat retention. Contractor
shall have a heating system in readiness for furnishing
temporary heat at time building is enclosed. Contractor
shall make all temporary electrical connections and
disconnect temporary connections at completion of
temporary heating period. Contractor shall operate
system, furnishing necessary labor and supervision, and
be responsible for temporary heating system and its
operation. Except as otherwise specified, maintain a
minimum temperature between 50 and 75 degrees F.; in
building at all times. Contractor shall, at his
GR3-1
expense, furnish, install, connect, and operate temporary
heating coils, air handling units or unit heaters, etc.
necessary to maintain specified temperature range.
Contractor clean and restore to prime condition any part of
permanent heating system used for temporary heat. Contractor
remove any filters used during temporary heating period and
replace with new filters. Except for piping, use no
permanent building heating equipment, reheat coils, metal air
plenums or convector cabinets for temporary heating.
B. Contractor shall pay for all fuel used for temporary heat.
Where permanent heating system is used for temporary heat and
is connected to existing service, fuel costs will be paid by
Contractor. Any warrant or guarantee period on any permanent
items used during temporary heating periods shall commence on
date of final acceptance of building by Owner.
C. In event that temporary gas fired or open flame heating
devices are used, they shall comply with local, state, and
federal laws, codes, and ordinances.
3.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY
A. Contractor shall make arrangements for and install equipment,
poles, meter, wiring, switches, outlets etc., and provide for
an adequate supply of electricity for all lighting and power
for all construction purposes. Temporary electrical power
used will be paid for by Contractor.
B. At such time as building power distribution system is
installed, Contractor may use this system for temporary
power. At completion of work, Contractor shall remove and
replace all parts of system damaged because of use for
temporary power. Warranty or guarantee period on any
permanent item used for temporary power shall commence with
date of final acceptance of building by Owner.
C. Contractor shall furnish, install, and maintain all
necessary safety, warning, and security lights to prevent
injury to persons or damage to property.
D. Contractor shall remove all temporary electrical equipment,
poles, meter, wiring, switches, and outlets at completion of
work.
E. Each Contractor provide extension cords required for his
operations.
F. Each Contractor provide any heavy duty electrical power,
GR3-2
exceeding available temporary power, required for his
operations.
G. Prior to final acceptance, remove all lamps used during
construction period and replace with new lamps.
3.04 TEMPORARY WATER
A. Contractor shall make all arrangements, install equipment
piping, and outlets for an adequate supply of clean water for
construction purposes. Contractor may tap existing line for
temporary service, if required. If specifically noted in the
Special Conditions, the Contractor shall pay for all water
used. Provide temporary meters and pay costs of installation
and use.
B. Contractor shall furnish from a proven safe source, drinking
water for all those connected with the work.
3.05 TEMPORARY TOILETS
A. Contractor shall provide temporary toilet facilities for Ose
of all workmen. Provide temporary toilet facilities
complying with local and State sanitary laws and O.S.H.A.
regulations. Maintain in clean, sanitary condition.
B. Contractor provide temporary fixtures in building as soon as
conditions permit. Contractor provide adequate supplies of
toilet paper, cleaning, and other required items.
3.06 PROJECT SIGNS
A. Contractor shall limit signs located on site. Unless
otherwise indicated, limit to those of Contractor and
Engineer.
(1) Locate and install all signs in one area, unless
otherwise indicated.
(2) Post no other signs on site except those required by law
and those approved by Engineer.
(3) Upon completion of the work, or sooner if directed by
Engineer, Contractor remove project signs.
B. Furnish and install Project Sign as per details noted herein
or on plans.
GR3.3
3.07 CONTRACTOR'S FIELD OFFICE
Contractor shall provide a temporary field office and telephone.
service for his use and use of Engineer. Contractor to pay for
all local telephone service. Long distance calls shall be paid
for by person placing call.
3.08 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES
Contractor shall furnish and install any temporary enclosures,
door, and transparent plastic covered windows required to protect
building from damage due to vandalism, weather or elements, or to
maintain suitable temperature during installation or finishing of
work. Provide all items required to ensure safety of individuals
on site.
3.09 TEMPORARY STORAGE AND WORKING AREAS
A. Each Contractor shall provide suitable and sufficient
enclosed and covered spaces, with raised flooring, to protect
materials and equipment from damage by weather or
construction work. Provide sheds to suitably store materials
and equipment needing only limited protection. Provide heat
in sheds when required to protect items from freezing damage.
B. Arrange and locate temporary structures and sheds to avoid
interfering with construction.
C. Contractor shall maintain his storage and working area in a
clean and orderly condition, free of rubbish and debris.
Upon completion of his work, or sooner if directed by
Engineer, remove temporary structures, all debris and rubbish
and leave area in clean and orderly condition.
3.10 TEMPORARY FENCES AND BARRICADES
Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain all necessary
sound temporary fences, barricades, trench and hole covers,
warning lights, and all other safety devices necessary to
prevent injury to persons and damage to property.
End of Section
GR3-4
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS NO. 4
SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS
4.01 GENERAL
'A. This section covers furnishing of all labor, materials,
tools, equipment, and performing all work and services for
furnishing, submission, processing and handling of requests
for substitution and product options. See items as indicated
on drawings and as specified. Any sustitution or option
shall be coordinated with work of other trades.
B. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish all
supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and
devices incidental to or necessary, for a sound, secure and
complete installation.
C. See appropriate sections for specific items specified. See
General Conditions for additional information.
4.02 ADDRESS FOR SUBMISSION
HOGAN & RASOR, INC.
2730 Republic Bank Tower
Dallas, Texas 75201
4.03 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION: GENERAL
A. Base bids only on materials, equipment, and procedures
specified. Certain types of equipment and kinds of material
are described in specifications by means of trade names and
catalog numbers and/or manufacturer's names. Where this
occurs, it is not intended to exclude from consideration such
types of equipment and kinds of material bearing other trade
names, catalog numbers and/or manufacturer's names, capable
of accomplishing purpose of types of equipment or kinds of
material specifically indicated. Other types of equipment
and kinds of material may be acceptable to Owner and
Engineer.
B. Types of equipment, kinds of material and methods of
construction to be used, if not specifically indicated must
be approved in writing by Engineer and be agreed upon by
Owner prior to letting of Contract, except as indicated
herein. Conditional bids will not be accepted.
GR4-1
4.04 SUBMISSION OF REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION
A. During bidding period, Engineer will consider written
requests from Prime Bidders (Contractors) for substitutions
of products, materials, systems or other items. Requests
must be received by Engineer at least ten calendar days prior
to bid date. This time frame is essential to allow time to
issue addenda to inform all bidders of approved substitutions
or alternatives. Requests received after that time will not
be considered.
B. Engineer reserves the right to require substitute items to
comply color and pattern-wise with base specified items, if
necessary to secure "design intent."
C. Submit three (3) copies of request for substitution. Include
in request:
(1) Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed
substitution with Contract Documents.
(2) For products:
(a) Product identification, including manufacturer's
name.
(b) Manufacturer's literature, marked to indicate
specific model, type, and size to be considered:
1. Product description.
2. Performance and test data.
3. Reference standards.
(c) Submit samples, full size if so required. Engineer
reserves right to impound sample until physical
units are installed on project for comparison
purposes. All costs of furnishing and return of
samples shall be paid by requester. Architect is
not responsible for loss of or damage to samples.
(d) Name and address of similar projects on which
product was used, date of installation, and field
performance data on installation.
(3) For construction methods:
(a) Detailed description of proposed method.
(b) Drawings illustrating methods.
GR4-2
(4) Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product
or method specified.
(5) Data relating to changes in construction schedule.
(6) Relation to separate contracts.
(7) Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison
with product or method specified.
D. In making request for substitution, or in using an approved
substitute item, Bidder/Contractor represents:
(1) He has personally investigated proposed product or
method, and has determined that it is equal or superior
in all respects to that specified, and that it will
adequately perform function for which it is intended.
(2) He will provide same guarantee for substitute item as
for product or method specified.
(3) He will coordinate installation of accepted substitution
into Work, to include building modifications if
necessary, making such chan§es as may be required for
work to be complete in all respects and to allow its use
in project.
(4) He waives all claims for additional costs related to
substitution which subsequently become apparent.
E. An addenda listing approved substitutions will be published.
No verbal or written approvals other than by Addenda will be
made.
4.05 SUBSTITUTION AFTER BID DATE
A. Non-availability of specified item due to strikes, lockouts,
bankruptcy, discontinuance of production, proven shortage, or
similar occurances are only reasons for substitution.
B. Contractor concerned shall notify Engineer, in writing, with
substantiating data as soon as condition becomes apparent.
C. Request sufficiently in advance to avoid delay in
construction.
D. Submit data as required in paragraph 4 above.
GR4-3
4.06 SUBMISSION OF DATA ON OPTIONS
A. Submit three (3) copies of complete list of products,
equipment, and subcontractors broken down by specification
sections. Where a section lists several items or
manufacturers as approved equals, or item is described by
reference standard submit list indicating which specific
items Contractor will use. Only items which have been
specified or approved by Addenda may be used. Submit list
within 14 days after award of contract. No partial payment
requests will be processed until this data and other
submissions required by Contract Documents are received.
B. For products specified under reference standards, include
with listing of each product:
(1) Name and address of manufacturer.
(2) Trade name.
(3) Model or catalog designation.
(4) Manufacturer's data.
(a) Performance and test data.
(b) Reference standards.
4.07 CONTRACTOR'S OPTION
A. For products specified only by reference standards, select
any product meeting standards, by any manufacturer, indicate
selected type in submission.
B. For products specified by naming several products or
manufacturers, select any product and manufacturer named,
indicate selected type in submission.
C. For products specified by naming one or more products, but
indicating option of selecting equivalent products by stating
"or equal" after specified product, Contractor must submit
request, as required for substitution, for any products not
specifically named.
4.08 REJECTION OF SUBSTITUTION OR OPTIONAL ITEMS
Substitutions and/or options will not be considered if:
A. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings, or
project data submittals, without formal request submitted
in accord with this section
GR4-4
B. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract
Documents, or building spaces.
C. If they are not equal to base product specified, or will not
perform adequately or function for which intended.
C. Request for substitution does not indicate specific item for
which request is submitted. General acceptance of a
manufacturer only will not be made.
End of Section
GR4-5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS NO. I
SITE CLEARING
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools,
equipment, and perform all work and services necessary for or
incidental to the performance and completion of all site
clearing, tree protection, and demolition as shown on
drawings as specified, in accordance with provisions of the
Contract Documents, and completely coordinated with work of
all other trades.
B. Although such work is not specifically shown or specified,
furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items
appurtenances, and devices incidental to or necessary fo a
sound, secure, and complete installation.
1.02 QUALITY STANDARDS
Perform work in accord with OSHA requirements in addition to
State and local requirements.
1.03 PROTECTION
A. Provide barricades, coverings, or other types of protection
necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements
indicated to remain in place.
B. Protect improvements on adjoining properties as well as those
on Owner's property.
C. Restore any improvements damaged by this work to their
original condition, as acceptable to Owner or other parties
or authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated to
remain against unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of
roots, skinning and bruising of back, smothering of trees by
stockpiling construction materials or excavated materials
within drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or
parking of vehicles within drip line. Provide temporary
fences, barricades or guards as required to protect trees and
vegetation to be left standing.
E. Water trees and other vegetation which are to remain within
limits of construction work as required to maintain their
health during period of construction operations.
TSi-1
F. Provide protection for roots of over 1-1/2 inch diameter that
are cut during construction operations. Coat cut faces with
an emulsified asphalt, or other acceptable coating,
especially formulated for horticultural use on cut or damaged
plant tissues. Temporarily cover all exposed roots with wet
burlap to prevent roots from drying out; provide earth cover
as soon possible
G. Repair or replace trees and vegetation damaged by
construction operations, in manner acceptable to Engineer.
Repair to be performed by a qualified tree surgeon. Remove
trees which cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth
status, as determined by tree surgeon and replace with new
trees of minimum 6 inch caliber.
1.04 SITE CLEARING - GENERAL
Remove trees, shrubs, grass, weeds and other vegetation.
Improvements, or obstructions that interfere with new
construction specifically indicated. Removal includes stumps of
trees and their roots. Carefully and cleanly cut roots and
branches of trees indicated to be left standing, where such roots
and branches obstruct new construction.
1.05 TOPSOIL REMOVAL
A. Topsoil is defined as friable clay loam surface soil found in
a depth of not less than 4 inches. Satisfactory topsoil is
reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other
objects over 2 inches in diameter, and without weeds, roots,
and other objectionable material.
B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered, and in manner
to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other
objectionable material. Remove heavy growths of grass from
areas before stripping.
C. Where trees are indicated to be left standing, stop topsoil
stripping a sufficient distance from such trees to prevent
damage to main root system. Do not strip topsoil in wooded
areas where no change in grade occurs.
D. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas indicated or
where directed. Construct storage piles to freely drain
surface water. Seed or cover storage piles if required to
prevent wind-blown dust or erosion.
1.06 CLEARING AND GRUBBING.
A. Clearing consists of removal from above the surface of
existing ground all trees not marked to remain, shrubs,
TS1-2
brush, downed timber, rotten wood, heavy growth of grass and
weeds, vines, rubbish, structures, and other debris.
B. Grubbing consists of removal of stumps, roots, root mats,
logs, and debris encountered within limit of contract.
1.07 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS
A. Burning of combustible cleared and grubbed materials is not
permitted on Owner's property.
B. Remove all waste materials from Owner's property and legally
dispose of it.
C. Do not bury excavated stumps, logs, roots or other organic
matter on site.
TS1-3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS NO. 2
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES
2.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
The work to be performed under this section of the specifica-
tions shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment and
materials, and in performing all operations necessary in
connection with the site preparation, excavation and back-
filling for all structures, including footings, slabs, walks,
etc., as shown in the plans and as specified herein.
2.02 SITE PREPARATION
Site preparation shall include be performed in strict com-
pliance with Technical Specifications No. 1 - Site Clearing.
2.03 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES
A. General
Excavation shall include the removal of any stumps,
debris and other obstacles that may obstruct the con-
struction of the work and the excavation and removal
of all earth, rock or other materials to the extent
necessary to construct all the work shown on the plans.
The excavation shall conform to the dimensions and
elevations indicated on the drawings for each structure.
Excavation shall extend a sufficient distance from walls
to allow for placing and removal of forms, installation
of piping, and for inspection. Concrete for footings
shall be deposited directly against excavated surfaces.
Excavation for foundations and footings shall not be
plowed, scraped, or machine-dug closer than 3 inches to
the finished subgrade elevation. The last layer of
excavation shall be removed by hand labor to the exact
lines and grades just before placing the work.
B. Shoring and Sheeting
Such shoring and sheeting as may be required during
excavation shall be installed to protect the banks,
adjacent structures, and utilities.
TS2-1
C. Excess Material
Excess material from excavation, not required for fill or
backfill, Shall be deposited, spread and graded where in-
dicated on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
When required by the Engineer, any top soil over excavated
areas shall be separately piled at a convenient place and
later used as a top dressing for all new berms and embank-
ments to a minimum depth of four (4) inches.
D. Benchmarks and Stakes
The Contractor shall carefully maintain and protect all
benchmarks and reference stakes and if disturbed or damaged,
replace as directed by the Engineer at the expense of the
Contractor.
E. Protection of Facilities
Existing utility lines (either overhead or underground),
sidewalks, or pavement designated on the drawings, shown
to the Contractor or mentioned in the specifications shall
be kept free of damage by the Contractor's operations. If
damaged, any utilities, sidewalks or pavements shall be
restored at the Contractor's expense. If any utility is not
known as above in time to prevent damage and if inadvertently
damaged during operations, the Contractor shall notify the
Engineer and the Owner of said utility at once so that
emergency repair may be made at the Contractor's expense.
F. Drainage in the Vicinity of StructuYes
The Contractor shall control the grading in the vicinity of
all structures so that the surface of the ground will be
properly sloped or diked to prevent water from running
into the excavated areas. Any water which accumulates in
the excavation shall be promptly removed by the Contractor.
G. Grubbing
All roots, stumps, and other debris shal) be removed from
the site. All depressions resulting from the removal of
stumps, roots and debris shall be filled with suitable
materials and compacted to make the surface conform to
the surrounding ground.
H. Dispos.al.._of Cleared or Grubbed Material
All timber, logs, stumps, roots, brush and other refuse from
clearing and grubbing operations shall become the property
of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site.
TS2-2
Whenever, through neglect of the Contractor, t ekcavation is
carried beyond or below the lines and grades giv6'n by the
Engineer, or shown on the plans, all such excavated space shall
be refilled with such material and in such a manner as may be
directed by the Engineer, in order to insure the stability of
the various structures. Beneath all structures, space excavated
without authority shall be refilled by the Contractor, at his own
expense, with 2,000 p.s.i, concrete, gravel backfill or selected
fill materials, as directed by the Engineer.
2.05 FOUNDATI ON
A. From a foundation standpoint, all supporting soils under
slabs or footings may be considered moderately expansive.
!n order to minimize future swell, in-place moisture content
shall be maintained during excavation and construction
operations. Accordingly, the Contractor shall place a
2,000 p.s.i, concrete seal of two (2) inches thickness over
the finished subgrade. The placement of the concrete seal
shall not exceed six (6) hours after completion of the
finished subgrade. Material and labor required for this sub-
grade protection will not be measured or paid for separately.
B. After completion of the excavation and prior to placing the
reinforcing steel and/or concrete, the Contractor shall
notify the Engineer who will inspect the excavation to
it insure that suitable foundations have been reached. Approval
of the excavations shall be obtained at the time of their
completion and again immediately prior to placing of rein-
forcing steel and/or concrete for footings, piers and slabs.
2.06 PROTECTIO~N AGAINST LOSS OF MOISTURE
Soils are susceptible to volume change due to variations in
moisture content. Therefore, all excavation shall be pro-
tected against excessive loss of moisture during construc-
tion. The Contractor shall make every effort to place
concrete upon excavated areas within a minimum amount of
time after excavation has been finished. It shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor to keep moisture content
of the subgrade at the original value by any method approved
by the Engineer. In any areas where sand fill is used under
slabs, this sand shall be kept moist to keep moisture from
escaping the subgrade. If for any reason the subgrade is
allowed to dry out, the Contractor shall inject water into
the subgrade to raise moisture content to the satisfaction
of the Engineer. By the same token, excessive moisture will
not be allowed in the excavation at the time of placing
concrete.
Tests for moisture content have been made at locations of
the borings shown on the plans and records of the tests are
available for information at the City Hall or from the
Eng i neer.
TS2-3
2.07. FILLING .,'..j
A. Where concrete slabs are placed on earth, all organic or
othe~ undesirable material, as determined by the Engineer
shall be removed. Where fill is required to raise the
subgrade for concrete slabs to the elevation as indicated
on the drawings, such fill shall consist of suitable
earth as approved by the Engineer.
B. The approved materials shall be placed in successive
horizontal layers of loose material not more than 6
inches thick where compaction is by rollers or vibration
and 4 inches thick where mechanical tamping is required.
For cohesive soils each layer shall be wetted or dried by
aeration to a moisture content of 3 to 5 per cent above
optimum beneath all floor slabs. If uniformly graded
sands are used, the fill shall be placed completely dry
or fully saturated to prevent bulking. Well graded
gravel shall be placed at the optimum moisture content.
2.08 BACKF...ILLING AROUND STRUCTURES
A. After completion of foundation footings, walls and other con-
struction below the elevation of the final grades, and prior
to backfilling, all forms shall be removed and the excavation
cleaned of all trash and debris. Material for backfill shall
be obtained from the excavation and shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer. Backfill shall be placed in hori-
zontal layers not to exceed 6 inches in thickness. Each
layer shall be compacted with proper moisture content and
with such equipment as may be required to obtain a density
equal to or greater than ninety per cent (90%) of the maximum
dry density as determined by the "Modified Proctor Compaction
Test" Trucks or heavy equipment for depositing backfill or
for compacting shall not be used with 5 feet of building
walls, piers, or other facilities which may be damaged by
their weight or operation. Methods of compaction shall be
subject to approval of Engineer. Care must be taken not to
damage the structure.
B. Consolidation of backfill may be accomplished by flooding, or
.. jetting, with the Engineer's approval, in lieu of tamping as
specified above, provided it is done in such a manner as to
secure uniform consolidation throughout the backfill.
C. Backfilling shall begin only with approval of the Engineer,
and in no case shall backfill be placed against concrete or
masonry walls 4 feet and over in height that are unsupported
on their inside face until these walls have been in place for
seven (7) days of good curing weather.
TS2-4
t !
2.09 GRANULAR FILL UNDER SLAB
A. Granular fill shall be provided under slabs as shown. Granu-
lar fill shall Consist of free flowing materials such as
sand, gravel, or mixture of sand and gravel, free from lumps,
large stone, clay and organic materials.
B. The voids in the top surface of the granular fill shall be
filled with sand, crushed stone screenings, crushed gravel
screenings, or concrete as indicated on the drawings to
provide a smooth even surface. Fill shall be leveled and
tamped as directed by the Engineer.
2.10 FILL AROUND DRAIN LINES
Under slab and perimeter drains shall be backfilled with gravel
conforming to ASTM C33, graded 3/4" to #4.
2.11 CONSTRUCTION OF EMBANKMENTS AND FILLS
-A. Before fill is started, scarify to a minimum depth of 6
inches all proposed embankment and fill areas under proposed
roads, parking lots, or streets. In areas where ground sur-
face is steeper than one vertical to four horizontal, plow
surface in a manner to bench and break up surface so that
fill material will bind with existing surface.
B. Use fill materials reasonably free of roots, organic matter,
trash or frozen material. Remove all soft and yielding
material which will not compact readily and replace with
suitable material.
C. It has been assumed that minor areas of materials unsuitable
for fill, and areas unsuitable to fill on, will be encoun-
tered in the normal course of work. Should areas of un-
suitable material be encountered totaling 200 cubic yards
or less, it shall be removed and replaced with suitable
material at the Contractor's expense. If unsuitable material
is encountered in excess of 200 cubic yards, it shall be re-
moved and replaced with suitable material and that portion in
excess of 200 cubic yards will be paid for as "Extra Work".
D. Allow material containing an excess of water to dry to a
moisture content which will allow acceptable compaction.
Material excessively wet or dry and not at optimum moisture
content is not considered unsuitable.
E. Construct embankments and fills at locations and to lines
of grade indicated. Completed fill shall correspond to
shape of typical cross section or contour indicated regard-
less of method used to show shape, size, and extent of line
and grade of completed work.
TS2-5
F. Provide fill material which is free from..~roots, organic
matter, trash, frozen material, and stones having a
maximum dimension greater than 6 inches. Insure that
stones larger than 4 inches are not placed in upper 6
inches of fill or embankment. Place material in maximum
8 inch loose thickness. Place layers horizontally and
compact each layer prior to placing additional fill.
G. Compact by sheapsfoot or pneumatic rollers, vibrators or
other suitable equipment. Control moisture for each layer
as necessary to meet requirements of compaction. Do not
place materials in embankments or fills which exceeds
optimum moisture content by 3 percent or is 3 percent
below optimum moisture content.
H. Compact fills and embankments accordingly:
(1) Under roadways and parking areas and extending 1 foot
beyond proposed curb line measured perpendicular from
centerline, compact to density not less than 95 percent
maximum dry density as determined by the Modified
Proctor Method and measured by ASTM 01557.
(2) Under proposed building and structure sites, compact
to density as otherwise specified herein or on the
construction drawings.
(3) For other embankments and fills not listed, compact
to not less than 90 percent of maximum dry density as
determined by the Modified Proctor Method, ASTM 01557.
(4) Owner will hire an independent soils laboratory to con-
duct in place moisture-density tests to insure that all
work complies with this Specification. Any compacted
material not meeting specified compaction requirements
shall be corrected and/or recompacted and retested at
Contractor's expense.
I. Borrow. Provide, at no extra cost, necessary amount of
approved fill compacted to density indicated. Borrow or fill
cannot be obtained on site except when specially permitted by
Engineer.
J. Surplus earth material. If surplus earth material is en-
countered, remove from site, or at the Owner's option, it
may remain on the site in areas as designated by the
Engineer. Compact all excess material as specified. All
additional expenses will be paid by the Contractor.
2.12 .MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENTS
Unless otherwise provided in the Special Conditions or Proposal,
no separate payment will be made for any items under this
Technical Specification and all costs in connection therewith
shall be included in the contract price for related items in
the Proposal.
TS2-6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS NO. 3
TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING FOR UTILITIES
3.01 GENERAL
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools,
equipment and perform all work and services necessary for or
incidental to the furnishing and installation, complete, of all
operations in connection with excavation, trenching and back-
filling of underground utilities as shown on drawings and as
specified, in accordance with provisions of the Contract Docu-
ments, and completely coordinated with work of all other trades.
A. Work included in the project consists of, but is not limited
to, installation of the following utility items:
(1) Sanitary sewers and drain piping.
(2) Water piping.
(3) Electrical service and control wiring.
(4) Related utility appurtenance.
B. Although such work is not specifically shown or specified,
all supplementary or miscellaneous items appurtenances and
devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure,
complete, and compatible installation shall be furnished and
installed as part of this work.
3.02 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
A. The following standards, which, along with their included
references, are hereby made a part of this specification.
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF TESTING MATERIALS
ASTM D2049 Moisture - Density Relationship
for Cohesionless Materials.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY
AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS
AASHTO T99 Moisture - Density Relationship
of Soils using a 5.5 pound ram-
mer and a 12 in. drop
AASHTO T180 Moisture - Density Relationship
of Soils using a 10 pound rammer
and a 18 in. drop.
TS3-1
B. For convenience, reference is made in succeeding paragraphs
to specific portions of the various standards, including
modifications or additions thereto. Neither the reference
nor the modifications or additions are intended to
de-emphasize any other portion of the standards.
C. It is the intent of this specification that whenever a
procedure or technique is not called out herein, that the
industry standard as required by ASTM, AASHTO, ACI or other
appropriate recommendation, shall be used. Standards shall
be those effective on the date of the Invitation to Bid.
3.03 PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES
A. Verify location and existence of all underground utilities.
Omission from or inclusion of located utility items does not
constitute non-existence or definite location. Secure and
examine utility records for available location data.
B. Take necessary precautions to protect existing utilities from
damage due to any construction activity. Repair all damages
to utility items at sole expense. Assess no cost to Owner,
Engineer or auxiliary party for any damages.
C. Avoid overloading or surcharge with a sufficient distance
back from edge of excavation to prevent slides or caving.
Maintain and trim excavated materials in such a manner to be
as little inconvenience as possible to public and adjoining
property owners.
D. Provide full access to public and private premises, to fire
hydrants, at street crossings, sidewalks and other points as
designated by the Engineer to prevent serious interruption of
travel.
3.04 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION
Remove and dispose of rock excavation, clay, silt, gravel,
hard pan, loose shale, and loose stone as directed by the
Engineer.
3.05 TRENCH EXCAVATION
A. Unless given permission to do otherwise, excavate
trenches by open cut method to depth shown on plans and
and necessary to accomodate the work. Permission may be
granted for tunnel work for crossing under crosswalks,
driveways or existing utility lines, however, such tunnels
are limited to ten (10) feet in length.
TS3-2
B. Open only length of trench at one time allowed by the Engi-
neer. Do not open more than 300 lineal ft. trench at one
time. Failure to comply may necessitate shutdown of entire
project until backfilling is performed.
C. Observe the following trenching criteria:
(1) Trench size. Excavate only sufficient width to accomo-
date free working space. In no case shall trench width
at the top of pipe or conduit exceed outside diameter of
utility service by following dimensions:
Overall Diameter
of Utility Service Excess Dimension
33 inches and less 16 inches
greater than 33 inches 24 inches
Cut trench walls vertically from bottom of trench to a
minimum of of one foot (1.0') above top of pipe, conduit,
or utility, or utility service. Whenever the prescribed
maximum trench width is exceeded, except as such excess
may be necessary for compliance with the plans or speci-
fications, the pipe shall be cardeled with Class 2,000
Concrete as directed by the ENGINEER, and at the expense
of the CONTRACTOR.
(2) Dewatering. Keep trenches free of water. Include cost
of dewatering in original proposal. No additional
remuneration for this item is permitted.
(3) Sheeting and Bracing. Brace and sheet trenches as soil
conditions dictate, and in full observation of OSHA, as
well as all local, State, and other federal requirements.
Do not remove sheeting until backfilling has progressed
to a stage that no damage to piping, utility service, or
conduit will result due to removal.
3.06 PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION FOR PIPE LAYING
A. Exercise care to avoid excavations below established grade
where firm earth conditions exist. If over-excavation
occurs, backfill in 2-inch lifts and thoroughly compact with
pneumatic tamps.
B. In case of rock excavation, carry excavation a minimum of 12
inches below established grade and backfill to grade with
suitable earth, sand or pea gravel. Material used shall be
free of rocks, roots, sod or organic matter and shall be
firmly compacted in 2-inch lifts. Form bell holes in trench
such that only the barrel of pipe is finally supported by
bedding material.
TS3-3
C. Where soft or spongy material is encountered in the
excavation at subgrade level, it shall be removed, only
upon the direction of the Engineer, to such a depth that
by replacing the unsuitable material with tamped gravel a
firm and stable foundation can be secured.
3.07 BACKFILLING
A. Do not backfill until all tests to be performed on system
are in full compliance to specified requirements.
B. Trench Backfill Material. Use only backfill for trenches
which is free from boulders, large roots, sod, other
vegetative or organic matter, and frozen material. Hand
or pneumatic tamp backfill under and around pipe up to
24 inches above top of pipe in lifts not exceeding 8
inches loose thickness. Backfill and compact remainder
of trench in 8-inch lifts to density specified or as
required by the Engineer.
C. Perform pneumatic tamping evenly on both sides of pipe to
top of excavation or to a depth such that pipe will not
be injured by subsequent method of compaction used to
achieve required density.
D. Exercise extreme care in backfilling operations to avoid
displacing pipe joints either horizontally or vertically
and avoid breaking the pipe.
E. Water flushing for consolidation may be permitted in
certain areas only with the approval of the Engineer.
3.08 COMPACTION
A. Compact all trench backfill to a density required in
accordance with the applicable testing procedure and
within the moisture content limits specified herein, as
follows:
Under pavements, 95 percent of
roadways, highway Cohesive max. density ASTM D1557
and/or railroad
rights of ways, all
other surfaced areas.
Under turfed, Cohesive 90 percent of ASTM D1557
sodded, seeded, max. density
non-traffic or (See 3.07, e.)
open areas.
Insure backfill materials have a moisture content in the
range of plus 5 percent or minus 3 percent of the optimum
moisture content at the time of placement.
TS3-4
3.09 TESTING
A. Perform in-place moisture-density tests as ordered by
ENGINEER to insure trench backfill complies with
requirements. Tests shall be performed through
recognized testing laboratory and all costs of passing
tests to be paid by Owner. Copies of test results will
be furnished to Contractor and ENGINEER. Where backfill
compaction does not pass moisture-density test
requirements and after backfill has been removed as
directed by ENGINEER and situation corrected, additional
tests will be directed until compaction meets or exceeds
requirements with cost borne solely by the Contractor.
B. Number of Tests. Perform following number of tests or as
directed by Engineer.
(1) Provide minimum of one "Proctor" Curve to determine
optimum moisture content and maximum density.
(2) One test for each 200 lineal feet of trench.
(3) Five independent tests at site, as directed by
Engineer.
C. Where soft or spongy material is encountered in the
excavation at subgrade level, it shall be removed, upon
the direction of the ENGINEER, to such a depth by
replacing the unsuitable material with tamped gravel firm
and stable foundation can be secured.
3.10 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL
Excavated materials unsuitable for the backfilling, or in
excess of that required for backfilling, shall be
disposed of by the Contractor at locations designated on
the plans or approved by the Engineer. Desirable top
soil, sod, etc., shall be carefully piled separately in
its original position when required.
3.11 SAFETY RULES
Comply with all local, State and federal safety
requirements.
TS3-5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS No. 4
TOPSOILING, FINISHED GRADING AND SPRIGGING
4.01 GENERAL
A. Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, equip-
ment, and perform all work and services necessary for or
incidental to the topsoiling and finished grading of all
areas within the limits of grading and for all areas outside
the limits of grading disturbed in the course of work, as
shown on drawings and as specified, in accordance with
provisions of the Contract Documents, and completely
coordinated with work of all other trades.
B. Work consists of, but is not limited to the correction,
adjustment and/or repair of the rough grading, preparation of
the sub-grade and spreading of stockpiled topsoil in planting
areas or lawn areas.
C. Prior to topsoiling and finish grading operations, all rough
graded areas shall be corrected, adjusted and/or repaired and
shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer. All mounds
and ridges shall be cut off, depressions filled, and other
necessary repairs performed. All surfaces shall be brought .
to prescribed subgrades, in an even and properly compacted
condition.
4.02 MATERIALS
A. Stockpiled Topsoil:
(1) Verify amount of topsoil previously stockpiled and
determine amount of additional topsoil, if necessary to
complete requirements.
(2) Restore all areas occupied by stockpiles to finished
condition of rest of work.
B. Furnished Topsoil:
(1) If amount of topsoil stockpiles is less that amount
necessary to complete requirements of the Section,furnish
all additional topsoil required to complete work.
TS4-1
(2) Topsoil is considered to mean the original surface soil
typical of the area, which is capable of supporting
native plant growth and contains not less that 1.5
percent organic matter. Topsoil is subject to Engineer's
approval.
(3) Pay all costs of handling, transportation, furnishing and
placing of topsoil.
4.03 EXECUTION
A. Sub-Grade: Prior to topsoiling and finish grading
operations, all rough graded areas shall be corrected,
adjusted and/or repaired and shall be inspected and approved
by Engineer. Bring all surfaces to the prescribed subgrades,
in an even and properly compacted condition.
B. Preparation of Subgrade: After areas to be topsoiled have
been approved for proper subgrade, the surface shall be
loosened by cross-discing or other approved methods, to a
full depth of at least two inches to permit blending of
topsoil to the subgrade. Rake up all stones and debris two
(2) inches or more in any dimension, and remove from the
premises.
C. Placing Topsoil:
(1) Do not place topsoil when sub§rade for the topsoil is
either wet or frozen enough to cause clodding.
(2) Spread topsoil to such thickness that compaction shall
bring the compacted depth to 4 inches for areas to be
seeded and sodded. Make small test sections to determine
depths of loose spread required to obtain these compacted
thickness.
(3) When finished surface of compacted topsoil is free of
stones, sticks or other material one inch or more in any
dimension, smooth and true to required grades with a
maximum tolerance of 0.1 feet, topsoilin§ operations
shall be deemed complete.
(4) Upon completion of topsoilin§, obtain the Engineer's
approval of Engineer's approval of grade and surface.
Make small test holes where directed, to verify the
proper Placement and thickness of topsoil.
4.04 SPRIGGING
All areas designated on the plans shall be sprigged in accordance
with the following procedures:
TS4-2
A. Sprigs
Sprigs shall be the healthy living stems (stolons or
rhizomes) and attached roots of Bermuda grass with or
without adhering soil, obtained from approved sources
where sod is heavy and thickly matted.
B. Weeds
Weeds and any excess of grasses taller than five (5)
inches in the harvesting area shall be mowed to a height
of two (2) inches, and raked and removed before
harvesting.begins. Harvesting may be performed by any
method acceptable to the Engineer, including crisscross
cultivation, shallow plowing or discing to thoroughly
loosen the sprigs from the soil and bring them to the
surface.
Sprigs may be collected or bunched for loading by raking
with a dump rake or a side-delivery rake, or by hand.
Sprigs shall be collected in small piles and watered as
soon as they are harvested, and shall be kept covered and
moist until they are planted. Sprigs which have become
heated will be rejected. The harvesting and planting
operations shall be balanced, and every care possible
shall be taken at the harvesting site that sprigs do not
lie in the sun longer than 20 minutes before they are
covered and moistened. Not more than 36 hours shall
elapse between initial harvesting operation and
sprigging, except that when adverse weather or other
uncontrolled conditions interrupt the operations, an
extension of time not to exceed 24 hours may be granted
by the Engineer, provided the sprigs have not become
heated and are still viable.
C. Tilling
The areas to be sprigged shall be thoroughly tilled to a
depth of at least five (5) inches, by scarifying, plowing
discing, harrowing or other approved operations until
condition of the soil is acceptable to the Engineer.
Light tillage shall follow heavy tillage while the soil
is in a mellow condition to allow breaking up of clods.
D. Planting
Sprigs shall be planted in furrows spaced not more than
18 inches apart, opened to the depth necessary to insure
covering of sprigs to a minimum depth of two (2) inches
and not more than 3-1/2 inches after compaction. The
furrows shall be filled in such a manner that the surface
is left even at a designated grade.
TS4-3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION NO. 26
ACCESS ROAD AND PARKING AREAS
26.01 GRADING
a. Description
The work covered by this section includes furnishing all
labor, equipment, supplies and materials and of performing
all operations in connection with the excavation, construc-
tion of embankment and all grading, including hauling,
wetting, rolling, discing, blading and other operations
pertaining thereto, for the Access Roads and Parking Areas,
complete in accordance with the specifications and in
conformity with finished contours, typical sections, and
grades shown on the plans and to established lines and
grades.
b. Excavation
Where excavation is necessary, existing vegetation shall
first be removed by an approved method. Excavated areas
shall then be cut to the grades indicated on the plans or
established by the ENGINEER.
Soft, spongy or other unsuitable foundation material shall
be removed to the depth directed by the ENGINEER, and shall
be replaced by select materials and compacted as specified
elsewhere herein.
The CONTRACTOR shall make ample provisions for readily
draining the subgrade and excavation at all times.
c. Subgrade
The subgrade shall be scarified, mixed, reshaped by blading,
sprinkled and rolled to 95 percent of the maximum density at
optimum moisture as determined by the Standard A.A.S.H.O.
density method, ll~is process shall be performed to the end
that minimum 6-inch layer of compacted subgrade is secured
immediately below the bottom of the base or subbase.
d. Embankment
Embankments or fills shall be constructed at the locations
and to the lines and grades indicated on the plans or as
established. Materials placed in fills shall be free from
all vegetable matter, trash and frozen materials, and stones
having a maximum dimension greater than two inches. Fills
TS26-1
shall be formed of materials placed in successive layers of
such widths and lengths as are suited to the sprinkling
and compaction method utilized. Embankments shall be
constructed in layers not exceeding 6-inches in thick-
ness after compaction. The layers shall be compacted to
95 percent of the maximum density at optimum moisture as
determined by the A.A.S.H.O. density method. The CONTRACTOR
shall obtain the required moisture content by sprinkling or
by aeration of each layer as may be necessary to meet the
requirements of this specification for compaction. The
CONTP, ACTOR shall thoroughly mix and roll each layer in an
approved manner to produce the required density. Any
damage to adjacent walls, fences, terraces or other fixed
objects, shall be replaced or repaired at the expense of
the CONTRACTOR.
26.02 GP~AV EL SURFACING
a. Description
The work covered by this section consists of a gravel
surface for those areas indicated on the plans which will
not receive an asphalt surface.
b. Materials
The gravel shall be obtained from approved sources; shall
consist of durable particles of gravel mixed with approved
binding material; and shall be free from an excess of thin
or elongated pieces, lumps of clay, soil, loam, vegetable
matter or other objectionable matter. The material may be
bank run or the binder may be added and incorporated-by
approved methods. The material will be approved by the
ENGINEER at the source.
The material when properly slaked and tested by standard
laboratory methods using round screens or mesh sieves, shall
meet the following requirements:
Screen or Sieve Per Cent by Weight Retained
2" screen 0
1/2" screen 20 to 60
40 mesh sieve 60 to 85
The material passing the 40 mesh sieve shall be known as
"Soil Binder" and shall meet the following requirements:
TS26-2
The liquid limit shall not exceed 30.
The plasticity index shall not exceed 10.
The linear shrinkage shall not exceed 7%.
(Note: The linear shrinkage shall be calculated from the
volumetric shrinkage at the liquid limit).
The liquid limit and plasticity index shall be determined by
approved methods.
c. Sampling and Testing
Suitable samples of all materials as required shall be
sumitted to the ENGINEER for approval within a reasonable
time prior to commencing work, to permit inspection and
testing. All test samples shall be supplied by the CON-
TRACTOR at his expense; all tests will be made by the
ENGINEER without any cost to the CONTRACTOR. Additional
samples shall be furnished as required by the ENGINEER
during execution of the work.
d. Construction Methods
All subgrade upon which the material is to be placed shall
be shaped and compacted as provided in Section 26.01.
Placing of material shall be in such a manner that the
material and the subgrade will drain freely at all times.
The material shall be deposited and spread in a uniform
layer without segregation of size and to such loose depth
that, when compacted, the layer will have the desired
thickness.
Material deposited upon the subgrade shall be spread and
shaped the same day. In the event inclement weather or
other unforeseen circumstances prevent the spreading of
the material during the first 24-hour period, the material
shall be scarified and spread as directed by the ENGINEER.
The material shall be sprinkled, if desired, and shall be
bladed and shaped to conform to the typical sections shown
on the plans.
The material shall be constructed to the depth shown on the
plans, and shall be sprinkled or aerated as required to
obtain approximate optimum moisture and rolled as directed
by the ENGINEER until a uniform compaction of at least g6
percent of standard A.A.S.H.O. density is secured. Compac-
tion to the specified density shall be secured by the use of
heavy duty tamping rollers, loaded to obtain foot pressures
of at least five hundred and fifty pounds (550) pounds per
square inch and by the use of rubber-tired rollers having
not less than nine (9) pneumatic-tired wheels. All equip-
ment shall be approved prior to use.
TS26-3
The surface upon completion of the course shall be smooth
and in conformity with the typical sections and to the
established lines and grades. The completed course shall be
maintained by the CONTRACTOR until completion of surfacing
included in this contract, and should the course lose the
required stability or finish, the condition shall be cor-
rected by the CONTRACTOR at his entire expense.
End of Section
STRUCTURAL SPECIFICATION NO. 1
CAST-IN-PLACE REINFORCED CONCRETE
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and
perform all work and services necessary for or inci-
dental to the furnishing and installation, complete,
of all concrete work as shown and specified, in ac-
cordance with Contract Documents, and completely
coordinated with work of all other trades.
B. Provide all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary
for a sound, secure and complete installation.
1.02 QUALITY STANDARDS
A. Codes and Standards: ACI 301: "Specifications for
Structural Concrete for Buildings"; ACI 347 "Recom-
mended Practice for Concrete Formwork ACI 304";
"Recommended Practice for ~.leasuring, Mixing, Trans-
porting, and Placing Concrete"; comply with appli-
cable provisions except as otherwise indicated.
B. The Owner will employ a testing laboratory to eval-
uate concrete delivered to and placed at the site.
C. Quality Control: Owner's testing laboratory will
perform sampling and testing during concrete placement.
1. Sampling: ASTM C172.
2. Slump: ASTM C143, one test for each load at point
of discharge.
3. Air Content: ASTM C~, one for each set of com-
pressive strength specimens.
4. Compressive strength: ASTM C39, one set of three
of each class of concrete~ test one at 7 days, 2
at 28 days.
D. Make one strength test for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction
thereof, of each mix design of concrete placed in any
one day. Test one at 7 days and 2 at 28 days.
E. Report test results in writing to Engineer promptly.
SSi-1
F. The testing laboratory shall control the addition of
water to the concrete at the job site and the length o
time the concrete is allowed to remain in the trunk
during the pour.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications with in-
stallation instructions for proprietary materials in-
cluding reinforcement and forming accessories, admix-
tures, joint materials, hardeners, curing materials,
and others as requested by Engineer.
B. Submit copies of laboratory test or evaluation reports
for concrete materials and mix design.
C. Submit one sepia and one print of shop drawings of re-
inforcing details.
D. Submit concrete design mixes, indicating all proportions,
water-cement ratio, design strength, type of cement and
aggregates.
E. Submit diagram of proposed construction joints if
different from those shown on the drawings.
1.04 MATERIALS
A. Expansive Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C845 76T.
B. Aggregates: ASTM C33. Local aggregates of proven dur-
ability may be used when acceptable to Engineer.
C. Water: Clean, free of oils, acids, organic matter.
D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260.
E. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A.
F. Related Materials:
1. Waterstops: Flat dumbbell or centerbulb type, size
6 inches, of either rubber (CRD C513) or PVD (CRD C572).
G. Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type I.
H. Form Materials:
1. Exposed Concrete Surfaces: Acceptable panel-type to
provide continuous, straight, smooth finish. Use
largest practical sizes to minimize form joints.
SS1-2
2. Unexposed Concrete Surfaces: Suitable material,
dressed on at least edges and on side for tight fit.
I. Reinforcing Materials:
1. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60.
J. Non-Shrink Grout: Shall be pre-mixed non-shrinking, high
strength grout. Compressive strength in 28 days shall be
5000 psi minimum, but in no case less that the specified
strength of the base concrete. Manufacturer shall provide
evidence that the material meets the criteria of the Corps
of Engineers Specification NO. CRD-589-70.
Manufacturers:
Gifford-Hill Co. - Supreme
Masters Builders Co. - Masterflow 713
K. Epoxy: (For patching and bonding): Shall be a two-com-
ponent epoxy resin system equal to COLMA-DUR as manu-
factured by Sika Chemical Corp., Lyndhurst, New Jersey.
L. Anchoring Cement (For grouting to anchor bolts and
dowels): Shall be POR-ROK as manufactured by Lehn and
Fink Industrial Products, Monvale, New Jersey.
1.05 CONCRETE STRENGTH, MIX PROPORTIONS, AND DESIGN
A. Provide strengths of concrete as shown on the drawings.
B. Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field
experience method, complying with ACI 211.1.
1. Submit written report to Engineer, for each proposed
concrete mix at least 15 days prior to start of
work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes
have been reviewed and are acceptable to Engineer.
2. Mix designs may be adjusted when material character-
istics, job conditions, weather, test results or
other circumstances warrant. Do not use revised
concrete mixes until submitted to and accepted by
Engineer.
3. Use admixtures as recommended by cement manufacturer.
1.06 FORMING AND PLACING CONCRETE
A. Job-Site Mixing: Use drum type batch machine mixer. Mix
not less than 1-1/2 minutes for one cu. yd. or smaller
capacity. Increase mixing time at least 15 seconds for
each additional cu. yd. or fraction thereof.
SS1-3
B. Ready-Mixed Concrete: ASTM C94.
C. Formwork: Construct so that concrete members and
structures are of correct size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position, complying with ACI 347.
D. Provide openings in formwork to accommodate work of
other trades. Accurately place and securely support
items built into forms.
E. Clean and adjust forms prior to concrete placement.
Apply form release agents or wet forms, as required.
Retighten forms if required to eliminate mortar leaks.
F. Position, support and secure reinforcement against
displacement. Locate and support with chairs, runners,
bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required. Set wire
ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward
exposed concrete surfaces.
H. Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other
embedded items required for other work that is attached
to, or supported by concrete. Use setting diagrams,
templates and instructions for locating and setting.
I. Place concrete in compliance with ACI 304. Place
concrete in a continuous operation within planned joints
or sections. Do not begin placement until work of other
trades affecting concrete is completed.
J. Consolidate concrete using mechanical vibrators supple-
mented with hand rodding and tamping, so that concrete
is worked around reinforcement and embedded items into
all part of forms.
._ K. Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength
.~ i __ due to weather extremes.
1. In cold weather comply with ACI 306.
2. In hot weather comply with ACI 305.
1.07 CONCRETE FINISHES
A. Exposed-to-view Surfaces: Provide a smooth finish for
exposed concrete surfaces and surfaces that are to be
covered with a coating or covering material applied
directly to concrete. Remove fins and projections, and
patch defective areas with cement grout.
SS1-4
B. Slab Trowel Finish: Apply steel trowel finish to
monolithic slab surfaces that are exposed-to-view or
are to be covered with resilient, paint or other thin
film coating. Consolidate concrete surface by troweling,
free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance.
Finish concrete to maximum tolerance of 1/4 inch in 10
feet.
.i C. Begin initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared
from exposed surfaces. Cure formed surfaces by moist
_"i- curing until forms are removed. Provide protections as
required to prevent damage to concrete.
D. Slabs surfaces shall be moist cure by keeping surfaces
continuously wet and covered with sand, straw or kraft
paper for 7 days. Curing shall begin immediately after
completion of finishing.
END OF SECTION
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS NO. 15
CONCRETE FOR UTILITIES
15.01 DESCRIPTION
This is a general specification applicable to all items that
are to be constructed wholly or partially of concrete in con-
junction with utility construction. The work covered by this
section consists of furnishing all material and equipment,
and performing all labor for the manufacture, transporting,
placing, finishing, and curing of concrete in the structures
included in these specifications.
15.02 CEMENT
Cement shall be Type I or Type III Portland Cement, at the
CONTRACTOR'S option, conforming to ASTM Spec.ific, ation .::-
Designation C-150-42. ~ ~,;~--.' -. ~.. ....... '~'./,
Cement shall be stored in weatherproof and dry buildings and
shall be free of cakes or lumps at the time it is used in the
concrete,
15.03 WATER
The CONTRACTOR shall secure the approval of the ENGINEER as
to water for use in making concrete. If the water to be used
is from a source other than a domestic supply, the CONTRACTOR
shall furnish a test report to the ENGINEER, from a reputable
commercial testing laboratory, indicating conformance with
the provisions of the AASHO Test Method T-26 for quality of
water.
15.04 FINE AGGREGATE
Fine aggregate shall consist of a sand, or a mixture of
sands, and not more than fifty percent (50%) of stone
screenings, with or without a mineral filler. The sand, or
mixture of sands, in fine aggregate shall consist of clean,
hard, durable, uncoated grains, free from lumps.
Stone screenings shall consist of clean, hard, durable, .... "'
uncoated fragments resulting from the crushing of stone.
15.05 COARSE AGGREGATES
Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed stone, gravel,
crushed gravel, or a combination of these.
TS15-1
Gravel and crushed gravel shall consist of clean, hard, d~r~
able particles free from adherent coatings, thin or elong~d
pieces, soft or disintegrated particles, dirt, organic, or
injurious matter.
Coarse aggregate shall have a percent of wear of not more
than 30, when subjected to the Los Angeles Abrasion Test.
The maximum amount of deleterious substances in coarse aggre-
gates shall not exceed the following percentages by weight,
Material removed by decantation 1.0%
Shale, slate, or other similar materials 1.0%
C1 ay 1 umps O. 5%
Soft fragments 3.0%
Other deleterious substances, including
fragile, thin, elongated, or laminated
pieces 3.0%
The sum of all deleterious substances,
exclusive of materials removed by
decantation, shall not exceed by
weight 5.0%
and shall be free from a harmful excess of salt, alkali, veg-
etable or other objectionable matter occurring either free or
as adherent coatings.
15.06 CONCRETE AGGREGATES IN GENERAL
Tests of aggregates will be made in accordance with the
applicable current Methods of Tests of the ASTM.
The handling and storage fof aggregates shall be in such man-
ner as to prevent intrusion of foreign materials and segrega-
tion of sizes, and shall preferably be stored on Wooden plat-
forms, metal sheets, or similar material; if stored on the
ground, the sites of the stock piles shall be grubbed,
cleared of all vegetation, and leveled off; the bottom six-
inch layer of aggregate shall not be disturbed and shall not
be used in the work.
Where two or more sizes or types of aggregates are delivered
to the job, each size or type shall be stored separately.
At time of use, the aggregates shall be free from frozen
material and all foreign material, such as grass, wood,
sticks, burlap, paper, or dirt which may have become mixed
with the aggregate in stock piles, or in handling.
J TS15-2
If the CONTRACTOR desires to use an air-entraining admixture,
he shall first secure the approval of the ENGINEER as to
admixture, amount to be used, and the method of introducing
it into the mix.
15.07 CONCRETE MIXING AND PLACING
Concrete shall b: composed of fine and coarse aggregates, so
graded and proportioned, and thoroughly mixed with the re-
quired cement and water as will produce a homogeneous mixture
of such quality that the concrete will conform to the design
and test requirements of this specification.
The aggregates, mineral filler if required, cement, and water
shall be measured separately, introduced into the mixer, and
mixed for a period of time of not less than fifty {50) sec-
onds for the 27-E and larger mixer, sixty (60) seconds for
the 21-E mixer, and ninety {90) seconds for the 14-cubic foot
and smaller mixers. The period of time will be measured from
the %ime the last aggregate enters the drum to the time that
discharge of the concrete begins. The required water shall
be introduced into the mixing drum during the first fifteen
{15} seconds of mixing. The entire contents of the drum
shall be discharged before any materials for the succeeding
batch are introduced.
The concrete mix proposed for use shall be sumitted to the
ENGINEER for approval prior to initiating any concreting.
Concrete made of specified materials, in proportions approved
by the ENGINEER, and in complete conformity with the require-
ments of the specifications, construction methods and details
specified for the class of work involved, will be considered
of satisfactory quality.
During the progress of the work, the ENGINEER may cast test
cylinders and/or beams of the number and type he may desire
for testing to maintain a check on the compressive and
flexural strength of the concrete actually being placed. If
required, the CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain curing
facilities for the purpose of curing concrete test specimens.
The cost of all materials used in test specimens and the cost
of providing and maintaining curing facilities shall be in-
cluded in the contract price bid for the work and will not be
paid for as a separate contract pay item.
Prior to the beginning of concreting operations and there-
after, before any change in source or characteristics of any
TS15-3
of the ingredients, except mineral filler, adequate mix
design tests shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approvalo
Concrete mixes wtll be designed and made in sufficient number
to represent the required water-cement ratios; these mixes
shall comply with the requirements herein prescribed for
class, strength, and consistency. The water-cement ratio is
defined as the total U. S. gallons of water (weight 8.33
pounds) including the moisture content of all aggregates per
sack of cement (weight 94 pounds net). The minimum cement
factors and maximum water factors for the various classes of
concrete shall be as follows:
Minimum Maximum 28-Day Compressive
Class of Cement Content Water Content Strength in
Concrete Sacks/Cubic Yard Gal./Sack of Cement Lbs./Sq. Inches
2,000 4-1/2 8 2,000
2,5U0 5 7-1/4 2,500
3,000 6 6-1/4 3,000
3,500 7 6 3,500
Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall be Class 3,000.
In general, the consistency of the concrete mixture shall be
such that:
a. The mortar clings to the aggregates.
b. The concrete is not sufficiently fluid to segregate when
transported to place of deposit.
c. The mortar will show no free water when removed from the
mixer.
d. The concrete, when dropped directly from the discharge
chute of the mixer, will flatten out at the center of
the pile; but the edges of the pile ~11 stand up and
not flow.
e. The concrete will settle into place when deposited in
the form; and when transported in metal chutes at an
angle of 30 degrees with the horizontal, it will slide
and not fl ow into place.
f. The surface of the finished concrete will be free from
"laitance" or a surface film of water.
TS15-4
g. Permissible slump.
Types of Construction Maximum
Reinforced Foundation Walls and Footing 4"
Plain Footings, Caissons and Substructure
Wal 1 s 3"
Slabs, Beams and Reinforced Walls 4"
Building Columns 4"
Pav~,,ents 2"
Heavy Mass Construction 2"
All concrete not placed in the work' within thirty (30) min-
utes after mixing will be rejected and shall be disposed of
by the CONTRACTOR at his own cost and expense. Except upon
specific written authorization by the ENGINEER, concrete
shall not be placed when the temperature is below 40 degrees
F. and falling; but it may be placed when the temperature is
above 35 degrees F. and ri sing, the temperature being taken
in the shade and away from artificial heat. Neither salt nor
chemical admixtures shall be added to the concrete to prevent
freezing.
Should the ENGINEER find that any concrete placed or to be
incorporated in this project fails to meet the requirements
as specified herein, it will be rejected and shall be removed
and disposed of by the CONTRACTOR at his own cost and ex-
pense. The method of disposing of any concrete shall be sub-
ject to the approval of the OWNER and ENGINEER. The CONTRAC-
TOR shall replace all rejected concrete work with an accept-
able concrete as approved by the ENGINEER.
All concrete used in this project shall be handled in accor-
dance with Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete (ASTM C172, CSA
A23.2.21). The slump test for consistency of concrete should
be made in accordance with the Method of Test for Slump of
Conch'ere (ASTM C143, CSA A23.2.20). Specimens for strength
tests shall be made and cured in accordance with Method of
Making and Curing Concrete Compression and Flexure Test
Specimens in the Field (ASTM C31, CSA A23.2.14).
15.08 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Unless otherwise specified, no separate payment will be made
for concrete, but the cost of concrete including all llabor
and materials will be included in the price bid for completed
structures as set forth in the Proposal.
No separate payment will be made for the work performed and
expenses incurred in the concrete sampling, slump test, and
strength tests as required by the ENGINEER.
TS1 5-5
g. Permissible slump.
Types of Construction Maximum
Reinforced Foundation Walls and Footing 4"
Plain Footings, Caissons and Substructure
Wal 1 s 3"
S1 abs, Beams and Reinforced Wal 1 s 4"
Bui 1 ding Col umns 4"
Pav~0,ents 2"
Heavy Mass Construction 2"
All concrete not placed in the work' Within thirty {30) min-
utes after mixing will be rejected and shall be disposed of
by the CONTRACTOR at his own cost and expense. Except upon
specific written authorization by the ENGINEER, concrete
shall not be placed when the temperature is below 40 degrees
F. and falling; but it may be placed when the temperature'is
above 35 degrees F. and rising, the temperature being taken
in the shade and away from artificial heat. Neither salt nor
chemical admixtures shall be added to the concrete to prevent
freezing.
Should the ENGINEER find that any concrete placed or to be
incorporated in this project fails to meet the ~'equirements
as specified herein, it will be rejected and shall be removed
and disposed of by the CONTRACTOR at his own cost and ex-
pense. The method of disposing of any concrete shall be sub-
ject to the approval of the OWNER and ENGINEER. The CONTRAC-
TOR shall replace all rejected concrete work with an accept-
able concrete as approved by the ENGINEER.
All concrete used in this project shall be handled in accor-
dance with Method of Samplin§ Fresh Concrete (ASTM C172, CSA
A23.2.21). The slump test for consistency of concrete should
be made in accordance with the Method of Test for Slump of
Conc~'ete (ASTM C143, CSA A23.?.20). Specimens for strength
tests shall be made and cured in accordance with Method of
Making and Curing Concrete Compression and Flexure Test
Specimens in the Field {ASTM C31, CSA A23.2.14).
15.08 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Unless otherwise specified, no separate payment will be made
for concrete, but the cost of concrete including all .labor
and materials Will be included in the price bid for completed
structures as set forth in the Proposal.
No separate payment will be made for the work performed and
expenses incurred in the concrete sampling, slump test, and
strength tests as required by the ENGINEER.
TS1 5-5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION NO. 25
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS & WATERSTOPS
25.01 GENERAL
This section covers construction joints, expansion joints and
the placing of waterstops where such are indicated on the
plans.
Construction joints shall be of the type indicated on the
drawings and shall be located as shown on the plans unless
otherwise approved by the ENGINEER. Permission will be
granted to eliminate a construction joint providing the work
can be scheduled so as to make a continuous pour without the
need of the joint whose elimination is requested.
25.02 POLYVINYL PLASTIC WATERSTOP
Waterstops shall be installed in construction joints as
required by the plans. All waterstops shall be continuous
throughout their length.
The waterstops shall be heavy duty Polyvinyl Waterstop as
manufactured by Servicised Products Corporation, Chicago,
Illinois, or an approved equal of the same type and material
and approximately equal in dimensions and weight but not
necessarily of exactly the same shape. Waterstops shall be
of the size and type designated on the plans.
The waterstop shall be extruded from polyvinyl chloride resin
plastic having the following properties:
Tensile Strength = 1,700 p.s.i.
Ultimate Elongation : 250%
Brittleness Temp. (ASTM
D746-57T) : -25°F.
All waterstops shall be installed so that one-half its width
will be embedded on one side of the joint and one-half on the
other. The CONTRACTOR shall employ a method of holding the
waterstop in position for the first pour that is satisfactory
to the ENGINEER. The method selected must insure that the
waterstop will be held securely in true vertical position and
in straight alignment in the joint.
Care shall be exercised to insure that the waterstop is
completely encompassed in good mortar.
TS25-1
25.03 JOINTS IN WATERSTOPS
All waterstops shall be continuous and so joined at all points
of contact in the same plane, or at intersections with water-
stops in different planes, as to form a complete barrier to the
passage of water through any construction, contraction or expan-
sion joint.
Joints in the waterstops, whether made for the purpose of con-
tinuity in a straight strip or for the purpose of securing a
watertight junction between strips in different planes, shall
be made by heat welding as hereinafter specified.
Joints in P.V.C. waterstops shall be made by heating the two
surfaces to be joined until the material has softened to the
point ~ere it is just short of being fluid and then bringing
the two softened surfaces together with a slight rubbing motion
followed by firmly pressing them together so that a solid and
tight bond is made.
The joints in strips of waterstop made in the above manner shall
be such that the entire cross section of the joint shall be
dense, homogenous and free of all porosity. All finished joints
shall have a tensile strength of not less than 75 percent of the
material of the strip as extruded.
The heating of the surfaces to be joined shall be done by means
of an electric hot plate designed for the specific purpose and
controlled by means of a voltage regulator.
The hot plate used shall be that manufactured by the Ogden Manu-
facturing Company of Chicago, Illinois, or approved equal. It
shall be rated at 1,O00 watts for use with ll5-volt electric
current. The size of the plate shall be approximately 4-inch by
lO-inch and shall be such that both sides of the plate can be
used simultaneously.
The voltage regulator to be used in conjunction with the above
described hot plate shall be a Type 5003 "Adjust-A-Volt" rated
at 7.5 amps, ll5-volt input and O-135-volt output, as manufac-
tured by the Standard Electric Products Company.
In use, the heat of the hot plate shall be so regulated as to
prevent too rapid melting and accompanying charring of the
waterstop material.
The use of makeshift hot plates will not be permitted nor will
other means of heating the strips to be joined be allowed except
in a case of emergency, as determined by the ENGINEER.
TS25-2
The CONTRACTOR shall provide such jigs as will assist in making
the joints in a proper and workmanlike manner and in holding the
strips so that the alignment of joined strips is correct and
angles are true to those required.
As may be required, the CONTRACTOR shall train a skilled workman
in the use of the equipment and the making of joints in advance
of need; and during construction all joints shall be made by a
workman with such training.
Prior to embedment all joints in the waterstop strips will be
carefully inspected by the ENGINEER and any found defective
shall be remedied under his supervision and without delay.
25.04 PROTECTION OF WATERSTOP BETWEEN POURS
The CONTP~ACTOR shall take such steps as are necessary to protect
exposed waterstops in the interim period between concrete pours.
The watertightness of the structure will depend upon the care
and workmanship employed in making construction joints and
securing good and full mortar embedment on all sides of the
waterstops. Accordingly, this phase of the work will be subject
to rigid inspection.
26.05 EXPANSION JOINTS
Expansion joints of the size and type shown on the plans, or
specified herein, shall be placed in concrete pavement or struc-
ture as shown on the plans.
a. Performed Asphalt Fiber Joint Material
Asphalt fiber sheet filler shall consist of preformed strips
of inert material impregnated with asphalt. It shall be of
the thickness shown on the plans or indicated in these
specifications.
The sheet filler shall conform to the requirements of
A.A.S.H.O. Specification M-59 with the following additional
provisions.
The asphalt content shall be 35 to 50 percent by weight of
the joint filler after drying at 325°F. for one (1) hour.
The sheet filler shall be of such character that it will not
be deformed by ordinary handling during hot weather nor be-
come hard and brittle in cold weather. It shall be of a
tough, resilient, durable material not affected by
weathering.
TS25-3
b. Other Premoulded Joint Filler
Where premoulded cork-asphalt joint filler is required by
the plans, it shall be of the dimensions indicated on the
drawings and shall be the material designated as Code No.
1321 by the Servicised Products Corporation, of Chicago,
Illinois, or approved equal.
c. Hot Poured Rubberized Tar Joint Sealer
Joint sealer shall be used where indicated on the plans and
on the outside of any surface exposed to the elements where
a construction joint has been formed in the concrete. The
joint sealer shall be P, AM-NEK as manufactured by K. T.
Snyder Co., 4101 San Jacinto, P. O. Box 8188, Houston,
Texas, or approved equal.
The joint shall be primed and prepared so the material
applied shall be in strict accordance to the manufacturers
specifications and subject to the approval of the ENGINEER.
TS25-4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS NO. 30
TESTING AND STERILIZATION
30.01 GENERAL
The work covered by this technical specification consists of
furnishing all labor, tools, materials and equipment in per-
forming all operations required by the Engineer in testing new
reservoirs, basins and plant piping systems for leakage and in
the sterilization of these units.
30.02 HYDROSTATIC TESTING
a. Basins and Reservoirs
Upon completion of the new unit and after all miscellaneous
items of equipment have been installed in the new unit, all
debris and waste materials shall be removed and all interior
surfaces shall be thoroughly washed and flushed with clean
water and sterilized in accordance with Section 30.03 of this
specification. The unit shall then be filled with clean
water to a depth equal to the proposed maximum water level
or to a depth designated by the Engineer. The water level
shall be maintained at the prescribed level for a period of
at least 24 hours prior to beginning any leakage tests to
allow for any absorption of the water by the unit.
The water level shall be measured and no additional water
shall be added to or taken from the unit for a period of 72
hours and the water level in the tank shall be observed and
measured at 12 hour intervals during this period. At the
end of this period the water level shall again be measured
and the amount of water lost shall be computed. Should the
quantity of water lost exceed a rate of 2,000 gallons per
day per million gallons of unit capacity, the Contractor
shall drain the unit, locate and repair the source of
leakage, and repeat the testing procedure until the unit
meets the approval of the Engineer. All costs involved
in locating and repairing any leaks, testing and retesting
the unit shall be at the expense of the Contractor. All
known leaks shall be stopped, regardless of this test
equipment.
b. Plant Piping
After the piping, and all supports, hangers, permanent
braces and thrust blocks have been installed, the piping
shall be tested in such sections as are convenient for the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer. The Contractor
shall inspect and test each system in the presence of the
Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials,
TS30-1
tools and equipment necessary to bulkhead and seal off the
line for testing, fill it with water, raise the filled line
to test pressure and measure the amount of leakage over the
test period.
The pipe line shall be tested at a hydrostatic pressure,
equal to not less than the maximum water working pressure
for which the pipe is designed, maintained for a period of
not less than four (4) hours. A test for the determination
of amount of leakage shall be run at the same time. If the
tests indicate a leakage in excess of a rate equal to fifty
(50) gallons per inch of internal pipe diameter per mile of
pipe line per twenty-four (24) hours, the Contractor will be
required to find and eliminate the leak. All known leaks
shall be stopped, regardless of this test requirement.
The cost of testing, finding and repairing the leaks and
retesting, if necessary, shall be at the expense of the
Contractor. The water required to fill the lines will be
furnished by the Owner, without charge to the Contractor.
30.03 STERILIZATION
a. Basins and Reservoirs
All exposed interior surfaces shall be sprayed with a
so-'~Tution having a strength of 200 p.p.m, available chlorine.
This solution shall be sprayed over the inner surfaces of
the empty structure by using fruit-tree spraying equipment.
The surfaces disinfected should remain in contact with the
strong solution at least one (1) hour before the structure
is filled with water. The tank shall then be filled with
good, clean water and samples for bacteriological tests
shall be taken in order to determine if the sterilization
has been successful.
b. Piping
Prior to sterilizing, each valved section of the new pipe
line shall be pressure tested and flushed with clean water
from a source approved by the Engineer, to remove all
visible evidence Of dust, soil, and fine debris which may
have entered the line during construction and testing. The
water required to flush and sterilize the lines, without un-
necessary waste, will be furnished by the Owner, without
charge to the Contractor.
Chlorine shall be used to sterilize the pipe line by the
following method:
TS30-2
The amount of chlorine applied shall be such as to provide
a dosage of not less than fifty (50) parts per million. The
chlorinating material shall be introduced to the water lines
and distribution system in a manner approved by the Engineer.
After a contact period of not less than eight (8) hours, the
system shall be flushed with clean water until the residual
chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 parts per million.
All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and
closed several times during the contact period.
Samples shall be collected from various taps and fixtures
throughout the plant during the introduction of the chlorine
to assure uniform distribution. After the contact period,
all traces of the heavily chlorinated water shall be flushed
from the system. The cost of furnishing the chlorine, labor,
tools and equipment used in the sterilization process shall
be at the expense of the Contractor.
30.04 BACTERIOLOGICAL TESTS
After the chlorine residual is lowered to 1 p.p.m, or less, the
Owner will determine the effectiveness of the disinfection by
bacteriological tests on samples taken from the system. The
number and locations of the samples shall be as specified by
the Engineer. Should other than satisfactory results be
obtained, the sterilization process shall be repeated until
satisfactory results are obtained. The system shall not be put
into service until satisfactory tests are obtained and approved
by the Engineer.
End of Section
TS30-3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION NO. 17-D
DUCTILE IRON PIPE FOR WATER MAINS
17D.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
The work to be performed under this section of the specifica-
tions shall consist of furnishing and installing ductile iron
pipe and fittings and other appurtenances including all
clearing, grubbing, excavation, sheeting, shoring, dewater-
ing, pipe laying, jointing, testing, backfilling and any
other work that is required or necessary to complete the
installation as shown in the plans and as specified herein.
l?D.02 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS
a. Materi al s
Ductile iron pipe shall be designed in accordance with
the latest revisions ANSI Specification A21.50 (AWWA
C150), and shall be centrifugally cast and furnished in
18-foot nominal laying lengths or 20-foot nominal laying
lengths.
The pipe shall be manufactured, unless otherwise noted
on the plans, with a push-on type joint. This joint
shall be of the type which provides a recession in the
bell for the employment of a single rubber gasket to be
placed before the insertion of the succeeding spigot.
The joints shall be made in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications.
The pipe under these specifications shall be manufac-
tured in accordance with the latest revision of ANSI
Specification A21.51 (AWWA C151) and to the applicable
requirements of ANSI Specification A21.11, of latest
revision.
Internal Pressure:
Ductile iron pipe shall be designed for a minimum total
design pressure (rated pressure plus surge) of 450 PSI
for 4 thru 18", 400 PSI for 20", 350 PSI for 24" & 300
PSI for 30 and 36" pipe. The design shall incorporate
a safety factor of 2:1 on total design pressure.
External Loads:
Unless otherwise shown on the plans or these specifica-
tions all ductile iron pipe shall be designed for a
TS17d-1
minimum of l0 foot of cover for Type I laying condition
for pipe smaller than 16". Pipe larger than 16" shall
be based on laying condition Type II, maximum bending
stress shall be limited to 48000 PSI and deflection
shall be limited to 3% with H20 truckloading.
The fittings shall be of the mechanical joint or slip
joint type and may be of either cast iron or ductile
iron, manufactured in accordance with ANSI Specification
A21.10 {AWWA CllO) "American Standard for Cast-Iron
Fittings, 2-inch through 48-inch, For Water and Other
Liquids", of latest revision.
All ductile iron pipe and fittings shall have a coal-tar
coating on outside surface with a minimum thickness of
one (1} mil. The interior of the pipe and fittings
shall have cement mortar lining and a seal coat of
bituminous material. The exterior and interior coatings
shall be in accordance with ANSI A21.4 (AWWA Cl04) and
ANSI A21.6 (AWWA Cl06), latest editions.
b. Installation
Unless otherwise specified on the plans or shown on the
profiles, ductile iron pipe shall be installed or clear
all utility lines and shall have the following minimum
cover below the lowest property line grade of the
street:
14-inch and larger 5.0' Cover
12-inch and 10-inch Pipe 4.5' Cover
8-inch Pipe and Smaller 4.0' Cover
The subgrade shall be accurately shaped and trimmed to
receive the pipe barrel and each pipe section, when in
place, shall have a uniform bearing on the subgrade for
the full length of the pipe barrel. Pipe shall not be
laid unless the subgrade is free of water and in a con-
dition satisfactory to the Engineer. Adjustments of
the pipe to line and grade shall be made by scraping
away or filling in with gravel, or approved selected
material, and not by wedging or blocking up the bell.
The interior of the pipe shall be clean and joint sur-
faces shall be clean and dry When the pipe is lowered
into the trench. Each pipe, fitting, and valve shall be
lowered into the trench carefully and laid true to line'
and grade.
TS1 7d-2
c. Protection of Pipe Line
Well fitted stoppers or bulkheads shall be securely
placed in all openings and in the end of the line when
construction is stopped temporarily and at the end of
each day's work. It shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to deliver to the Owner a pipeline which is
clean throughout its entire length.
d. Concrete Blocking
Class 2,000 concrete shall be placed, as directed by the
Engineer, for blocking at each change in direction of
the pipeline in such manner as will substantially brace
the pipe against undisturbed trench walls. Concrete
blocking, made from Type I cement, shall have been in
i- place four (4) days prior to testing the pipeline as
hereinafter specified. Test may be made in two (2) days
after the completion of blocking if Type III cement is
used.
Concrete blocking, unless otherwise specified, will not
be measured or paid for as a separate item, but the cost
thereof shall be included in the various items listed in
the Proposal.
ie. Hydrostatic Test
As soon as a continuous section of new water main has
been installed, the Contractor shall proceed immediately
to complete all testing and sterilizing, make all con-
nections, and place those sections in service. The
Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools and
equipment necessary to bulkhead and seal off the line
for testing, fill it with water, raise the filled line
to test pressure and measure the amount of leakage over
the test period.
Unless otherwise indicated the pipeline shall be tested
with a hydrostatic pressure of not less than one hundred
fifty (150) pounds per square inch maintained over a
continuous period of not less than four (4) hours.
After a successful continuous pressure period of four
(4) hours has been completed, a test for the determina-
tion of amount of leakage shall be run at the same pres-
sure as before for a duration of two (2) hours. If the
tests indicate a leakage in excess of a rate equal to
ten (lO) gallons per inch of internal pipe diameter per
mile of pipeline per twenty-four (24) hours, the Con-
tractor will be required to find and eliminate the leak.
All known leaks shall be stopped, regardless of this
test requirement.
TS17d-3
The cost of testing, finding and repairing the leaks and
retesting, shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
The water required, to fill the lines will be furnished
I by the Owner, without charge to the Contractor.
f. Sterilization
['
Prior to sterilizing, each valved section of the new
pipeline shall be pres'sure tested and flushed with clean
water from the City system to remove all visible evi-
dence of dust, soil, and fine debris which may have
entered the line during construction and testing. The
water required to flush and sterilize the lines, without
unnecessary waste, will be furnished by the Owner, with-
out charge to the Contractor.
Chlorine shall be used to sterilize the pipeline by the
- following method:
The amount of chlorine applied shall be such as to
- provide a dosage of not less than fifty (50) parts
per million. The chlorinating material shall be
introduced to the water lines and distribution
system in a manner approved by the Engineer. After
a contact period of not less than eight (8) hours,
the system shall be flushed with clean water until
the residual chlorine content is not greater than
° 0.2 parts per million. All valves in the lines
being sterilized shall be opened and closed several
times during the contact period.
The cost of furnishing the chlorine, labor, tools,
equipment and tests of chlorine content and bacterio-
logical tests will be at the expense of the Contractor.
No water mains shall be in service until placed
satisfactory test report has been received from an
approved laboratory.
[
17D.03 WET CONNECTIONS AND APPURTENANCES
The CONTRACTOR shall make the alterations and the necessary
connections to the various existing water mains as shown on
the plans or as directed by the ENGINEER. Such connections
shall be made at such times and in the order as will be
agreeable to the OWNER. In each case, when the work is
started, the connection shall be prosecuted expeditiously and
continuously until completed.
Wet connections to existing r,~ins under pressure shall be
made with tapping connection fittings. Tapping sleeves,
TS17d-4
crosses, and valves shall be of standard manufacturers and of
· the mechanical joint type to fit AWWA pipe specifications in
Classes A, B, C, and D. Tapping sleeves and crosses shall be
designed for a minimum working pressure of 150 pounds per
square inch. Connecting flanges on tapping sleeves, crosses
and vlaves shall be ASA Class 125. Tapping valves shall be
designed for minimum working pressure of 175 pounds per
square inch.
Payment for wet connections will be made at the unit bid
price for "Cast-Iron Fittings" and "Gate Valve", if the
connection is not made under pressure, or at the unit bid
price for various items for tapping connection fittings and
valves, as listed in the Proposal, if the connection is made
under pressure. Wet connections will not be measured for
payment as a separate item.
17D.04 GATE VALVE
a. General
Gate valves conform to American Water Works Association
Specification C500 {formerly 7F.1}, latest edition.
Valves shall be designed for a minimum water working
pressure of 150 pounds per square inch. Gat~ valves
shall have a clear waterway equal to the full nominal
diameter of the valve and shall be opened by turning to
the left. Each valve shall have the maker's initials,
pressure rating, and year in which manufactured cast in
the body.
Unless otherwise specified by the £NGINEER, all gate
valves shall be iron body, bronze mounted, double disc,
parallel seat, non-rising stem, internal wedging type
with "0" ring seals and mechanical joint ends and shall
be nut operated. Gate valves attached to flanged out-
lets shall have combination flanged and mechanical joint
ends.
b. F1 anges
I"
Flanges shall be cast solid and faced accurately at
right angles to the axis of the casting. Dimensions and
drilling of flanges shall be in accordance with the
for a working pressure of
American
Standards
Association
125 pounds per square inch. Special drilling shall be
provided where necessary.
I- c. Valve Boxes
Valves buried in the ground shall be provided with cast-
iron valve boxes of proper dimensions to fit over the
TS1 7d-5
valve bonnets and to extend to such elevation at or
slightly above the finished ground line as directed by
the ENGINEER. Tops shall be complete with covers and
shall be adjustable. Valve boxes shall be set vertical
and concentric with the valve stem. Any valve box which
has so moved from its original position as to prevent
the application of the valve key shall be satisfactorily
reset by the CONTRACTOR at his own expense. A concrete
pad of the dimensions shown on the "Standard Water
Details" sheet shall be poured around all valve boxes,
unless otherwise directed by the ENGINEER.
17D.05 FIRE HYDRANT
a. General
In general, all fire hydrants shall conform strictly to
AWWA Standard Specifications for Fire Hydrants for
Ordinary Water Works Service, C502 latest edition,
except for changes or additions specifically outlined as
fo1 lows:
The operating nut shall be designed to prevent
seepage of rain or sleet and the accumulation of
dust around the revolving nut.
The hydrant top or bonnet shall be free draining
and of a type that will maintain the operating
mechanism in readiness to use under freezing
conditions. It shall be so designated as to make
tampering difficult and shall be provided with
convenient means to afford lubrication to insure
ease of operation and the prevention of wear and
corrosion.
The body of the hydrant shall be equipped with a
breakable flange, or breakable cast-iron flange
bolts, just above the grade line.
All hydrants shall be of such design as will permit
their extension without excavating in case of
future grade changes.
The complete hydrant shall be of such design that
when the hydrant barrel is broken through traffic
collision, it may be replaced without excavating or
breaking the pavement. The barrel and operating
mechanism shall be so designed that in case of
. accident, damage or breaking of the hydrant above
or near the grade level, the main valve will remain
reasonably tight against leakage or flooding.
TS1 7d-6
Changes in shape or size of the waterway shall be
accomplished by means of easy curves. The junc-
tions of hose or pumper nozzles with the barrel
shall be rounded to ample radii. Exclusive of the
main valve opening, l~he net area of the waterway of
the barrel and foot piece of the smallest part
shall be not less than 150 percent of that of the
net opening of the main valve.
Hydrants shall be providfed with an automatic and
positively joperating, non-corrodible drain or drip
valve so as to drain the hydrant completely when
the main valve is shut. A drain valve operating by
springs or gravity is not acceptable.
Operating stems whose threads are not located in
the barrel or waterway shall be made of genuine
wrought iron or steel and shall be bronze bushed
where passing through the stuffing box. Operating
threads must be sealed against contact with the
water at all times regardless of open or closed
position of main valve. All operating stems shall
be coupled opposite the break flange with a break-
able coupling or coupled in such a way as to part
without breaki rig.
Unless otherwise specified by the ENGINEER,
hydrants shall be furnished with "0" ring seals.
The hydrant head shall be constructed so that it
may be rotated to face the nozzles in any desired
I direction. The CONTRACTOR shall rotate the fire
hydrant in such a direction to best serve the
. OWNER.
Hydrants closing with the pressure must have a
bronze cap nut to seal the bottom end of stem
threads contact with water.
a§ainst
Supplementary details are as follows:
i 1. The type of shut-off may be compression or
gate.
J 2. Each hydrant shall have a net valve opening
of not less than five (5) inches. The inlet
shall be mechanical joint for 6-inch cast-
iron pi pe.
(
TS1 7d-7
3. All hydrants shall be equipped with two (2)
hose nozzles and one (1) steamer nozzle and
shall coform to the standards now in use by
the OWNER.
4. The bury length shall be for a 5-foot depth
of trench.
5. Harnessing lugs shall not be provided unless
specified in order.
6. The operating nut shall conform to the
standards now in use by the OWNER. The
hydrant valve shall open by turning to the
1 eft.
If required by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall
furnish drawings with complete detailed dimensions
of the hydrant proposed for this project.
All hydrants installed under this contract shall be
of one manufacture, approved by the OWNER.
b. Constructi on Method
Fire hydrants shall be placed at all locations shown in
the plans. Each hydrant shall be set upon a slab of
stone or concrete not less than four (4") inches thick
and not less than one (1) square foot of surface area.
Where solid rock exists in the bottom of the trench and
same is excavated to the proper depth to form a founda-
tion for the hydrant, the slab of stone or concrete
above specified may be omitted.
I The hydrant shall be set perpendicular, and to the
~. proper depth, and shall be carefully and substantially
blocked against firm trench walls using Class 2,000
;- concrete as herein specified.
There shall be placed around the base of the hydrant not
less than seven (7) cubic feet of sound broken stone or
clean gravel, or other suitable material, to provide
reservoir capacity so that the hydrant will completely
drain when closed.
TS1 7d-8
17D.06 SERVICE STUBOUTS AND TRANSFERS
Service stubouts or transfers of the proper size shall be
installed at locations shown on the plans, or as directed by
the ENGINEER, and according to the typical detail shown on
the standard detail sheet. The service line shall consist of
a corporation cock installed at the main, copper tubing, and
a curb stop or the necessary connecting fittings. Service
transfers shall extend from the new main to the existing
water meter.
Corporation cocks of the proper sizes shall be Mueller No.
H 15000, or an approved equal. Curb stops of the proper
sizes shall be Mueller No. H 10203, or an approved equal.
Service lines of the sizes indicated on the plans shall be
Type "K" copper tubing.
Unless otherwise specified, all new meter boxes shall be
furnished by the OWNER and installed by the utility con-
tractor. The meter box shall be installed to line and grade
two (2) feet behind the street curb. The curb stop shall be
brought to grade inside the meter box for installation of the
water meter by the OWNER.
17D.07 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment for the piping, valves, fittings, fire hydrants,
concrete blocking, base pads, complete in place, and all
other work necessary and incidental to the installation
thereof, all, in accordance with the plans and the provisions
of these Technical Specifications No. 17D, shall be included
in the lump sum big as provided in the Proposal.
TS17d-9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION NO. 34A
PRETENSIONED CONCRETE CYLINDER PIPE WATER MAIN
24.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
The work to be performed under this section of the specifications
shall consist of furnishin§ and installing cement-mortar lined
and reinforced cement-mortar coated pretensioned concrete cylin-
der pipe, includin§ fittin§s for each, and all clearing, grub-
bin§, excavation, sheeting, shorin§, dewatering, pipe laying,
jointin§ backfilling, disposal of surplus materials and any other
work that is required or necessary to complete the installation
as shown on the plans and as specified herein.
24.02 MATERIALS
Cement-Mortar Lined and Reinforced Cement-Mortar Coated
Pretensioned Concrete Cylinder Pipe - The pipe shall consist of
the following component parts: A welded sheet-steel or plate-
steel cylinder with joints formed integrally with the steel
cylinder or with steel joint rings welded to the ends~ a dense
cement-mortar lining; a dense, concentric, steel-reinforced
exterior mortar coating; a self-centering bell and spigot joint
with a circular performed elastomeric gasket, so designed that
the joint will be watertight under all conditions of service and
shall conform to the specifications of the American Water Works
Standard C-303, latest edition. Pipe and fittings shall have
the approval of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
The pipe shall be designed and manufactured to withstand a
working pressure of 150 pounds per square inch, unless otherwise
noted, with allowances for surge pressures and external loadings
as may be otherwise noted in these specifications. The pipe
shall be approved for waterworks service by Underwriters
Laboratories and the Texas Fire Insurance Commission.
Special pipe sections, short lengths, outlets and special
fittings, such as reducers, wyes and bends, shall be furnished
and installed where required by the drawings. Fittings shall be
constructed of steel cylinders, concrete lined and coated, and
shall be designed to withstand the pressure equal to that of the
aubuttin§ pipe sections. The design shall have the approval of
the En§ineer prior to fabrication.
The Contractor shall furnish layout drawings, which show each run
of pipe and indicate the location of all bends, outlets, special
fittings and connections where are to be fabricated and included
as a part of the pipe to be installed under this section of the
specifications.
TS34-1
34.03 BEDDING AND BACKFILLING WITHIN THE PIPE ZONE
For the portion of this specification, the pipe zone is defined
as that portion from the bottom of the trench excavation to a
point one foot (l') above the top of the pipe.
Trenches shall be excavated by machine or hand to the lines and
grades laid out by the Engineer. The minimum depth of cover
shall be 3 ft. over the top of the pipe.
The banks of trenches shall be vertical to a point 1 ft. above
the top of the pipe. The width of trench shall be the outside
diameter of the pipe plus a minimum of 18" and a maximum of 24".
If the trench subgrade is not considered stable, it shall be
removed and replaced at the Engineer's direction.
Trenches in rock shall be excavated to provide a minimum of 6"
clearance below all parts of the pipe and fittings.
The pipe'shall be laid on a graded cushion of select material.
The thickness of the pipe cushion shall be one-tenth (1/lO) of
the pipe diameter but not less than 3". Select material shall
be loose earth, free of organic material, rocks or hard clods
greater than 2" in diameter. Trench excavation may be used if
suitable.
In rock excavation, the pipe shall be laid on a graded cushion
of 6" of imported select material. Imported select material
shall be a granular material, such as a free flowing sand, pea
gravel or like material, free from clay, organic material, or
large stones.
After the pipe has been laid, the select material will be placed
along both sides of the pipe simultaneously in 6" lifts to 12"
over the top of the pipe. Care should be taken to place back-
fill under the pipe haunches. The backfill from the bottom of
the pipe to the pipe springline shall be thoroughly compacted
or consolidated.
Backfilling above the pipe zone shall not be injurious to the
pipe and shall be in accordance with project specifications.
34.04 PIPE LAYING AND JOINTING
Pipe and fittings shall be installed at the loactions shown on
the contract drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, pipe in
trenches shall be laid to the grade shown on the approved shop
drawings. The Contractor shall establish the grade in the trench
from grade stakes set by the Engineer.
TS34-2
Minor deflections in the line may be made by unsymmetrical
closure of pipe joints; however, the maximum joint pull shall
be 3/4" for sizes 12" through 21" pipe, and l" for sizes 24"
and larger pipe. Short pipe sections and angle adaptors will
be used to make necessary line and grade changes in the field.
All pipe and fittings shall be laid on specified bedding so as
to be uniformly supported along its entire length. No "blocking
up" of pipe or joints will be permitted. Bell holes to allow
making the exterior joint shall be provided.
The pipe shall be kept clean during the laying operation and
free of all sticks, dirt and trash, and at the close of each
working day the open end of the pipe shall be effectively
sealed against the entrance of all objects, and especially water.
Where indicated on the contract drawings or where, in the opinion
of the Engineer, it is necessary, the pipe or fittings shall be
blocked with concrete.
Each section of pipe shall be tightly fitted together and care-
fully installed to true line and grade. Prior to laying each
joint of pipe the bell and spigot shall be thoroughly cleaned
by brushing and wiping.
The rubber gasket and the inside surface of the bell shall be
lubricated with an approved lubricant (vegetable compound soap)
which will facilitate telescoping of the joint. The rubber
gasket will be snapped into the spigot ring groove to equalize
circumferential distribution of the gasket. After the spigot
is forced into the bell of the adjacent pipe, the inside recess
between the ends of the pipe shall have a maximum opening of l"
for pipe 21" and smaller and l-l/4" for pipe 24" and larger,
and a minimum opening of 1/4".
Interior joints on pipe 18" and smaller shall be made prior to
placing the pipe together by buttering the bell end with mortar.
After the joint is engaged, the inside joint is smoothed and
cleaned with a swab.
Interior joints on pipe 20" and larger shall be made after
jointing the pipe by filling the annular space with mortar
placed and smoothed by hand.
Mortar for inside joints shall be one part Portland cement, and
two parts clean sand.
The exterior joint shall be made by placing a joint wrapper
around the pipe. The joint wrapper shall be 7" minimum width
and be hemmed on each side. It shall encircle the pipe, leaving
an opening at the top to allow placing mortar and be fastened
to the pipe with metal strapping.
TS34-3
The liquid grout used for pouring the joint shall consist of
one part Portland cement, and two parts clean sand. The joint
shall be filled from one side in one continuous operation until
the grout has flowed entirely around the pipe. During the
fillin.q of the joint it shall be rodded to settle the grout.
All exposed steel on fittings or specials shall be protected by
a l" coating of Portland cement mortar. After placing, the
mortar will be covered with damp earth or burlap to prevent
rapid drying out.
34.05 PROTECTION OF PIPELINE
Tight fitting stoppers or bulkheads shall be securely placed
in all openings and in the end of the line when construction
is stopped temporarily and at the end of each day's work. It
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to deliver to
the Owner a pipeline which is c)ean throughout its entire
length.
34.06 CONCRETE BLOCKING
Class 2000 concrete shall be placed, as directed by the Engineer,
for blocking at each change in direction of the pipeline in a
manner which will substantially brace the pipe against undis-
turbed trench walls.
Concrete blockin~q shall have been in place eight {8} days prior
to testin~q the pipeline as herein specified.
34.07 SERVICE OUTLETS
Threaded service outlets of the proper size shall be installed
in accordance with details and at locations shown on the plans
or as directed by the Engineer. Outlets shall consist of a
fitting fabricated integrally with the pipe, having iron pipe
threads, and, if required, a corporation cock, which shall be
Mueller No. 15025 or approved equal.
34.08 TESTS FOR CONCRETE CYLINDER PIPE
{a} Hydraulic Test -After the pipe has been laid for at least
seven {7) days, the pipeline shall be tested in such
sections as are convenient for the Contractor and approved
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish all labor,
materials, tools and equipment required to bulkhead and
seal off the line for testing, fill it with water, raise
the filled line to test pressure and measure both pressure
and leakage over the specified test period.
The entire length of the installed line shall be field
tested for water tightness in the following manner. The
section of the pipeline to be tested shall be filled with
water and allowed to stand for such time as is required for
the cement lining of the pipe to absorb such water as it
TS34-4
will and for the escape of all air from the line. During
the filling of the pipe, care shall be exercised to see
that all air vents are open, and all bulkheads, valves,
manholes, connections, etc., in the section undergoing
test shall be carefully examined for leakage. All known
leaks shall be stopped, regardless of these test require-
ments.
The test shall consist of raising and holding the hydro-
static pressure in the test action to 150 P.S.I. pressure
for which the pipe was designed, unless otherwise noted in
the special conditions. Such test pressure shall be main-
tained for a period of four {4) hours, during which time
the water pumped into the line to maintain the test pres-
sure shall be accurately measured in a manner satisfactory
to the Engineer.
A test for the determination of amount of leakage shall be
run subsequent to the hydrostatic test. The test for the
leakage shall be run for a duration of two (2) hours at the
same pressure as for the hydrostatic tests. The amount of
leakage shall not exceed a rate equal to l0 gallons per inch
of internal pipe diameter per mile per 24 hours for pipe in
40-foot lengths.
In the event any section of the line tested fails to meet
the above specified requirements for water tightness, the
cause of the excessive leakage shall be determined and
remedied to the satisfaction of the Engineer, at the expense
of the Contractor. The pipeline shall then be retested to
comply with the specified hydrostatic and leakage tests.
(b) Sterilization - Prior to sterilizing, each valve section of
the new pipe shall be pressure tested and flushed with clean
water furnished by the Owner to remove all apparent evidence
of dust, soil, and fine debris which may have entered the
line during construction and testing. The water required
to flush and sterilize the lines, without unnecessary waste,
will be furnished by the Owner, without charge to the Con-
tractor, unless otherwise specified herein.
Chlorine shall be used to sterilize the pipeline by the
following method: The amount of chlorine applied shall be
such as to provide a dosage of not less than fifty (50)
parts per million. The chlorinating material shall be
introduced to the new water lines in a manner approved by
the Engineer. After a contact period of not less than eight
(8) hours, the system shall be flushed with clean water
until the residual chlorine content is not greater than 0.2
parts per million. All valves in the lines being sterilized
shall be opened and closed several times during the contact
per iod.
TS34-5
Unless otherwise provided for in the Proposal, the cost of
furnishing the chlorine, labor, tools, equipment, bacterio-
logical tests and tests of chlorine content will be at the
expense of the Contractor. No water mains shall be placed
in service until water samples have been taken by the
Contractor and a satisfactory test report has been received
from an approved laboratory.
34.09 AIR VALVE INSTALLATIONS
Air valves shall be installed at the locations shown in the
plans. The lump sum amount in the Proposal shall include
furnishing and installing all required material, apparatus and
incidentals performing all operations necessary for the instal-
lation of an air valve in accordance with the detail shown on
the plans.
Combination air and vacuum air release valves shall be of the
size shown on the plans and shall be designed to operate under
a maximum water working pressure of 150 pounds per square inch.
34.10 BLOW-OFF VALVE INSTALLATIONS
Blow-off valves shall be installed at the locations shown on the
plans. The lump sum amount in the Proposal shall include
furnishing and installing all required material including flanged
outlet, flanged and mechanical joint gate valves, cast iron pipe
and fittings and concrete required for blocking and performing
all operations necessary for the installation of a blow-off valve
in accordance with the detail shown on the plans.
34.11 TUNNEL CONSTRUCTION
Concrete pressure pipe shall have uniform alignment and bearing
when installed as a carrier pipe in a tunnel or encasement pipe.
Metal rails may be necessary within the encasement pipe to pro-
vide straight alignment and grade. Permanent jacks or wedges
shall be used to prevent floating.
If a carrier pipe joint is to be located within the tunnel, the
encasement pipe shall be large enough to provide a minimum of
15-inches clear space above the carrier pipe for access to place
cement mortar protection around the joint. If access space is
not provided, the carrier pipe joints shall be welded and mortar
protection applied as specified above before the carrier pipe is
placed in the tunnel. The cement mortar shall be allowed to
harden sufficiently to avoid dislodgement during installation.
If time is of the essence, quick-setting compound such as Embeco,
or approved equal, may be used.
TS34-6
In open cut construction with encasement pipe of insufficient
size to permit access to exterior joints of carrier pipe, an
opening shall be provided in encasement pipe of each carrier
pipe joint. The opening shall be closed in an approved manner
after protecting the carrier pipe joint with cement mortar.
34.12 LINES AND GRADES
Under Section lO of the General Conditions of Agreement after
the first sentence, "unless otherwise expressly provided for in
the Specifications, the Owner will furnish to the Contractor all
surveys necessary for the execution of the work", add the follow-
ing paragraphs:
"The Engineer will furnish stakes and elevations to enable
the Contractor to set his batter boards, string lines and
grade rod for constructing the treated water transmission
main and related appurtenances. The furnishing of the
stakes and elevations does not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility of checking to insure that the mains, man-
holes and other related appurtenances are constructed to
the lines and grades shown on the plans.
The Contractor shall take every precaution to prevent the
removal of disturbance of the construction stakes estab-
lished by the Engineer for this project. ~hould any of
the stakes be removed or otherwise disturbed through care-
lessness of the Contractor, the stakes will be replaced at
the expense of the Contractor.
It may be found necessary for the Engineer and Owner to
make whatever revisions necessary in alignment, grades and
materials where during construction there is found to be
existing conditions which would warrant a more practical
and economical installation. The Contractor will be paid
only for the materials actually installed as listed in the
Proposal and any other compensation for the revision will
not be considered."
34.13 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT
Payment for the piping, valves, fittings, fire hydrants, concrete
blocking, base pads, complete in place, and all other work
necessary and incidental to the installation thereof, all, in
accordance with the plans and the provisions of these Technical
Specifications No. TS34, shall be included in the lump sum bid as
provided in the Proposal.
TS34-7
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS NO. 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.O1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools,
equipment, and perform all work and services necessary for,
or incidental to, the furnishing and installation, complete
and properly operating, all mechanical work, equipment and
systems, as shown on drawings and as specified, in accor-
dance with provisions of the Contract Documents, and com-
pletely coordinated with work of all other trades.
B. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish
and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, de-
tails, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary
for a sound, secure and complete mechanical system.
C. Drawings and specifications shall be taken together.
Provide work specified and not indicated, or work indicated
and not specified as though mentioned in both.
D. Execute work using such methods, techniques, connections
and tie-ins which will cause least interference with, and
interruption of, existing utilities and services. Keep
roads clear of materials, debris, etc., to maximum extent
possible. Schedule all arrangements for work which will
cause interferences or interruptions, in' advance with
Architect/Engineer, all other affected trades, and authori-
ties having jurisdiction.
1.02 LOCAL CONDITIONS
A. Examine site and become familar with existing local
conditions affecting work.
B. Examine all drawings and specifications, including
architectural, structural and electrical, and become
familiar with types and systems of construction to be used.
Determine how such types and systems will affect instal-
lation of mechanical work.
C. Investigate, determine and verify locations of any overhead
or buried utilities on or near site. Determine such lo-
cations in conjunction with all public and private utility
companies and with all authorities having jurisdiction.
1.03 PERMITS, FEES, LICENSES, AND INSPECTIONS
Make arrangements for, obtain, and pay for necessary permits,
licenses and inspections. Pay all necessary fees in conjunction
with all mechanical work. (See Special Conditions)
MS1-1
1.04 RULES, REGULATIONS AND CODES
Perform all work in strict accordance with all rules, regu-
lations, codes, ordinances, or laws of Local, State, and Federal
governments, or of other authorities having lawful jurisdiction.
Comply therewith. Such rules, regulations, codes, ordinances,
or laws include, but are not necessarily limited to, the follow-
ing:
A. State building and fire codes.
B. State plumbing and mechanical codes.
C. City building and fire codes.
D. City plumbing and mechanical codes.
E. American Gas Association.
F. National Electric Code.
G. National Fire Protection Association.
H. Occupational Safety and Health Act.
1.05 APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS AND PUBLICATIONS
These applicable specifications and publications referred to
herein, form a part of these specifications, unless otherwise
i ndi c ated.
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
C. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
D. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-
Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).
E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
F. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA).
G. Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning National Contractors
Association (SMACNA).
H. Factory Mutual Association (FM).
1.06 "RECOGNIZED MANUFACTURER"
As used herein the "Recognized Manufacturer" means an individual,
firm or corporation of recognized ability which has been in
business of manufacturing his or its equipment with parts of
MS1-2
reputable manufacture by others, and who shall assume full
responsibility for furnishing an item or items of equipment
complete with fittings, trimmings and parts necessary for a
complete and correctly operating installation.
A. Unless a longer period is specified, manufacturers who
have been engaged in manufacturing materials or equipment,
for a period not less than twelve (12) months prior to
receipt of bids shall be deemed to have been engaged in
business of manufacturing for a reasonable length of time.
B. When required by Engineer, demonstrate that a manufacturer
has successfully furnished and installed materials, or
equipment, of type proposed for use, and provide not less
than five (5) verified instances of satisfactory installed
performance.
1.07 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Drawings of any manufactured item (or equipment) or refer-
ences in specifications to any manufactured item (or equip-
ment) by brand name or identification number shall be
construed only as defining the type, function and accept-
able quality. Contractors may request approval of any
substitute article, device, product, material, fixture,
or item of equipment. Submit request for approval in
accord with General Requirements No. 4.
B. Equipment indicated on drawings is specified equipment.
In event approved substitute equipment is provided, equip-
ment so provided shall fit into allotted space. Furnish
and install all additional piping, ductwork, and controls,
electrical work, or other appurtenances and make all changes
necessary to completely and correctly install approved
substitute equipment.
C. Where an authorized representative of an equipment manu-
facturer wished to quote on material or equipment not
specified, he shall furnish necessary data, catalog cuts,
manufacturer's numbers, etc., to allow Engineer to evaluate
substitute equipment.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A. Order of Work.
1. Submit lists of subcontractors, materials and equipment
in accordance with Section "Shop Drawings, Project Data
and Samples." After approval of items of material or
equipment, as listed, those items are then authorized
for submission of shop drawings. Shop drawings will
not be approved until subcontractor, materials and
equipment lists are approved.
MS1-3
2. Ordering Equipment: After approval of subcontractor,
materials and equipment lists and to expedite orderly
progress of work, place tentative orders for all
approved major items of material and equipment. Orders
so placed are subject to final approval of shop
drawings.
3. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with requirements
of Contract Documents, and in accordance with detailed
requirements of the various sections of mechanical
specifications.
4. Order equipment with proper size and type of con-
nections in accordance with applicable piping service
specified hereinafter. Order all equipment with
flanges, fittings, drilling, pressure rating, etc.
which will match flanges, fittings, etc. specified
for piping.
5. Provide offsets and crossovers in ductwork and piping
shown on drawings and shop drawings, or which are
required to complete mechanical work. Provide off-
sets, crossovers, and changes in ductwork and piping
necessary to properly coordinate mechanical work with,
or to clear, work of other trades, equipment, etc., at
no additional cost to Owner whenever they are necessary
to complete mechanical work.
6. When necessary to change location of any work, due to
building construction, etc., obtain approval of Engi-
neer before making change. Make changes at no add-
itional cost to Owner. Under no circumstances change
sizes shown on drawings without securing written
approval of Engineer.
7. Install all structural items, concrete work, piping,
conduit, wiring, and all other work associated with
major items of equipment complete, while equipment
is on final confirmed order. Make such associated
work ready to receive equipment when said equipment
arrives on site.
B. Additional Requirements.
1. Submit shop drawings of all items of equipment
indicated.
2. Make shop drawings sufficiently complete in detail
to enable Engineer to determine compliance with
design intent. Include details and information shown
but are not necessarily limited to, the following:
a. Performance characteristics.
b. Physical sizes and weights.
MS1-4
c. Material specifications and construction details.
d. Compliance with rules, regulations and codes.
e. Wiring diagrams and control sequences.
f. Accessories.
g. Motor sizes, maximum brake horsepower, voltage
and phase.
3. Note any item, component, material or portion of
equipment which differs from design intent. Specifi-
cally call variation to attention of Engineer to
permit evaluation of substitute item.
4. Shop drawings will be approved only to extent of in-
formation indicated. Approval of an item of equipment
shall not be construed to mean approval for components
of that item for which Contractor has provided no
i nformat ion.
5. Approval of shop drawings shall not relieve Contractor
of responsibility for providing all controls, wiring,
components, etc., which are shown or specified, or all
additional controls, wiring, components, etc., re-
quired to provide complete and correctly operating
mechanical systems.
C. Indicate minor deviations from specifications where
standards of manufacturer differ on shop drawings.
1. Dimensions and ratings of equipment specified or
shown on drawings are intended to generally establish
outlines and characteristics of equipment.
2. Manufacturer's catalog numbers or types which are
specified or indicated are intended as a guide only
and do not take precedence over basic rating and duty
specified. In all cases, verify duty specified with
characteristics of equipment proposed for approval.
3. When equipment furnished differs in physical size
or arrangement from specified equipment, make all
alterations to equipment or structure necessary to
accommodate equipment.
1.09 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
A. Use only prime quality new materials, apparatus, and
equipment. Use only thorough, highly skilled, and
experienced workmanship throughout.
B. Install all piping and ductwork parallel to walls and
vertically plumb, unless otherwise indicated.
MS1-5
1.10 CUTTING, FITTING, REPAIRING, PATCHING, AND FINISHING
A. Arrange and pay for all cutting, fitting, repairing,
patching, and finishing of work of other trades where it
is necessary to disturb such work to permit installation
of mechanical work. Perform work only with craftsmen
skilled in their respective trades.
B. Avoid cutting, insofar as possible, by setting sleeves,
frames, etc., and by requesting opening in advance. Assist
other trades in securing correct location and placement of
rough-frames, sleeves, openings, etc., for ducts and piping.
C. Before cutting, obtain permission from Engineer. Use only
approved methods. Cut all holes neatly and as small as
possible to admit work. Include cutting where sleeves or
openings have been omitted. Perform cutting in manner so
as not to weaken walls, partitions or floors. Drill holes
required to be cut in floors without breaking out around
holes.
D. Where cutting of holes through reinforced concrete is nec-
essary, cut by rotary type drill. Use of pneumatic hammer
type drills, impact type electric drills, and hand or manual
hammer type drills will not be allowed. Locate holes so as
not to affect structual sections such as ribs or beams.
Layout holes in advance and perform drilling only after
approval by Engineer.
E. Prepare, for own use, accurate drawings showing location
of pipe sleeves, duct sleeves, inserts, openings, etc.,
which pass through or into reinforced concrete construction.
Select locations to permit neat installation of piping or
duct systems and related equipment, and arrange to avoid
interference and misalignment. To expedite orderly progress
of the work, prepare drawings at earliest practicable date.
F. Where alterations are necessary, including outside trench-
ing, disturbing lawns, walks, paving, etc., or where new
or old work join, or so much thereof as is disturbed by
conditions of the work, cut, remove, patch, repair and
restore, adjacent surfaces and leave in as good a condition
as existed prior to start of work.
1.11 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING
See Site Work No. 2
1.12 PAINTING
A. Perform all of the following painting. Provide following
items as part of mechanical work.
1. Factory applied finish coats on mechanical equipment.
MS1-6
2. Factory applied prime and finish coat on all air
registers, grilles, and diffusers, color to be
selected.
3. Factory applied prime coat on access doors.
4. Pipe identification where specified.
5. Factory applied prime coat on air handling units
and louvers.
B. If factory finish on any equipment furnished is damaged in
shipment or during construction, refinish equipment to
satisfaction of Engineer.
1.13 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Unless otherwise indicated, mount all equipment and install
in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. Where equip-
ment is to be anchored to structure, furnish and locate
necessary anchoring devices.
B. Furnish all necessary scaffolding, staging or cribbing
required for completion of work. Remove all such scaf-
folding, etc., from premises when no longer required.
C. Structural
1. Furnish all structural steel, such as angles, channels,
beams, etc., required to support all piping, ductwork,
equipment and accessories installed under this Divi-
sion. Use structural supports suitable for equipment
specified, or as indicated. Support will, in all
cases, be from data contained in manufacturer's cata-
log. Check all loadings and dimensions of equipment
from "certified" prints of equipment. Verify that
equipment furnished will fit structural layout. Where
"approved equal" equipment is used, submit revised
structural drawings designed to fit equipment actually
furnished. Shop fabricate structural steel for
assembly with bolts. Minimize amount of welding
required on job. Do not weld or burn building
structural members.
2. Galvanize all structural steel installed inside of fan
plenums, areas of high humidity or locations where
moisture may collect due to condensation.
3. Use structual steel members conforming to ASTM A-36.
Furnish with shop coat of red lead primer. Retouch
primer after field welding.
D. Rain Hoods and Flashings
1. Furnish stainless steel, sheetlead, or sheet copper,
clamps, waterproofing material, labor and whatever
MS1-7
else necessary for installation of weathertight
flashing and water proofing around all pipelines,
stacks, and other equipment which extends through
roof or wall construction.
2. Fabricate all flashings of minimum 20 gallon stain-
less steel. Plumbing vent stack flashings to be of
lead. Fabricate flashings for copper lines of 24 oz.
copper. Where flashings are applied over concrete,
paint concrete with 1/8 in. coating of mastic cement
before metal is applied.
3.Set flashing in mastic cement as required to insure
a watertight installation.
4. Repair and replace roof construction, flashing, etc.,
which may be damaged during construction, with
materials similar to materials, installed, in a manner
which will not nullify roof guarantee.
E. Provide equipment guards for protection at all belts,
couplings, and other moving equipment and machinery in
accordance with OSHA requirements. Make guards of suitable
structural shapes and 12 ga., three-fourth inch mesh gal-
vanized hardware cloth welded to frames. Attach to
equipment by removable clips and bolts with wing nuts, or
other approved connectors.
F. Openings. Arrange for necessary openings in buildings to
allow for admittance of all apparatus furnished under
this contact.
G. Foundations.
1. Furnish concrete foundations indicated on architec-
tural or structural drawings for mechanical equipment.
Furnish all other foundations for equipment installed
under this division.
2. For all equipment where drawings do not show special
foundations, install concrete pads. Reinforce pad
fondations with 6 x 6 x 8 x 8 mesh. Construct concrete
pads 6 inches thick, unless otherwise indicated.
Chamfer top edges 3/4 inch. Rub all faces smooth
that are proposed to be above grade with a carborun-
dum block after stripping of forms. Insert short
dowel rods into floors to provide anchorage for
pads. Set anchor bolts for machinery and hold in
place by means of templates. Construct concrete
foundations of 8,000 psi concrete.
1.14 PROVISIONS FOR LATER INSTALLATION
A. Where any mechanical work cannot be installed as structure
is being erected, provide and arrange for building-in of
boxes, sleeves, insets, fixtures or devices necessary to
MS1-8
permit installation later. Lay out any chases, holes
other openings which must be provided in masonry, concrete ~'
or other work.
B. Verify nature and arrangement of materials and constru~ti~.~
to which this work attaches or passes through.
1.15 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT
A. At all times, take such precautions as may be necessary
to properly protect all material and equipment from damage.
Failure to provide such protection will be sufficient
cause for rejection of material or equipment.
B. Install all work complete and protect from injury by others.
Cap, plug or otherwise protect all temporary openings in
piping and ducts to prevent any dirt from entering. Take
care to see that all pipe fittings are installed free from
paint or grease. Deliver all finished work and equipment
to Owner in a clean and new condition.
C. At jobsite, store piping, equipment, etc., too large to
keep under cover in building, a minimum of 2 feet above
ground. Keep covered with plastic sheeting, arranged to
provide adequate ventilation and prevent trapping of
moisture.
D. Restore piping, equipment, etc., which rusts, or is
damaged by elements to new condition prior to installation,
or such equipment may be rejected by Engineer or Owner.
Replace rejected piping, equipment, etc., with new mater-
ials.
. E. Cover all motors and bearings with watertight and dustproof
.... covers during storage and construction.
F. Rejected items remain property of Contractor. Promptly
remove from site.
G. Deliver systems to Owner with clean filters, clean
strainers and all bearings properly lubricated.
1.16 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT FOR MAINTENANCE
Install all equipment, piping, etc., to permit access for normal
maintenance. Maintain easy access to filters, motors, drives,
compressors, etc. Install all such equipment and accessories.
Arrange piping, conduit, ducts, etc., to facilitate maintenance.
Perform any relocation of pipes, ducts, etc. required to permit
access at request of Engineer at no additional cost to Owner.
1.17 RUBBISH
Properly remove all rubbish resulting from work.
1.18 PIPING IN,GENERAL
MS1-9
A. Install all piping parallel to building walls and ceilings
and at such heights as not to obstruct any portion of ~ .
window, doorway, stairway, or passageway. Where inter-~..I
ference develops in field, offset or reroute piping as
required to clear such interferences. In all cases, con-
sult drawings for exact location of pipe spaces, ceiling
heights, door and window openings or other engineering and
architectural details and report discrepancies to Engineer,
before instal ling piping.
B. Cut all screwed piping carefully, ream, thread and work
into place without springing. Use a small amount of pre-
pared pipe thread lubricant on outside threads only.
C. Factory cut and thread all nipples from seamless stock.
Use nipples of same material as pipe with which they are
used. Do not use close nipples except where such use is
unavoidable. Use schedule 80 seamless pipe for close
nipples and all nipples of pipe 3/8 inch or smaller.
D. Where backing is required in walls or floors for setting
of fixtures or equipment, furnish and properly locate all
backing or sleeves required.
E. Where transition occurs from sweated fittings as at con-
nection to fixture supplies, etc., provide rigid anchorage
so that no strain will be placed upon tubing.
F. Pitch all piping to drain. Make all piping drainable.
Where possible, pipe drainage may be accomplished through
drain valves located on equipment and fixtures. Use
minimum pitch of 1 inch per 60 feet unless otherwise
indicated.
1.19 PIPING EXPANSION
A. Install all piping so that it will be free to expand with-
out injury to equipment or structure. Install loops or
approved expansion joints where necessary and where
detailed.
B. Where screwed piping is used for soil, waste or vent risers,
or downspouts, use caulked joints or expansion joints at
intervals to allow expansion movement.
1.20 PIPE IDENTIFICATION AND PAINTING
A. Mark piping above grade with flow direction arrows and
name markers.
B. Paint all piping located above grade and in fan, boiler
and miscellaneous rooms if specified under piping sections.
C. Name Markers and Arrows
MSI-IO
1. Identify all piping in fan and mechanical equipment
rooms at equipment and every twenty feet with a pipe
marker giving content name in full and flow directional
arrow,
2. Identify all piping outside of mechanical equipment
rooms, and including pipe chases, crawl spaces,
tunnels, ceiling spaces and piping exposed in rooms
every twenty feet with a pipe marker, giving content
name in full, and flow direction arrow.
3. Install markers with tape color bands over each end
of marker, extending around pipe and overlapping a
minimum of 30 degrees. Color bands shall conform to
ANSI Al3.1, scheme for Identification of Piping
Systems.
4. Pipe markers and flow directional arrows: Brady "All
Temperature Perma Code" markers as manufactured by W.
H. Brady Company, 727 West Glendale Avenue, Milwaukee,
Wisconsin, or Minnesota Mining & Manufacturing Co.,
3690 "Scothcal" brand film, or approved equal.
D. Use name marker, band and arrow sizes, as follows:
Ouside diameter of Width of Height of Legend
Pipe. or pipe.c, overing Color Band Letters, Nos., &..Arrows
3/4 inch thru 1 - 1/4 inch 2 inches 1/2 inch
1-1/2 inch thru 2 inches 2 inches 3/4 inch
2-1/2 inch thru 6 inches 4 inches l-l/4 inches
8 inches thru 12 inches 4 inches 2-1/2 inches
14 inches and over 6 inches 2-1/2 inches
E. Soil, waste, and vent piping do not require color code
paint or bands.
1.21 VALVES
Provide and install valves as specified in each respective
piping section. Where no valve manufacturer is listed, use
valves as designated in the following. Use valves of only one
manufacturer throughout the project. All valves shall be right
hand closing.
Lunken-
Valve Type Crane Walworth .Powell Jenkins Stockham heimer
Gate, 2 in. & smaller, 430UB 55 500 62U B-lO6 2125
125 lb., bronze, 1821 1243 2131
rising stem
Globe, 2 in. & smaller, 1240 95 650 106-A B-22 123
150 lbs., bronze B-2A 126
MSl-ll
Lunken-
Valve Type Crane Walworth Powell Jenkins Stockham heimer
Swing check, 3 in. & 37 406 578 92-A B-319 2144
smaller, 125 lb., 1222 B-309 2145
bronze
Bal anci ng cock, 250 554 948 454
1-1/2 inch & smaller,
square head, bronze
1.22 IDENTIFICATION OF VALVES
A. Identify all valves not at equipment by means of aluminum
or brass tags. Identify valves on a typewritten list with
reference to valve tag number and location. Furnish valve
list to Owner in triplicate. Mount one copy on wall under
glass or plastic in mechanical equipment room.
B. Attach tags to valve with heavy aluminum or brass beaded
chain soldered so that chain and tag cannot be removed.
Make numbers and letters of block type, 1/2 in. high
stamped thereon and filled with black enamel. Where it is
necessary to operate more than one valve in order to
control a section of piping, stamp number of other valve or
valves on tags in 1/4 in. high block type letters filled
with black enamel. Tags as manufactured by Mechanical Tag
Systems Co. of Cedar Rapids, Ia., or approved equal.
1.23 UNIONS
A. Provide a union between valves and connection to each
fixture, to each device or item of equipment and elsewhere
as required to make up or disconnect piping. Install each
union to facilitate removal of parts, equipment or fix-
tures, for inspection or cleaning. Install in a position
which will permit device, fixture or part to be removed
without disconnecting any piping except unions.
B. Use unions of type and material specified under each
piping specification.
C. Where flanged valves are used at equipment connections
additional flange unions will not be required. Make
connections to flanged valves and equipment using ANSI
welding neck or slip on type welding flanges with raised
face. Flanged cast-iron ells may be used for connections
between pumps, strainers, check valves and other flanged
equipment. Use flanges, rated 125 psi. In no case shall
flange pressure ratings be less than equipment served or
system operating pressure.
1.24 DRAINS
A. Install drains on all heating, process or other pipe,
either as indicated as required to permit complete drainage
MSl-12.
of all systems. Use drain consisting generally of 3/4 in.
globe valve with hose adapter that will permit complete
draining of coils, pumps, casings and major items or
equipment. Where additional drains are required to drain
low points of piping, use a minimum of 6-inch length of
nipple with valve which may drain that portion of piping
only. Provide hose and valves on all piping 2-1/2 inch,
and larger and drain cocks on piping 2-inch and smaller.
B. Pipe drains from safety valves, hot water safety valves,
and other items where discharge is infrequent or have test
levers over edge of equipment or as indicated. Make drains
installed on copper piping with a male iron pipe adapter
and threaded brass cap except where valve drains are
requi red.
C. Regardless of pipe size, where drains are installed on
piping over electrical equipment or over other piping on
equipment which makes access to drain valve difficult,
pipe these drain valves to an accessible location with a
hose bib adapter such that system may be drained without
damage to equipment, insulation or finished spaces.
1.25 SLEEVES
A. Furnish and install all sleeves where required for instal-
lation of work under this Section. For wall sleeves up to
14-inch diameter, use round metal sleeves. Box out open-
ings larger than 14-inch diameter. After installation of
pipes, ducts, etc., through sleeves set in walls, complete
patching around such openings if box size or sleeve is too
large. Coordinate location of any opening in structural
systems with Engineer.
B. Where sleeves are set in walls for future connections,
close openings with an approved lightweight type of
plaster. Use similar materials for patching around
sleeves at other points, unless instructed otherwise
by Engineer.
C. Where pipes pass through mechanical room walls, stairwells,
tunnels, or fan rooms, install pipe sleeves of black-iron
pipe up to 6-inch diameter. For all sizes over 6-inch,
use 12 guage sheet metal with welded seams or at Contrac-
tor's option, standard steel pipe. Set all sleeves with
ends flush with finished wall surfaces. Use steel pipe
where indicated for penetration of structural beams when
approved by Engineer.
D. Where pipes pass through interior building walls or floors,
set No. 18 guage galvanized sheet metal sleeves 1-inch
larger than outside diameter of pipe, or at Contractor's
option, 24 guage spiral duct type sleeves. Space around
pipes with insulation approved by the Engineer.
MSl-13
E. Where pipes pass through interior building walls below
grade into excavated areas such tunnels or basements, set
pipe sleeve 1 inch or one pipe size larger than pipe and
close opening with synthetic rubber seals, "Link-Seal",
as manufactured by Thunderline Corporation, or an
approved equal.
F. Where pipes pass through floors, generally, set galvanized
pipe sleeves 1 inch larger than outside diameter of pipe.
Fill opening around pipe with insulation and caulk both
sides.
G. Where pipes are insulated, use sleeves large enough to
allow insulation to pass through sleeve.
H. Set all sleeves true to line, grade, position, and plumb
or level and maintain so during construction.
I. Provide pipe sleeves around all piping passing through
walls, floors, foundations, footings, and grade beams.
1.26 PIpE HANGERS
A. Pipe hangers used are to be manufactured and installed
according to specifications SP-58-1975 (pipe hangers and
supports - materials, design and manufacture) and SP-89-
1978 (pipe hangers and supports - fabrication and instal-
lation practices) of the Manufacturers Standardization
Society (MSS). Pipe hanger selection and application shall
follow recommendations of MSS SP-69-1976, (pipe hangers
and supports - selection and application). Hangers and
accessories meeting these criteria are manufactured by
Elcen Metal Products Company, Grinnel Co., and Fee & Mason
Co.
B. Hangers used directly on copper pipe shall be cooper or
cadmium plated. All other hangers and channels, angles,
and supporting steel shall be cadmium plated or galvanized.
Six or more pipes running parallel may be supported on
trapeze hangers.
C. Hangers shall be located at each change of direction and
spaced at or within the following maximum limits. For
steel high pressure piping, hanger spacing shall not
exceed 7 foot. Minimum of one hanger per pipe section
close to joint on barrel and at change of direction and
branch connect ions.
D. Total hanger rod load (including piping, insulation, and
fluid) shall not exceed the following scheduled limits
(minimum rod size is 3/8 inch).
MSI-14
Nominal Rod Dia. Max. Load - Lbs.
3/8 610
1/2 1130
5/8 1810
3/4 2710
7/8 3770
1 4960
1. All hanger rods of continuous thread type shall be
electro-galvanized or cadmium plated after threads
are cut to prevent rusting. All structural steel,
angles, rods, channels, and hardware located in
boiler mechanical and fan rooms shall be galvanized.
E. Pipe Size and Type of Hanger Schedule
Pipe Sizes Gas or Liquid in Pipe Manufacturers
3 inch & less Rainwater downspouts Elcen Fig. 97 or 89
All piping requiring with items listed in
a vapor barrier (1) and (2) below
All sizes over Rainwater downspouts Elcen Fig. 14A or
3 inch All piping requiring Fig. Grinnel Fig. 171
a vapor barrier or 174 or Fee & Mason
Fig. 1705 or 2729.
In addition provide
items listed below in
(1) and (2)
1. Where individual hangers are used, apply a 9-inch
length of 9 lb. density insulation or Foamglas to
pipe at point of hanging. Place hangers outside
of insulation.
2. Where trapeze hangers are used, use a metal protection
saddle, Elecn Fig. 219 or equal, at each hanger in
addition to insulation.
F. Trapeze Hangers: Suspend piping installed on trapeze
hangers from concrete insets or approved structural clips.
Construct trapeze hangers of angle iron, channels or
other structural shapes with flat surfaces for point of
support.
G. Vertical Pipe Supports: Support all vertical pipe runs
in pipe chases at base of riser. Support pipes for
lateral movement with clamps or brackets.
H. Concrete Inserts: Install individual or continuous slot
concrete inserts for use with hangers for piping and
equipment exposed in labs and classrooms and as required.
Furnish and install concrete inserts in cooperation with
contractor as concrete forms are installed.
MSI-15
1. Continuous slot inserts:
Elcen Figure 1150 and 9000
Fee & Mason Figure 9000
2. Individual Inserts:
Elcen Figure 65, 88 or 266
Grinnel Figure 282, or 281
Fee &Mason Figure 186, 178 or 2570
I. Beam clamps:
Pipe size - 3 inches and less: Fee &Mason Fig. 255L or
equal.
Pipe size - 4 inches and over: Fee & Mason Fig. 249 or
equal.
J. Hangers in General: Install all piping so that it will be
free to expand and contract without creating undue stresses
in piping system. Construct and adjust all supports and
hangers to allow for proper pitch of pipes. Where
"Victaulic" couplings are used, place a hanger within 2
feet of each side of fittings to keep pipes in alignment.
1.27 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT ANCHORS
A. Furnish and install pipe anchors as indicated, or as
required, to permit complete installation of system. Do
not anchor piping to metal and plaster or Gypsum wallboard
partition walls.
B. Provide anchoring devices at locations indicated. Anchors
made up of angle iron and rods with turnbuckles are accep-
table unless detailed otherwise.
C. Ductwork, Equipment and Piping Hanger Rods. Anchoring
devices installed in concrete after forms are removed shall
be of hard metal type which do not depend on soft lead for
their holding power. Anchors to be used: Rawl Plug Co.,
Catalog No. 9300 Hammer Sets or Phillips Drill Co., self-
drilling Expansion Shields, or approved equal.
1.28 PRESSURE GAGES
A. Furnish and install all pressure gages indicated of a type
suitable for service intended. Fit each with a 150 lb.
angle globe valve at its point of connection to equipment.
If mounted at panel, provide a second 150 lb. angle globe
valve at its point of connection to equipment. If mounted
at panel, provide a second 150 lb. angle globe shutoff at
gage location.
B. Properly calibrate and zero all gages at job site for pres-
sure head and temperature in accord with manufacturer's
instructions.
MSI-16
C. Unless otherwise required by code, pressure gages shall
be 4-1/2 inch dial, surface or flush type as required,
with white faces, black numerals, black pointers, and
bronze bourdon tubes.
D. All pressure gages consist generally of, but are not
limited to, following:
Range Fig. Interval Inter. Graduations
Psig Psig Psig
0 to 200 20 2
E. Use gages conforming to ANSI specifications. Identify
each gage with a tag with letters 1/4 in. high. Run
one-quarter inch hard temper copper tubing from gage
with a 1/4 inch angle shutoff valve to its respective
pipe connect ion.
G. Use pressure gages suitable for service intended. Install
siphons in accord with gage manufacturer's recommendations
and best practices of trade.
1.29 MOTOR AND CONTROL
A. Furnish all motors, 3 phase or single phase, for all items
of equipment installed. Include any controls and wiring
required for controls either low voltage or line voltage
as a part of this work, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Controls. Install all line voltage controls, pushbuttons
and starter for equipment furnished under this Section not
otherwise specified. Install any line voltage controls
furnished under this Section required for operation of
mechanical equipment not otherwise specified.
C. Motors
1. For each item of equipment requiring electric drive,
furnish and install a ball or roller bearing motor
of type having starting and running charteristics
consistent with torque and speed requirements of
driven machine. Use motors rated in accord with
NEMA performance standards to carry full name plate
load continuously at maximum temperature rise of
40 degree C. above amblent with a service factor of
1.15.
2. Motor horsepowers specified in connection with equip-
ment drive, are considered as minimum. Manufacturers
verify equipment. Do not allow power requirements of
driven machine to exceed nominal nameplate rating of
motor furnished. Do not take advantage of service
factors in selection of motors. Make motors 1/2 HP
MSI-17
and over; 3 phase, 60 hertz. Motors less than 1/2 ~;
115 volt, single phase, 60 hertz, unless otherwise
indicated.
3. All motors shall be as manufactured by Reliance,
Westinghouse, General Electric, Louis Allis, Electric
Machinery, Allis-Chalmers, Century, or U. S. Motors.
1.30 ELECTRIC WIRING AND CONNECTIONS
A. Where motor sizes furnished are of a different size or
additional motors are required due to variation of
different manufacturer's equipment, furnish and install
such additional motors and controls in complete compliance
with other applicable qualifications to make a complete
installation.
1.31 CONNECTING .EQUIPMENT FURNISHED BY O,THERS
A. Provide rough-in and final connections to equipment as
listed in architectural and mechanical specifications and
equipment schedules.
B. Obtain all rough-in data from approved shop drawings on
all equipment. Obtain all rough-in data for relocating
existing equipment from inspection of same. Coordinate
with Owner and Engineer.
C. Receive, uncrate, and set in place all equipment and
fixtures furnished by others, unless otherwise specified.
D. Unless otherwise specified, make all final piping conection
to equipment furnished by others to include, but not be
limited to, installation of all brass and fittings,
strainers, pressure reducing valves, flow control valves,
relief valves, and grease traps provided with or as an
integral part of equipment.
1.32 OPERATION AND MAINTENACE MANUALS
A. Furnish three copies of operation, lubrication, and
maintenance manuals for all major items or equipment.
Assemble all literature in coordinated manuals with
additional information describing combined operation of
field assembled units, including as-built wiring diagrams,
names, and addresses of manufacturers, and local repre-
sentatives who stock or furnish repair parts for all
items. Divide manuals into three sections or books.
1. Sequence of operation of each item of mechanical
system, i.e., air handling unit systems, etc. List
all valves, switches, etc. operation to start and
stop system.
MSl-18
2. Lubrication instructions with proper type of grease,
frequency of inspection, and amount of lubrication
required for each item of equipment.
3. Detailed maintenance and trouble shooting manuals
containing all manufacturer furnished maintenance
data.
B. Turn over manuals to Engineer for approval and distribution
to Owner. Deliver not less than 30 days prior to accep-
tance of equipment to permit Owner's personnel to become
familiar with equipment and operation prior to acceptance.
C. Furnish and install an approved valve directory. Show
each valve number and location, and equipment, apparatus,
or fixture controlled by valve. Include in maintenance
manual.
D. Furnish neatly typed lubricating instructions showing type
of lubricant and frequency of lubricating required for
each piece of equipment furnished. Include in maintenance
manual.
1.33 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
At completion of installation or at such time as Owner accepts
portions of building and equipment for operation use, arrange
to have a member of service organization instruct Owner's
operating engineer in all parts of various systems. Cover a
period of controls such as will take mechanical equipment
through a complete cycle. Make all adjustments under actual
operating conditions. This time shall be a minimum of five (5)
working days.
1.34 PLACING SYSTEMS IN OPERATION
A. At completion of work and at such time as Owner or
Engineer directs, prior to final acceptance, put into
satisfactory operation various systems installed.
B. When plan is completely finished, operate entire plant
for a period of five (5) working days during which time
systems shall be thoroughly cleaned and all dirt, ~and,
scale, grease, etc., removed therefrom.
C. Inspect all equipment and clean of all foreign material.
Clean all exposed equipment and all cases, housing, fan
scrolls, and cabinets enclosing heating and cooling equip-
ment of grease, dirt, paint, plaster, etc., so that when
equipment is turned over to Owner, it is neat and clean.
MSI-19
1.35 BALANCING AND PERFORMANCE TESTS
A. On a date .predetermined and agreed upon by the Engineer,
Contractor, and the manufacturer, prior to acceptance of
installation by Owner, shall conduct various tests wit-
nessed by Engineer, to determine operational and functional
acceptability of equipment installed. Tests will determine
that all items of equipment and materials installed fully
meet all requirements as to type, quality, design, and
performance as stipulated in Contract Documents. If any
work performed or any equipment furnished and installed is
found to be inoperative, take remedial measures and arrange
for new tests at no extra cost to Owner. If afer re-tests
installation is still found to be inadequate, remove de-
fective equipment and furnish and reinstall equipment of
operational adequacy to satisfy Engineer that Contract
Documents have been satisfied. Perform this work at no
additional cost to Owner.
B. Before final acceptance and before turning work over to
Owner, have all parts tested and in good working order.
Perform all tests that may be required to demonstrate
efficiency of different appliances as called for herein.
Furnish all labor, required for test. Owner will furnish
electrical current, steam, water or gas required for such
test. Furnish sufficient oil and grease and keep all
equipment and bearings, etc., filled while preliminary
tests are being run.
C. If inspections or tests show defects, replace such de-
fective work or material and repeat inspection and tests
until defects are eliminated.
1.36 INSPECTION
A. Perform certain tests to demonstrate workmanship,
" materials, and equipment. When required, conduct tests
in presence of Engineer and City.
B. Conduct tests which are required to be witnessed by
Engineer and City only after each inspector has been
given 24 hours advance notice.
1.37 EQUIPMENT STANDARDIZATION
A. In order to establish equipment uniformity and standardi-
zation, furnish and install products of one manufacturer,
unless otherwise specified.
B. Standardized equipment consists generally of, but is not
limited to: Each of the following enumerated groups
shall be by same manufacturer.
1. All gate, glove, handle, angle, and swing check
valves.
MS1-20
2. All butterfly valves.
3. All piping, ductwork, and equipment insulation.
4. All control equipment.
1.38 GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee that all mechanical systems remain free from
defects in workmanship and materials, and perform to
specific capacities. If defects appear during a period
_~f eighte_en {18} months from date of substantial com-
'pletion, remedy such defects to satisfaction of Engineer,
at no extra cost to Owner. Correct all defects within
a reasonable period.
B. The date of substantial completion shall be defined in
~ ~ Cont r act
MS1-21
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION NO. 2
PLUMBING
2.01 GENERAL
Comply with Mechanical Specification No. 1. Furnish all labor,
materials, equipment and perform all work and services neces-
sary for or incidental to the furnishing and installation com-
plete, of all plumbing, as shown on Drawings and as specified,
in accordance with provisions of the Contract Doc~nents, and
completely coordinated with work of all other trades.
Although such work is not specifically shown or specified,
furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
2.02 WATER PIPING
Use Type "L" hard drawn copper with cast brass or wrought copper
fittings sweated with 50-50 solder. Clean joints and apply non-
corrosive flux before soldering. Install water piping not less
than 30 inches below grade. Install dielectric union between
copper piping and any ferrous piping.
2.03 VALVE BOX
Install cast iron valve box with cast iron cover; set box at
location shown on plans with top flush with grade. In box
install a 3/4 inch gate valve. Install unions in piping within
box to facilitate future replacement of valve.
2.04 NON FREEZE YARD HYDRANT
Install Josam #7198-3/4-2 (or equal) non-freeze box type yard
hydrant with Watts #8A (or equal) vacuum breaker at location
indicated on plans. Set hydrant in 18" X 18" X 6" concrete pad
with top l" above finished grade.
2.05 SERVICE TAP
Install service tap in water main in accordance with City of
Coppell standards.
MS2-1
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION NO. 3
VALVES: GENERAL STATEMENT
3.01 GENERAL
" The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, equip-
ment and perform all work and services necessary for or incident-
al to the furnishing and installation, complete, of all types of
valves incorporated in the work, including schedules, as shown on
drawings and as specified, in accordance with provisions of the
Contract Documents, and completely coordinated with work of all
other trades.
Although such work is not specifically shown or specified,
supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices
incidental to or necessary for sound, secure, complete and
compatible installation shall be furnished and installed as part
of this work.
3.02 QUALITY STANDARDS
A. General Requirements No. 1.
B. Verify drawings for valve designations and descriptions
contained.
C. Insure valves contained in this and referenced sections are
produced in full compliance to specified items and any
references to codes and standards. Abbreviated forms of more
common referred standards are as follows:
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials.
ANSI - American National Standards Institute
AWWA - American Water Works Association
MSS - Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and
Fitting Industry
AGMA - American Gear Manufacturers Association
D. Furnish valves with common end connections and insure types
comply to the applicable ANSI specifications.
3.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings in compliance to General Requirments
No. 2.
B. Verify material selections in affidavit of compliance to
specification. Information contained in submittals shall
include, but is not necessarily limited to the following:
MS3-1
(1) Valve Pressure Rating
(2) Specific Service Rating
(3) Valve Body Material
(4) Valve Trim
(5) Operator and Actuators
(6) Inner Lining Material
(7) Indicator Attachments
(8) Valve Dimensions
(9) Valve Class
(10) Quantity
(11) Maximum Non-Shock Shutoff
3.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inspect materials thoroughly upon arrival. Examine materials
for damage. Report damaged material immediately. Secure and
pay for replacement material items immediately.
B. Store valves in approved sheltered locations. Insure that
site is accessible in all types of weather.
C. Observe manufacturers directions regarding storage, hand-
ling, and incorporating in work.
3.05 OPERATORS AND VALVE ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT
A. Manual Operators
(1) Handwheels. Provide valves, except those specified to
have pneumatic operators, with handwheels. Insure
direction of rotation to open each valve is from right to
left (counter-clock-wise). Furnish valve body or
operators with impression cash showing word "OPEN" and
arrow indicating open direction. Provide valves for
throttling service with infinitely variable locking
device or totally enclosed geared operator.
(2) Lever Operators. Provide lever operators for valves less
that 8 inches in valve size. Design operators to produce
required torque with maximum pull of 80 pounds and
capable of being locked in at least five (5) intermediate
MS3-2
positions between fully open and fully closed for
butterfly valves. Furnish chain operated valve with
permanently attached lever. Insure levers for other
valves are removable.
B. Valve and Service Boxes
(1) Valve Boxes. Provide service boxes of cast-iron con-
struction. Extend service boxes to required length using
screw adjustment installed at service box locations.
Provide boxes with housings of sufficient size to
completely cover service stop and complete with
identifying covers.
(2) Setting Outside Valves. Locate valves installed in
trenches where indicated on drawings. Set valves and
valve boxes plumb. Place valve boxes directly over
valves with top of box being brought to surface of
finished grade. After installation, fill in earth for
distance of 4 feet on each side of box.
3.06 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. General. All butterfly valves on this project shall conform
to AWWA C 504. Valves shall be bubble tight at rated
pressures and shall be satisfactory for application involving
throttling or modulating service and/or frequent operation
and for applications involving valve operation after long
periods of inactivity. The valves shall be used on water at
a temperature of 32 degrees F. to 85 degrees F. The valves
shall be manufactured by Allis-Chalmers, Henry Pratt, or BIF
Industries. All manually operated valves shall be the
products of the same manufacturer.
B. Valve Bodies. Valve Bodies shall be constructed of high
strength cast-iron or fabricated steel.
Valves 14 inches and smaller may be of the flangeless type
and shall be designed to mount between two flanges to
maintain position and water tightness. Flange drilling
shall be in accordance with 125 pound ANSI Standards.
C. Valve Discs. Valve discs shall be constructed in accordance
with AWWA C 504, Section 7.
D. Valve Shafts. Valve sh'afts shall be of the one-piece
construction extending completely through the valve disc or
may be of the two-piece type which is comprised of two
separate shafts inserted into the valve disc hubs. All valve
shafts shall be of 18-8 Type 304 stainless steel. The design
of the shaft shall be in accordance with AWWA C 504 and for
valve classes 25-A and 25-B, as required. The shaft packing
gland shall permit replacement of packing without removal of
the valve operator.
MS3-3
E. Valve Seats. Valve seats on water lines shall be of natural
rubber or synthetic rubber compound. The valve seats may be
applied to the body or the valve disc. Rubber seats mounted
on the valve body shall be bonded, vulcanized, or clamped to
the valve body. Rubber seats which are mounted on the disc
shall be clamped to the valve disc with a continuous stain-
less steel retainer ring and stainless steel machine screws.
Valve seat shall effect closure against 18-8 stainless
steel. All clamps and retaining rings for rubber seats shall
be of corrosion resistant material with a maximum zinc
content of 16 percent and a maximum aluminum content of 3
percent. All nuts and screws used with clamps and retaining
rings shall be 18-8 stainless steel.
3.07 CHECK VALVES
Valves shall be as manufactured by the GA Industries or approved
equal and shall be suited for the purpose as shown on the
drawings.
High Service pump shut-off heads are approximately 375 feet.
High Service valves shall be designed for normal operation of 150
psi working pressure.
The check valve shall be of cast iron body with all bronze or
non-corrosive trim construction. The valve shall be flanged,
faced and drilled to conform to 125E ANSI Standards B 16.1 1975.
The valve shall be constructed with complete bronze or
non-corrosive lining which shall extend to form the seat of the
valve. The liner shall be provided with cast "V" port
openings. The piston shall be bronze. The pilot shall be of the
3-way type and of all bronze construction.
The design of the valve shall be such as to provide air and water
cushioning to reduce han~ner and shock. Speed of valve
closing/opening shall be adjustable by a hand operated regu-
lating valve. Wear on valve moving parts shall be absorbed by
renewable leather, composition or rubber cups and seat and shall
be such that the area above the piston shall be approximately
twice the area on the small end of the piston.
The valve shall be designed to provide full pipeline flow when
open and shall prevent back-flow of water when closed.
The valve shall provide for normal automatic opening and closing
function, plus emergency closing on electrical outage. It shall
also provide for manual-hydraulic control for opening main valve.
MS3-4
3.08 SPECIAL VALVES
A. Solenoid Valves. Furnish Class II, Division I electrical
equipment. Provide solenoids using 115 volt, 60 cycle,
single phase power unless other wise noted. Provide solenoid
valve equal to those listed in valve schedules in both
construction and operation. Furnish solenoid valves equal to
those manufactured by the Automatic Switch Co., Automatic
Valve Co., or approved equal.
B. Air-Vacuum Relief Valves. Where indicated on drawings,
provide a combination air release-vacuum breaker
incorporating one moving part consisting of a solid rubber
covered Obechi Ball. Insure that valve is designed that when
the large orifice is open, the ball remains in the throat
area without the possibility of the valve closing shut
collapsing the ball. Insure that the valve is immediately
closed when water rises in the valve to lift the Ball to the
orifice seat.
3.09 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
A. Provide suitable dj-electric protection between dissimilar
metals, as approved by the Engineer.
B. For valves 3 inches and smaller, provide union on one side at
most accessible location to facilitate removal for repairs or
replacement.
3.10 VALVE SCHEDULE
Unless otherwise shown on drawings or drawing shedules, provide
following valves, subject to requirements of specific specifi-
cations.
Service Category Size Range Type Operator
Potable water, 2 1/2 in. thru 8 in. butterfly lever
exposed over 8 in. butterfly gear operator
MS3-5
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION NO. 4
METERING EQUIPMENT, INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
4.01 INTRODUCTION
a. General
The contractor shall furnish and install all required
equipment, including wiring, piping, conduits and necessary
mounting and accessory equipment to provide a complete oper-
ating system.
Electrical controls, switches, conduit, relays, starters,
etc. and wiring required for operation of the equipment
shall be of the highest quality with regard to materials and
workmanship, and shall be furnished and installed.
All pressure piping, including valves and fittings, shall be
of highest quality.
All wiring and piping shall be installed in compliance with
the best standard practices and in accordance with the recom-
mendations as set forth by the supplier of the equipment
under this section.
These specifications describe equipment as manufactured by
the Healy-Ruff Company or approved equal.
b. Responsibility and Coordination
It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to furnish
a complete and fully operating system. The drawings and
specifications are intended to include all detains of a
complete equipment installation for the purposes specified.
The contractor shall be responsible for all details which
may be necessary to properly install, adjust and place in
operation the complete installation. The contractor shall
assume full responsibility for additional costs which may
result from unauthorized deviations from the specifications.
c. Manufacturing Supplier
The Motor Controls and Instr~nent Panel shall be listed by
Underwriter Laboratories as suitable for use as an
individual control panel.
d. Manufacturers Field Services
The services of a factory trained, qualified service
representative of the equipment manufacturer shall be
MS4-1
provided to inspect the complete equipment installation to
insure that it is installed in accordance with the manu-
facturers recommendations, make all adjustments necessary
to place the system in trouble free operation and instruct
the operating personnel in the proper care and operation of
the equipment furnished.
e. Manufacturers Guarantee
The selected equipment manufacturer shall guarantee that
the materials and/or workmanship of the equipment be free
from defects for a period one (1) year from date of equip-
ment start-up, providing the equipment has been operated
and maintained in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations.
f. Manufacturer's Data and Drawings
The selected equipment manufacturer shall submit six (6)
sets of the following information for the engineers
approval:
(1) Dimension drawings, wiring and/or piping drawings for
field and pipeline mounted equipment
(2) Fabrication and nameplate legend drawings, internal
wiring and piping schematic drawings.
(3) System schematic drawings illutrating all components
being supplied, complete with pneumatic and electrical
interconnections.
(4) Any other information that the manufacturer feels will
assist the engineer with approval.
g. Underwriters Laboratories Approval
The entire panel shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories
under the classification "Industrial Control Panels" and
bear the U L Serialized label.
The use of U L listed or recognized components only, shall
not be sufficient to meet this requirement of these
specifications.
4.02 SCOPE
Furnish an automatic control system designed to ultimately
operate four (4) pumps based on the water level in the remote
elevated tank. Three (3) pumps are proposed to be installed
initially.
A motor control center complete with the required starters,
breakers, transformer, etc. shall be supplied.
, MS4-2
The motor control center and automatic control system shall be
supplied by a single manufacturer who shall take full respon-
sibility for proper operation of the control.
4.03 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
a. Elevated Tank Transmitter
A transmitter shall be furnished complete for mounting at
the elevated tank. The transmitter s~all consist of a
pressure transducer, pulse width generator, power supplies
and lightning arrestors with fuses. The enclosure shall be
Nema 3R for outdoor mounting. A small heater shall be fur-
nished for condensation protection wired to run continuously.
Include a suitable heater and thermostat control properly
sized and located to prevent freezing within th enclosure.
Carefully insulate the enclosure with 1/2" thick poly-cel
insulation. A 4-1/2" gauge shall be included to read tank
level and facilitate calibration. Shut off and bleed valves
shall be furnished with gauge to allow level simulation.
The transmitter shall be connected to the main panel over
a single pair of leased telephone lines.
b. Ground Storage Tank Level Indicator And Transmitter
A float operated level transmitter shall be furnished for
sensing the level of the ground storage tank. (To be
specified and furnished by the City of Dallas.)
c. Main Control Center
The main control panel sh~ll consist of the necessary equip-
ment to receive the remote level signals, a sequencing con-
trol and the motor control center. Three 12" circular chart
recorders shall be supplied to indicated elevated tank level,
ground storage reservoir level and station flow. Each recor-
der shall be furnished with a 7-day chart drive and a one
year supply of charts and ink.
d. Elevated Tank Receiver
A pulse width receiver shall be supplied to receive the
level signal from the elevated tank. The output of the
pulse width receiver shall be monitored by set point modules
which will be used to start and stop four pumps and actuate
high and low alarms on the basis of level in the remote
tank. The receiver shall also produce a separate signal
(4-20ma) to position the pen on the elevated tank recorder.
MS4-3
e. Ground Storage Receiver
A span offset controller module shall be supplied to accept
the signal from the ground storage level reservoir trans-
mitter. The output of the span offset module shall be
monitored by set point modules which shall be used to
provide low level cutout protection for the pumps and
actuate high and low alarms on the basis of level in the
storage reservoir. The span offset module shall also pro-
duce a separate signal (4-20ma) to position the pen on the
ground storage tank recorder.
f. Metering Equipment
The Contractor shall furnish and install a flow metering
station as shown on the plans, to be located on the dis-
charge side of the high service pumps. It shall consist
of a differential flow tube of the head recovery type, an
electronic differential Pressure Cell type. Indicating
transmitter, producing a standard SAMA Electrical signal
proportioned to flow.
The Receiving Panel mounted instrumentation shall extract
the square root, indicate, totalize and record on weekly,
nominal 12" diameter linear charts. The system shall be
complete with necessary power supply, protective strainers,
surge suppressors and accessories to satisfactorily monitor
total flow from the Clearwell.
g. Flow Tube
Furnish and install a standard Fabricated Venturi with
stainless steel throat and carbon steel 125# Std. Flanges
and body. Line size shall be 16", Beta Patio shall be .4751
to produce approximately 120" differential for a max. of
lO.O MGPD Flow.
The tube shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased after
fabrication and shall be lined with a uniform thickness of
a proven long life coal tar Epoxy finish on the approach
and recovery section as well as the exterior surfaces of
the tube and flanges. Tube shall be Fluidic Techniques Inc.
Model V-lO0 or approved equal, with 21° entrance cone, one
piece s.s. throat and short form ]5° exit cone.
h. Flow Transmitter
Transmitter shall be an electronic D.P. Cell type with
rupture proof diaphrams, minimum hysterisis, three valve
by-pass assembly and dampening adjustment. Electronics
shall be potted and field replaceable as a unit. It shall
be of two wire type with circular dial indicator designed
MS4-4
to work with its associated panel mounted power supply and
square root extractor. Transmitter shall be Taylor Model
3303 TD 21110-05 or equal.
i. Square Root Extractor and Power Supply
Furnish and install in the instrument Panel section a
combination Power Supply and Square Root Extractor, Taylor
Model 1336NA llOOZ to work in conjunction with the Flow
Transmitter and panel Mtd. T.I.R. Instrument. Furnish a
Universal Housing Model 1023 FAO0001 with Resistor pack
1002KKO0001.
j. T.I.R. Receiver
Furnish and install a totalizing Indicating and Recording
Flow Receiver, Taylor Model X767TO01 with 12" Circular,
Weekly Charts, seven (7) digit totalizer reading in 1.O
M.G.D. with 0 multiplier.
A years supply of Charts and Ink will be furnished with the
Instrumentation.
k. A three circuit automatic alternator shall be provided to
change the sequence of operation of the three IOOHP pumps
after each cycle. The alternator shall have the capability
of alternating only two pumps at present and three pumps in
the future. The alternator shall be solid state and shall
not require the use of ratchet mechanisms or stepping
switches.
Time delay relays shall be supplied. The time delay relays
shall prevent simultaneously starting of the pumps.
1. An alarm system shall be supplied to provide indication of
alarm conditions. An alarm module shall be supplied to
indicate high and low level alarm conditions in the eleva-
ted tank and the ground storage reservoir.
A con,non alarm horn shall be supplied and mounted inside the
control center to operate in conjunction with the alarm
system.
m. A running light, elapse time meter and "Hand-Off-Automatic"
selector switch shall be provided for each pump. These
devices shall be mounted in an attractive manner on the door
of the automatic control system enclosure.
n. A motor control center shall be supplied to distribute power
to the individual motors, lights, heaters, etc. as required.
The control center shall include, but not be limited to the
following:
MS4-5
1 - Main Breaker
2 - Combination starter w/breaker IOOHP
1 - Combination starter w/breaker 60HP
1 - Space for future combination starter IOOHP
1 - Transformer w/breaker IOKVA
1 - Lighting panel 12 circuit
o. The control center shall be f~bricated in accordance with
Nema Class 2 Type B requirements and shall be provided in
Nema 1 enclosures. The equipment shall be designed for
operation on 480V 30 3W service.
~. ~.. ~.~ p. An alarm panel shall be furnished to indicate a common alarm
condition at the police station. The panel shall contain a
telemetering relay, a horn and a single alarm station
~- module. The alarm panel shall be connected to the main
~. ,~'
panel over a single pair of leased telephone lines.
4.04 EQUIPMENT CONSTRUCTION
a. Enclosures
The elevated tank transmitter shall be furnished in Nema 3R
enclosure approximately 24" wide by 18" high by 8" deep
constructed of 14 gauge steel, cleaned, phosphatized and
finished with an oven baked enamel. Enclosures shall be
equipped with a locking hasp. Include a condensation and
freezing protection heater with thermostat mounted inside
the enclosure. The enclosure shall also be insulated.
The float control enclosure shall be cast iron, splash and
drip proof. It shall be furnished with a floor mounted
flange and a pedestal pipe.
The alarm panel at the police station shall be furnished in
a Nema 1 enclosure approximately 20" wide by 12" high by 8"
deep constructed of 16 gauge steel, cleaned phosphatized and
finished with an oven baked enamel.
The control system and motor control center shall consist
of four (4) 24" wide standard modular Nema 1 freestanding
cubicles each 90" high and 20" deep forming a control
cabinet approximately 96" long. Cubicles and doors shall
be fabricated of 14 gauge sheet steel rigidly formed, and
welded. Access shall be from the front only.
b. Finish Coatings
These specifications require that the control manufacturer
produce a special high quality finish on this equipment.
Attention shall be given to the preparation of all metal
surfaces before painting. Scale, rust and rough spots shall
MS4-6
be removed and all surfaces ground smooth. All metal sur-
faces shall be prepared for painting by a five step hot dip
process wherein all parts are totally immersed in the neces-
sary preparation tanks. This process shall include a heavy
duty soak cleaner, cleaner rinse, zinc phosphate coating,
phosphate rinse and phosphate coating sealer. Iron phos-
phate shall not be considered acceptable. The finish enamel
must be oven baked at approximately 300°F. for 30 minutes.
An air dry finish shall not be acceptable. Finish coating
shall be an acrylic enamel. This exact metal preparation is
required to maintain rust inhibitive surfaces on which cor-
rosion will not creep under scratches or other surface
blemishes. These specifications are intended to provide
maximum protection against corrosion and abrasion by requir-
ing specific surface preparation procedures and definite
finish coating material. Certification of this process
including zinc phosphatizing, use of acrylic enamel and
oven baking shall be made available to the engineer upon
request.
c. Pressure Transducer
The pressure transducer shall consist of a LVDT whose core
is positioned by a bourdon tube. Spring loading or devices
which may be affected by changes in ambient temperature,
wear or fatigue will be unacceptable. A solid state 'driver
card' will be included as part of the transducer assembly.
This card will contain the necessary electronics to drive
the LVDT and convert the output signal to O-lO voltage
linearly proportional to pressure. The card shall also
produce a 4-20ma current signal.
The device shall be capable of suppressing pressure equal to
75% of the bourdon tube range so that only usable tank range
is measured.
Transducer shall be Healy-Ruff Series 8100 Roto-Tran.
d. Pulse Width Generator
The pulse width generator shall convert an input signal from
the pressure transducer and provide a pulse output signal
suitable for telemetry. The generator shall consist of a
solid state printed circuit card that accepts either a 0-10
volt or a 4-20ma DC input signal. The output shall be an
'on' signal which varies from 1-4 seconds, linearly propor-
tional to the magnitude of the input. Cycle time (between
beginning of successive 'on' pulses) shall be 5 seconds.
Maximum transmission line voltage shall be 24 volts DC. A
red LED light shall be included to indicate that a signal
is being transmitted. The pulse width generator shall be
Healy-Ruff Series 6510.
MS4-7
e. Receiver
The pulse width converter shall receive pulses of various
durations at regular intervals and provide an output signal
suitable for input to the level indicator and the analog
control stations.
The converter shall consist of a solid state printed circuit
card which shall accept input pulse ranges from 1-4 seconds
with a cycle time of 5 seconds. Output signal shall be
either O-10 volt or 4-20ma DC, linearly proportional to
the pulse duration. A red LED shall be included to indicate
that a signal is being received. The pulse width converter
shall be Healy-Ruff Series 6520.
f. Set Point Modules
- The set point modules will consist of a printed circuit
assembly which allows the input signal to be compared with a
set point. When the measured variable exceeds the 'on' set
point, the output of the module will 'turn on' to drive a
relay or other load. When the measured variable exceeds the
off set point the output of the module will turn off. The
set points will be adjusted by calibrated potentiometers so
that convenient settings can be made anywhere in the control
range. One module will be furnished for the control of each
pump point or each two level alarms. Set point modules
shall be Healy-Ruff Series 8300.
g. Simulation Circuit
A level simulation circuit shall be included complete with
auto-simulation selector switch. With switch in simulation,
levels shall be displayed in simulated conditions throughout
control range by manually adjusting a potentiometer. The
level shall be indicated on a 4-1/2 panel meter. The
indicator shall be calibrated O- ft. in ft. and tenths
--- of ft.
h. Span Offset Controller
The span offset controller shall be a complete solid state
unit contained on a PC board. Connections to the PC board
shall be through a 10 terminal screw type terminal strip.
The unit shall operate on 12 volts DC and not require a
bi-polar supply.
The unit shall accept either a 4-20ma, 0-10 volt or
resistance input.
Two different outputs shall be provided. One output shall
be 0-10 volts for driving a meter or additional boards.
MS4-8
The final output shall be either 4-20ma or 0-10 volts
depending on application.
Adjustments shall be provided on the board to allow an out-
put gain of 0-10 compared to the input. A second adjustment
shall allow for 'suppression' of 0-100% of the input.
In addition, a limit circuit shall be incorporated to limit
the output current or voltage to a predetermined value even
if the input signal exceeds this value.
When the output is used in the current output mode the out-
put shall be of the 'constant current' type unaffected by
changes in load resistance.
i. Three Pump Automatic Alternator
The automatic alternator shall consist of a solid state
printed circuit card that will change the starting sequence
of three pumps. The alternator shall operate the lead pump
when called for and alternate to place a standby pump in the
lead position after each pumping cycle. If the primary con-
trol requires more pumping capacity, then two or three pumps
shall operate simultaneously as called for.
j. A1 arm System
The alarm system shall provide a visual and audible means of
warning operating personnel of a system emergency. The
alarm system shall consist of alarm silencers and an alarm
horn.
Each alarm silencer shall be of a removable modular con-
struction mounted on a small zinc plated chassis approxi-
mately 3-1/2" wide and 4-1/2" high. Each alarm silencer
shall contain a red failure light and manual silencer
button. An emergency shall energize the pilot light and
the audible alarm. The audible alarm shall be silenced by
the push button, but the pilot failure light shall indicate
failure until the emergency condition has been corrected.
The failure light shall automatically reset when emergency
is over.
Multiple and recurring failures shall not interfere with one
another. The failure light shall be of the dim glow type.
An alarm silencer shall be furnished for each of the
following conditions:
MS4-9
(1) High level alarm elevated tank.
(2) Low level alarm elevated tank.
(3) High level alarm ground storage reservoir.
(4) Low level alarm ground storage reservoir.
k. Motor Control Center
The motor control center sections shall be furnished with
horizontal bus. The control center shall contain the
following:
1 - Main breaker, 600 amp
2 - Combination starter w/breaker, 100 HP
1 - Combination starter w/breaker, 60 HP
1 - Transformer, 480/120V, IOKVA
1 - Transformer breaker, 30 amp, 2 pole
1 - Lighting Panel 12 circuit
1. Circuit Breakers
Circuit breakers shall be of the molded case thermal
magnetic type. Each breaker shall have an external operator
mechanically interlocked with its associated door. Motor
starter breakers shall be sized so as to allow full load
starting and continuous operation of the pumps.
m. Circuit Breaker and Motor Starter
A circuit breaker and motor starter shall be supplied to
start each motor. The starters shall be full voltage across
the line type sized for the motor horsepowers as listed be-
low. Each starter shall be provided with necessary auxiliary
contacts for proper operation. Each starter shall be pro-
vided with a suitable control power transformer to run the
starter coil and all other auxiliary devices on 120 volts
power.
n. Electronic Timers
Time delay relays shall be of the solid state electronic
type with an adjustable delay of 0 to 3 minutes. The time
delay shall reset instantly to restart the complete timing
cycle when the pilot circuit is interrupted. The loads
contacts shall be electrically isolated from the timer.
o. Selector Switches
A three position oil tight selector switch shall be provided
for each pump. Each switch will be furnished with a name-
plate to clearly indicate switch position (Hand-Off-
Automat ic).
MS4-10
p. Elapsed Time Meters
Provide elapsed time meters for all pumps. Elapsed time
meters shall be Healy-Ruff Type 236 six digit non-reset type
graduated in hours and tenths.
q. Pilot Lights
All pilot lights shall be of the dim glow type which con-
tinuously glow at low brilliance to verify condition of bulb
and then burn at full brilliance when energized. Each pilot
light lens shall be color coded according to its function.
The dim glow feature shall be easily adjustable to compen-
sate for the surrounding light intensity.
r. Transmission Lines
Transmission lines shall be No. 22 or larger or leased
transmission lines as furnished by the telephone company.
A single metallic pair will be furnished.
4.05 HIGH SERVICE PUMP CONTROL
Transmitters and receivers shall be as specified above.
Provisions shall be made for manual or automatic operation
of each of the two high service pumps. In automatic opera-
tion, they shall be controlled in sequence from the elevated
storage tank level according to the following table:
Descending Level Rising Level
Elevation Function Elevation Function
645 Start Pump No. 1 640 Stop Pump No. 1
640 Start Pump No. 2 645 Stop Pump No. 2
635 Start Pump No. 3 650* Stop Pump No. 3
*All pumps must stop, positively, at elevation 650.
MS4-11
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION NO. 5
HIGH SERVICE PUMPS AND MOTORS
5.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
The equipment to be furnished under this section of the
specifications shall consist of three (3) vertical turbine
type high service pumps complete with electric motors as
specified herein.
5.02 GENERAL
All pumps furnished shall be selected and approved by the
Engineer. Pump suppliers desiring to furnish this equipment
shall address their proposals to the Successful Contractor for
this project, and such proposal shall be received by the Owner
at the time and place designated in the "Notice to Contractors"
for bids on the general contract for construction of the
500,O00-Gallon Ground Storage Tank and High Service Pump Sta-
tion. Proposals shall include performance curves and descrip-
tive data in sufficient detail to fully describe the pumping
equipment the supplier proposes to furnish. In addition,
suppliers will be expected to furnish each bidder whatever
information may be needed to allow him to determine his in-
stallation costs. Proposals shall be submitted in duplicate.
The Owner reserves the right, in selecting the units, to give
full weight to efficiency, type of pumps, and such other
characteristics as may in the opinion of the Engineer, be
material factors in the choice of the equipment best suited
to serve the Owner's interest.
After the Engineer has made a selection of the pumps and motors,
the successful bidder (General Contractor), shall enter into a
contract with the successful pump manufacturer. It is not the
intent of the Owner to enter into a direct contract with the
pump manufacturer.
After the pumps have been selected and manufactured, three (3)
copies of certified test curves shall be furnished for each of
the three (3) pumps. Testing shall conform to the provisions
of "Standards of Volume, Head, Power, and Efficiency Guarantees"
of the "Standards of Hydraulic Institute, Centrifugal Pump
Section".
5.03 HIGH SERVICE PUMPS
The High Service Pumps shall be furnished and installed on the
Ground Storage Tank as shown in the plans and shall conform to
the following specifications.
MS5-1
a. Pumping Conditions
The units shall be designed to operate satisfactorily
throughout the total range of head as indicated, and shall
....... ~" deliver the quantity shown for the rated head-capacity
condition; all as given in the following tabulation:
The pumps shall be designed for the following service
conditions.
Pump No. 1 Pump No. 2 & No. 3
Basic design capacity, gpm 700 1,O00
Basic design head, ft. 225 300
Pump shall al so meet, gpm 450 ---
ft. 300 ---
Minimum Shut off head, ft. 375 375
Minimum Operating head 200 275
Minimum Efficiency @ design % 80.0 80.0
Minimum Column Size, inches 8 8
Minimum Shaft Size, inches 1-1/2 1-1/2
Minimum Motor Size, HP 60 lO0
b. High Service Pumps
High service pumps shall be of the vertical turbine type,
open line shaft, with shaft direct connected to a vertical
hollow shaft induction motor. The weight of the revolving
parts of the pump including the unbalanced hydraulic thrust
bearing in the motor. Pumps shall be supported from a heavy
cast iron surface discharge head by means of a vertical
col umn.
c. Bowl Assembly
The pump bowl and suction bell shall be Class 30 Cast Iron.
The bowl shall have a minimum of two bearings above the
impeller. They shall be rubber and S.A.E. 660 bronze. The
impeller shall be SAE 40 bronze of the enclosed type,
dynamically balanced. Immediately below the impeller skirt
the bowl or suction bell shall have a rubber ring not less
than 1/4" thick. The rubber shall be mounted on a metal
ring to hold it in place. The impeller skirt shall be of
sufficient length that it can be lowered to this rubber
ring. The impeller shaft shall be A.I.S.I. 416 SS. Locking
devices shall be A.I.S.I. 303 SS.
d. Column and Shaft Assembly
The column shall be 8" I.D., having a minimum wall thickness
of 0.277 inch. Maximum length of any column section shall
be 10 feet. The upper end of the column pipe will flanged
to the pump head. The column section shall be threaded and
MS5-2
faced on both ends to insure proper alignment when butted
against the spiders in the sleeve type pipe couplings.
The bottom column section shall be properly adapted to
connect to the bowl assembly. Bronze spiders shall be
furnished between the column sectins for supporting the
lineshaft bearings. The lineshaft bearings shall be
fluted rubber. The lineshaft shall be C-1045 steel
with stainless steel shaft journals at each lineshaft
bearing. The shaft will be connected with steel threaded
sleeve type couplings.
e. Discharge Head
The pump head shall be Class 30 Cast Iron, having a 8" 125#
ANSI dicharge flange. The top of the head shall have a
machined register to fit the motor. It shall be of suffi-
cient strength to carry the complete weight of the pump and
motor and withstand the hydraulic loads normally imposed on
by the system. The stuffing box shall have the proper type
and amount of packing to prevent excessive leakage in the
head. The Head shall incude a tapped opening for draining
away the normal leakage from the packing. There shall be
a threaded coupling between the discharge head and electric
motor.
f. Electric Motor
The motor shall be Vertical Hollow Shaft high thrust type.
It shall be rated for continuous duty at 1,760 Max. RPM on
460 volt 3 phase 60 Hertz electrical current. The thrust
bearing shall be oil lubricated and shall have an AFBMA
minimum life rating of five years based on the maximum
thrust at any specified operating condition. The base shall
have a machined register to fit on the head. The motor
shall be NEMA Design B, with a maximum temperature rise of
80 degree C over 40 degree ambient, measured by resistance.
It shall be Type I weather protected and the nameplate
rating of the motor shall not be exceeded at any operating
condition. Motor shall have a 1.15 Service Factor.
Motors shall conform in all ways to the "Alternating Current
Motors" section of these specifications, No. MS-6.
g. Strainer
The suction bell shall be fitted with a Clip On Type basket
strainer of galvanized steel. The openings in the strainer
shall be at least four times the impeller eye area.
MS5-3
5.03 WORKMANSHIP AND GUARANTEE
The workmanship throughout shall be of the highest grade, and
all equipment furnished hereunder shall be guaranteed against
defects in workmanship or materials for a period of not less
than one year from the date it is placed in operation.
MS5-4
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION NO. 6
ALTERNATING CURRENT MOTORS
6.01 GENERAL
This section of the specifications is intended to establish a
standard for the electric motors, 5 H.P. and larger, used in
driving pumps and other items of mechanical equipment. Individ-
ual motor characteristics and requirements shall be as specified
in pertinent sections of the Mechanical Specifications.
The horsepower of motors indicated on the drawings or included
in the Mechanical Specifications are those estimated to be re-
quired. If the actual horsepower required for the equipment
proposed to be furnished differs from that shown or specified,
this matter must be matched to the driven equipment. All motors
shall be as manufactured by General Electric, Allis-Chalmers,
Fairbanks Morse, or approved equal.
All motors furnished under these specifications shall be selec-
ted or designed specifically for the service intended and shall
be so designed and constructed that they will be injuriously
affected by the conditions under which they will be required
to operate.
This specification also is intended to include and to cover
functional requirements, feature, and general construction of
vertical and/or horizontal 3 phase wound-rotor induction motors.
6.02 STANDARDS
Unless otherwise specified, all materials, workmanship and tests
shall be in conformity with the current standard rules, regula-
tions and specifications of the following authorities:
National Electircal Manufacturers Association
American Institute of Electrical Engineers
American Standards Association
6.03 TYPE
Motors shall be squirrel-caged and/or wound-rotor induction type
of suitable horsepower, speed and torque. Motors 1/2 horsepower
and larger shall be rated at voltage as shown on plans, and
shall be designed to operate from the designed 3 phase, 60
cycle power source. Motors less than 1/2 horsepower shall be
rated 115 volts, single phase and shall be designed for a 120
volt, 2 wire, single phase, 60 cycle supply.
MS6-1
6.04 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
a. Rating
The driven equipment manufacturer shall submit the
recommended horsepower, torque, duty cycle, speed,
enclosure, connected inertia and any other information
necessary to purchase and properly apply the motors under
full load requirements.
b. Design
Squirrel-cage type motors shall be suitable for across-the-
line full voltage starting and shall conform tothe latest
requirements of the NEMA Motor and Generator Standards,
where it is applicable.
Wound-rotor type motors shall be suitable for full-voltage
starting with normal secondary resistance across the slip
rings.
The name plate of every alternating current motor, rated
1/2 H.P. and larger, except polyphase wound-rotor shall be
marked with the caption "Code" followed by a letter to
show locked-rotor KVA per horsepower and also Design Letter.
Code and Design Letters shall be shown and based on the
latest issue of the National Electrical Code.
Dual-voltage motors which have different locked-rotor KVA
on the two voltages shall be marked with the code letter
for the voltage giving the highest locked-rotor KVA per
horsepower.
c. Power Factory and Efficiency
Power factory and efficiency at rated speed, voltage and
frequency shall be as high as consistent with good engineer-
ing practices, based on the duty cycle of the motor.
d. Torque Requirements
The starting current and torque values shall be Design Bar
matched to the driven equipment in accordance with the
applicable ASA and NEMA Standards.
e. Horsepower and Running Characteristics
Each motor shall be rated for continuous duty. Motors shall
deliver their rated horsepower continuously without injury
when the voltage at the terminals is ten per cent (10%)
above or below rated voltage. The temperature rise when
operating continuously at rated horsepower shall not exceed
those specified by NEMA for the particular enclosures and
class of insulation used.
MS6-2
The horsepower rating of the motor shall be determined
without taking advantage of the motor service factor (if
any).
f. Analysis of Duty Cycle
Motors shall be selected or designed for an operating
temperature that will assure a reasonable life for the
motor insulation.
The hottest spot temperature shall be determined by adding
to the temperature rise of the motor (rise by resistance
method) the maximum ambient condition to be encountered and
the hottest spot allowance for the proper motor enclosure.
The ambient conditions necessary for proper design shall be
submitted to the motor manufacturer giving temperature,
humidity and other vital information such as dirt, gases,
dust, etc., by the driven equipment manufacturer. In case
of a number of duty cycles for the motor, the operating
temperatures sha?l be determined for each cycle, and the
highest temperature used for the selection or design of the
motor. If the duty cycle involves frequent starts or stops,
the rise in stator winding temperature immediately after
shutdown shall not exceed the running temperature by more
than 15°C.
6.05 CONSTRUCTION
a. Frame
All integral horsepower motor frames shall be constructed
of fine grained, heavy-wall cast iron construction with the
feet cast integral to make alignment easy and permanent.
All fan cooled and explosion-proof motors shall be the same
except with integrally cast ribs, and the explosion-proof
shall have long rabbet, close tolerance, metal to metal fits
conforming to Underwriter's Standards and must carry Under-
writer's label.
Wound-rotor motor frames and end shields shall be cast-iron
to heavy fabricated steel of such design and ample propor-
tions to permanently and rigidly hold all motor components
in proper position and provide protection.
b. End Brackets
The motor brackets shall be constructed of fine grained,
heavy-wall cast iron. Both brackets shall be attached to
the frame by means of machine cap screws on both ends.
Through bolts are not acceptable except on fraction H.P.
motors. Brackets for totally enclosed fan-cooled and
explosion-proof motors shall be similar except with
integrally cast cooling fins. Totally enclosed motors
MS6-3
shall be provided with an air by-pass to permit the motor
to breathe around the bearing rather than through it.
Brackets shall be rotable 360 degrees in 60 or 90 degree
steps.
c. Stator Cores
Stator cores shall consist of laminations of high grade
non-aging, annealed, electrical silicon steel. The lamina-
tions shall be insulated in order to reduce eddy current
losses to a minimum. The laminations shall be held firmly
together by means of compression between end rings. During
assembly, the laminations shall be carefully inspected to
see that only clean-cut punchings free from burrs are used.
d. Stator Winding and Insulation
The stator wire must have coil groups wound in series to
reduce the n~nber of joints to a minimum. Slot cells must
be of heavy grade Mylar for Class Amotors and receive a
final treatment of at least two (2) dips and bakes in a
thermosetting insulating varnish fortified with water repel-
ling silicone. For special applications requiring a premium
insulated motor, they shall use non-hygroscopic materials
throughout and be vacuum impregnated with a resilient expoxy
compound and rated 60 degree C. rise, Class B.
Windings on wound-rotor motors shall be random or form-
wound, insulated and braced to give long and satisfactory
operating life under the conditions described. Winding and
insulating materials shall be of one or more of the follow-
ing as dictated by the design: silicone rubber, polyester
film, synthetic varnish, or glass cloth.
e. Rotors
All squirrel cage motor rotors for designs A, B, and C in
NEMA frame sizes shall have the rotor bars, resistance rings,
and fan blades pressure cast of aluminum alloy or copper.
The rotor cores shall be shrunk on or pressed on with a key.
The rotor slots shall be skewed to provide smooth, quiet
operation. All rotors shall be dynamically balanced to
minimize vibration, noise and bearing wear and shall have
a direction of rotation as required by the driven equipment.
The rotor-windings of wound-rotor motors shall be insulated
and adequately retained to withstand the electrical and
mechanical stresses of operation. The rotor shall be de-
signed to withstand operation at a speed 25% above normal
rated speed.
MS6-4
f. Shafts
The rotor shafts shall be made of high grade steel, finished
all over and of ample size to drive the unit of equipment to
which they will be connected. The end of the shaft opposite
the driving end for all integral horsepower motors shall be
centered and accessible for taking speed readings with a
portable tachometer.
g. Bearings
All motors of NEMA Frame 505 and below, unless otherwise
specified by the driven equipment manufacturer or Consulting
Engineer for special application requirements, shall be pro-
vided with provision relief or pre-lubricated ball bearings.
Additional protection shall be provided, on totally enclosed
motors, to prevent lubricant entering windings, such as a
rotating flinger or overflow reservoir. Motors above NEMA
Frame 505 shall have sleeve bearings when available for the
application service conditions and enclosures specified.
Sleeve bearings shall be of the oil ring type and shall be
provided with suitable slingers, baffles, and seals so that
the lubricant will not leak along the shaft or be thrown
into the windings.
Motors with sleeve bearings shall be provided with four (4)
access holes in each end shield, 90° apart, opposite the air
gap, to permit insertion or an air gap or feeder gage
between the rotor and the stator and for checking bearing
wear. They shall also be provided with a plastic lens or
oil level indication on each bearing. Horizontal motors
shall be provided with approximately 1/2" mesh screen on
all openings in the end shields or brackets above the hori-
zontal center line. Horizontal motors, equipped with sleeve
bearings and end shields or self-contained bearing brackets
above NEMA 505 Frame size shall have horizontal split end
shield or bracket, bearing housing and bearing on the
coupling end, to permit removing or rotor and bearings
without removing motor couplings, except that belted motors
shall have solid and shields on both ends.
h. Ventilation
All drip-proof motors in frames through 326 inclusive shall
be self ventilated. Cooling of non-ventilated motors shall
be accomplished entirely by heat transfer through frame and
brackets. Fan-cooled motors shall use an external fan of
molded reinforced glass or aluminum except that large 3600
R.P.M. motors shall use stainless steel or bronze. The
external fan shall be protectfed by a heavy cast iron hood.
Uni-directional shaft mounted fans shall be coordinated
with direction of rotation of driven equipment.
MS6-5
i. Enclosure
Enclosures shall be drip-proof for indoor installation,
weather-protected for outdoor installation and explosion-
proof or totally enclosed where required.
j. Heaters
Electric heaters shall be furnished for all outdoor pump
motors over 5 H.P. in size.
k. Conduit Box
All conduit boxes shall be capable of rotating 360 degrees
in 90 degree stops. Drip-proof motors shall have pressed
steel boxes or cast iron and totally enclosed and explosion
motors shall have cast iron boxes. All leads entering the
conduit box shall be numbered and held in place with neo-
prene lead positioning gasket. The conduit entrances shall
be so located that when the conduit entrance is from below,
the conduit will clear the motor base without bending. In-
sulated terminal leads shall be brought out of the stator
frame and shall be provided with lugs for connections to
the motor supply wiring. Screw type compression terminal
lugs shall also be furnished for the incoming service cable.
The opening in the motor frame through which the winding
terminal leads pass, shall be rounded off and smoothly
finished, or provided with a grommet.
1. Nameplates
All motors shall have stainless steel nameplates showing,
in addition to the standard information, the wiring diagram
and manufacturer's number of the front and rear bearings.
6.06 MACHINE WORK
Machine work shall be accurate, of high quality and in con-
formity with approved standard practice. Any parts subject
to wear or likely to require removal shall be made to comply
with definite tolerance such as will result in making those
parts readily removable and replaceable with a minimum of work
in the field.
All metal, covers, screws, bolts, nuts, springs, studs, and
other miscellaneous fittings shall be of an approved corrosion
resistance material and finish where subject to corrosive atmos-
pheres.
6.07 PAINTING AND SHIPPING
Outer surface of frame shall be filled where necessary and
primed, and then finished with one or more coats of suitable
paint as required to give a smooth durable finish.
MS6-6
Apparatus shall be substantially crated and otherwise well
protected for Shipment. Special care shall be taken to
prevent exposure of windings and connections to weather
during shipment.
6.08 FACTORY TESTS
Each motor shall be given a routine test in accordance with
NEMA Standards, unless otherwise specified. The Purchaser and/
or the Consulting Engineer reserve the right to witness the
test, if so designated in Mechanical Specifications.
6.09 PROPOSAL DATA
The following information shall be included in the Bid Proposal,
for motors over 5 H.P. in size, to be furnished under these
specifications.
Complete description, specifications and dimension sheet showing
the arrangement and dimensions.
Technical data for each motor:
Application
Manufacturer
Frame Number lype or Class
Code Letter Design Letter
Rating - Horsepower , voltage
phases , Cycles , full load
RPM (wound rotor volts,
amperes ).
Full load current amperes.
Locked rotor current amperes.
Starting torque (% of full load} %
Full load torque lbs./ft.
Breakdown torque (% of full load} %
Efficiency Full Load %
3/4 Load %
1/2 Load %
Insulation Type
Class
Temperature Rise
Enclosure
Net Weight lbs.
Wr2 lb./ft.2
Type of Bearings
Service Factor
Noise Level in decibels
Heaters kW
volts
MS6-7
6.10 DRAWINGS
The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, for approval, certified prints of
each motor outline drawing showing the arrangement and dimen-
sions as soon as possible after the award of the order. Copies
of final approved drawings shall be furnished in accordance with
requirements set forth in other sections of the contract docu-
ments.
6.11 INSTALLATION
Motors connected to mechanical equipment (fans, pumps, system
equipment, valves, etc.) except as may be otherwise specifically
stated in the Mechanical Specifications, shall be set in place,
aligned and bolted down by the associted CONTRACTOR. The Elec-
trical Contractor will install all equipment and wiring for the
power and control circuits for all motors included in these
specifications. Following a notice by the ENGINEER that the
equipment is ready for operation, the associated CONTRACTOR
shall flush the bearings with oil and fill with proper kind and
amount, before the equipment is placed in service. (Ball bear-
ing motors are excepted).
MS6-8
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS NO. 7
STRUCTURAL STEEL
7.01 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools,
equipment, and perform all work and services necessary for or
incidental to the furnishing and erection, complete, of all
structural steel, complete with accessories as shown on
drawings as specified, in accordance with provision of the
Contract Documents, and completely coordinated with work of
all other trades.
B. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and
install all supplementary or miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
C. Field verify all dimensions before fabricating steels.
7.02 QUALITY STANDARDS
Comply with AISC "Specifications for the design, fabrication, and
Erection of Structural Steel for Building" including
"Commentary"; AWS "Structural Welding Code"; comply with
applicable provisions except as other indicated.
7.03 SUBMITTALS
Submit shop and erection drawings for approval. Show all shop
and erection details including cuts, copes, connections, holes
and welds.
7.04 MATERIALS
A. Steel: ASTM A36
B. Bolts: ASTM A325
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307
7.05 ERECTION
Erect structural steel in compliance with A.I.S.C. Specifica-
tions. Use erection equipment suitable and safe for workmen.
7.06 SHOP PAINTING
Paint structural work except members or portions of members
embedded in concrete or mortar or covered with fireproofing. Do
not paint contact areas to be welded or bolted. Clean steel free
MS7-1
of loose mill scale, rust oil, and grease. Apply prime paint to
provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
7.07 CLEAN UP
Touch-up prime paint after erection. Clean field welds, bolted
connections, and abraded areas and apply same type paint as used
in shop.
MS7-2
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS No. 8
MISCELLANEOUS METALS
8.01 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools,
equipment, and perform all work and services necessary for or
incidental to the furnishing and installation complete, of
miscellaneous metals as shown on drawings as specified, in
accordance with provision of the Contract Documents, and
completely coordinated with work of all other trades.
B. Although such work is not specifically shown or specified,
furnish and install all supplementary of miscellaneous items,
appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a
sound, secure and complete installation.
C. Custom fabricated metal items and certain manufactured units
not otherwise indicated to be supplied under work of other
sections within this specification, shall be furnished under
this section. A general reference guide is included for
Contractor's convenience. It is not intended to be a
complete listing of all miscellaneous metals items. It is
Contractor's responsibility to verify all field conditions
prior to fabrication.
8.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Materials and operations to comply with latest edition of codes
and standards listed:
A.A.M.A. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association.
A.H.D.G.A. American Hot Dip Galvanizers Assocation.
A.I.S.C. American Institute of Steel Construction
A.S.T.M. American Society for Testing and Materials
A.W.S. American Welding Society
F.S. Federal Specifications.
8.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of
assemblies. Include plans and elevations at minimum of
1-inch to 12-inch scale, and include details of sections and
connections at a minimum 3-inch to 12-inch scale. Show
anchorage and accessory items.
B. Submit detailed shop drawings and engineering design
calculations for all components of factory manufactured
stairs and landings with design live loads noted on the shop
drawings.
MS8-1
C. Provide finish samples when requested by Engineer.
8.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Protect stored items from damage by elements. Schedule delivery
to avoid unnecessary on-site storage.
8.05 JOB CONDITIONS
Verify suitability of substrate to accept installation. Provide
sleeves, embedded anchors, and other built-in items in time for
installation; of pay costs of cutting-in of items later and
grouting.
8.06 MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. Following references provide minimum standards as they apply
to specific items:
Structural Steel: ASTM A-36, A-440, A-501, A-575 or Al08.
Cast Steel: ASTM A-27, Grade 65-35; and A-148, Grade 80-50.
Steel Forgings: ASTM A-235, and A-237.
Rivet steel: ASTM A-502
Bolts: ASTM A-307, A-325, A-354.
Filler Metal: AWS Standards.
Cast Iron: ASTM A-48, Class 30, min. 30,000 psi tensile.
Malleable Iron: ASTM A-47, and A-197.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A-53.
Galvanizing: ASTM A-123, A-386d, or A-525.
Copper: ASTM B-370 or B-248.
Brass: ASTM B-36.
Aluminum: ASTM B-308 for particular alloy in standard shapes
and extrusions, B-26 for castings.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A-494 and A-276, Type 302.
B. Masonry Anchorage Devices: expansion shields complying with
F. S. FF-S-325, as follows: Lead expansion shields for ma-
chine screws and bolts 1/4 in. and smaller; head-out embedded
nut type, single unit class, Group I, Type 1, Class 2. Bolt
anchor expansion shields for lag bolts: zinc-alloy, long
shield anchors class, Group II, Type 1, Class 1. Bolt anchor
expansion shields for bolts: closed-end bottom bearing
class, Group II, Type 2, Class 1.
C. Fasteners: Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use
where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type,
grade, and class required.
Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head ASTM A-307, Grade
Lag Bolts: Square head type, F.S. FF-B-561.
MS8-2
Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, F.S. FF-S-92.
Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, F.S. FF-S-111.
Plain Washers: Round, Carbon steel, F.S. FF-W-92
Lock Washers: Helical spring carbon steel, F.S.- FF-W
D. Metal primer paint: Red lead mixed pigment, alkyd varnish,
linseed oil paint, F.S. TT-P-86, Type II; or red lead iron
oxide, raw linseed oil, alkyd paint, SSPC Paint A-64; or
basic lead silico chromate base iron oxide, linseed oil,
alkyd paint, F.S. T-P-615, Type II. Use primer compatible
with finish coats of paint. Coordinate selection of metal
primer with finish paint requirements otherwise specified.
E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for
regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, complying with Mil.
Spec. MIL-P-21035 (Ships), Z.R.C. by Sealube Co., or
equivalent.
8.07 FABRICATION
Form materials to shapes indicated with straight lines, sharp
angles, and smooth curves. Drill or punch holes and smooth
edges. Weld permanent shop connections. All welds continuous
filler type. Grind smooth welds that will be exposed. Conceal
fastenings where practicable. Punch or drill for temporary field
connections and for attachment of work by other trades.
Fabricate work in shop in as large assemblies as practicable.
Meet requirements specified unter Structural Steel for
fabricating items of structural nature or use. Quality welding
processes and welding operators in accord with AWS "Standard
Qualification Procedure".
8.08 SHOP PAINTING
A. Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before
applying shop coat. Clean off heavy rust and loose mill
scale in accord with SSPC SP-2 "Hand Tool Cleaning", or SSPC
SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning", or SSPC SP-7 "Brush-Off Blast
Cleaning." Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in
accord with SSPC SP-1 "Solvent Cleaning."
B. Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spray on
primer in accord with manufacturer's instructions, at a rate
to provide uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. Use
painting methods which will result in full coverage of
joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
C. Apply one (1) shop applied primer coat to all ferrous metal
not indicated to be set in or receive concrete. Thoroughly
MS8-3
remove foreign matter prior to shop priming.
D. Apply two (2) shop coats to ferrous metals that will be
inaccessible after erection.
E. Galvanize all items set in, or on exterior surface.
F. Whenever dissimilar metals come in contact with each other,
or metal or aluminum is anchored to or in contact with
masonry at the surfaces of contact, provide a dissimilar
metal protection coating, Tneme-Tar 413, by Tnemec, or other
approved type protection.
G. Retouch, in field, any scraped, abraded, and unpainted
surfaces. Painting to be as specified for shop coats.
Painting specified here does not count as a coat for finish
painting.
H. Do not shop paint galvanized metal, stainless steel,
aluminum, copper, brass, or bronze, unless specifically
indicated.
8.09 INSTALLATION
A. Set metal work level, true to line, and plumb.
B. Shim and grout as necessary. Weld field connections and
grind smooth. Where practicable, conceal fastenings.
C. Secure metal to wood with lag screws, of adequate size, with
appropriate washers.
D. Secure metal to concrete with enbedded anchors, setting
compounds, caulking and sleeves, or setting grout. Use
expansion bolts, toggle bolts, or screws for light duty
service only.
E. Meet requirements specified for structural steel for erecting
items of structural nature or use.
F. Do not field splice fabricated items unless items exceed
standard shipping length or change of direction requires
splicing. Do not use mechanical splicing by means of wedges
with full welding.
G. Provide each fabricated item complete with attachment devices
as indicated or as required to install.
MS8-4
8.10 SCHEDULE
Following is a general listing of items furnished under this
section. Contractor to verify completeness. Supply items as
required to complete construction and installation.
A. Anchorage Accessories: Generally, this includes anchorage
items required to secure wood to wood, wood to steel, wood [o
masonry, steel to masonry, steel to steel or steel to other
metals, or miscellaneous flashing as indicated, herein
specified or required.
B. Ladders: Fabricate of galvanized steel with minimum side
rail dimension of 1/2 inch X 2 inches, rungs of minimum 7/8
inch round or share bars. Punch rungs through side rails and
weld. Provide brackets sized to support concentrated moving
loan of 200 pounds, and to provide minimum clearance from
centerline of rung to wall or obstruction of 7 inches.
Minimum ladder width 16 inches between side rails with
maximum fund spacing of 12 inches o.c. Grind all rough
surfaces smooth. Provide ladders fabricated as indicated.
MS8-5
ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS NO.1
CONCRETE
1.O1 GENERAL
All requirements of the section Concrete for Structures are
included as a part of this specification.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
The work required under this section consists of all items
necessary to complete the sealing of concrete floors, landings,
stair surfaces indicated in the drawings, and provision for
vapor barrier under slabs.
1.03 SEALER AND APPLICATION
a. Surfaces shall be cured, sealed, hardened, and dustproofed
with Clear Seal, manufactured by A. C. Horn Company, or
approved equal, in exact accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. Clear Seal shall be spray applied to concrete
surfaces within approximately 1/2 hour after completion of
finishing operations and/or immediately after the disappear-
ance of the "sheen" of surface moisture. Coat surfaces
uniformly leaving no pinholes or gaps, at a rate not to
exceed 250 square feet per gallon.
b. Clear Seal shall be delivered to the job site in the manu-
facturer's original, sealed and unopened containers. It
shall be guaranteed to comply with the provisions of ASTM
Specification C-309, requiring the retentions of 95% or
more of the mixing water in concrete for 7 days, as proof
of its effectiveness to properly cure concrete.
c. After the work of all other construction trades is com-
pleted, apply one additional coat of Clear Seal by spray
or brush at a rate not to exceed 250 square feet per gallon
and in exact accordance with the manufacturer's instruction.
1.04 VAPOR BARRIER
a. Material
Material shall be polyethylene sheet minimum thickness
6 mil with joint tape according to manufacturer's recom-
mendation.
ASl-1
b. Installation
Polyethylene shall be placed over sand fill prior to
placement of reinforcement and carried to bottom of
grade beam on monolithic beam and slab. Joints shall
be i~pp~c) ~" ,,n side and 12" on end joints, tape sealed
continuously and any perforations tape sealed.
AS1-2
ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS NO. 2
MASONRY WORK
2.01 SCOPE OF WORK
The work required under this section consists of all masonry
work and related items necessary to complete the work indicated
on drawings and described in specifications.
2.02 SUBSTITUTIONS
The materials or products specified herein and indicated on
drawings by trade names, manufacturer's name or catalogue number
shall be provided as specified. Substitutions will not be per-
mitted, except as described in the special condition of this
specification.
2.03 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS AND INDUSTRY SPECIFICATIONS
Any material or operation specified by reference to the
published specifications of a manufacturer, The American Society
for Testing and Materials (ASTM), National Concrete Masonry
ASsociation (NCMA), or other published standards, shall comply
with the requirements of the current specification or standard
listed. In the case of a conflict between the referenced speci-
fication and the project specifications, the project specifica-
tions shall govern. In case of conflicts between the referenced
specifications or standards, the one having the more stringent
requirements shall govern.
The Contractor, if requested, shall furnish an affidavit from
the manufacturer, certifying that the materials or products
delivered to the job meet the requirements specified. However,
such certification shall not relieve the Contractor from the
responsibility of complying with any added requirements speci-
fied herein.
2.04 SAMPLE MATERIALS
Prior to installation, submit to the Engineer for approval,
individual samples showing the extreme variations in color and
texture, of facing brick and unglazed concrete masonry units.
In addition, submit to the Engineer for approval, prior to
installation, two samples of steel reinforcement for masonry
joints, metal anchors and ties. Samples of other materials to
be used shall be provided if requested.
AS2-1
2.05 MASONRY MATERIALS
a. Facing Brick
Brick shall be Type (FBS) - conforming to ASTM Specification
C-216-66. Use Grade SW for brick in contact with earth and
Grade MW elsewhere. Brick shall have dimensions of 2-1/4" X
3-5/8" X 7-5/8". Colors and textures shall be similar to
Blend 36 Velour as manufactured by Acme Brick Company.
b. Concrete Masonry Units
Units shall conform to the applicable ASTM Specifications
with additional requirements as specified: C145-59 for
solid load-bearing units and C90-59 for hollow load-bearing
units. Use solid load-bearing-units at locations indicated
on drawings. Use hollow load-bearing type units for parti-
tions, walls, and all other locations where concrete masonry
units are indicated on drawings, Grade A units shall be used.
(1) Units shall be in modular sizes. Corner units shall
have square external corners; except interior external
corners shall have bullnose corners. Provide full
units at windows, bond beam units and other special
units as necessary for the conditions shown. Units
shall not contain iron spots or other substances that
will stain plaster or paint.
c. Concrete Masonry Lintels
Except where steel or precast lintels are indicated, lin-
tels in concrete masonry unit walls and partitions shall be
fabricated of load-bearing masonry units of approved shapes
and sizes. Unless otherwise indicated or approved, lintels
shall be built in place and the jointing and texture of
lintel units shall match the adjacent wall units.
d. Anchors and Ties
Anchors and ties shall be of zinc-coated steel. Except for
steel wire, zinc-coating shall conform to ASTM Specification
A153-60. Steel wire shall be zinc-coated in accordance with
ASTM Specification Al16-57 for Class 2 coating. The extent
and location of anchors and ties shall be as indicated on
the drawings and as hereinafter specified under the laying
requirements for the various items of masonry.
AS2-2
(1) Wire Ties
Wire ties not specified otherwise shall be of not
lighter than l0 gauge {0.1350 inch) zinc-coated steel
wire. All ties shall be zee-shaped or looped at both
ends.
(2) Corrugated or Crimped Ties
Corrugated or crimped ties shall be not less than 7/8
inch wide and of not less than 16 gauge (0.0598 inch)
zinc-coated sheet steel and not less than 6 inches long.
At the Contractor's option, two l0 guage (0.1350 inch)
diameter zinc-coated steel wire ties may be used in
lieu of each zinc-coated sheet steel wire specified.
(3) Rigid Steel Anchors
Rigid Steel Anchors shall be of not less than 1 inch
by 1/4 inch by 24 inch long zinc-coated steel with each
end turned up not less than 2 inches.
e. Joint Reinforcement
Steel reinforcement for use in horizontal bed joints of con-
crete masonry units, and other locations as hereinafter
specified shall be prefabricated type formed of zinc-coated
cold drawn steel wire conforming to ASTM Specification
Al16-57 for class 2 coating. Side wires shall be formed
of No. 9 gauge or larger and be deformed; cross rods shall
be of 12 gauge or larger, smooth or deformed wire, butt
welded to side wires in the same plane at contact points.
Provide special formed pieces at corners and intersections
of walls or partitions. Reinforcing shall be of proper
widths for the partition and wall thicknesses shown.
Reinforcing shall be similar to "Dur-O-Wall" as manufactured
by Dur-O-Wal Company.
f. Expansion or Control Joint Filler Strips
Strips shall be of natural or synthetic rubber. They shall
be of shapes indicated on drawings. Strips shall be resis-
tant to oils and solvents and shall meet the flexture test
after being exposed to a temperature of minus 40 degrees
Farenheit, as required by ASTM Specification D736-54T.
2.06 MORTAR MATERIALS
a. Portland Cement
Cement shall conform to ASTM Specification C150-61, Type l,
cement shall be gray.
AS2-3
b. Lime
Hydrated Lime shall be Type S or Type N, conforming to ASTM
Specification C207-49. Quicklime shall conform to ASTM
Specification C5-59; it shall be slaked in accordance with
the manufacturer's directions.
c. Sand
Sand shall conform to ASTM Specification C144-62T.
d. Mixing Water .
Water shall be clean and potable.
e. Waterproofing Admixtures
Waterproofing admixture shall be incorporated in mortar
used in exterior walls. Mix the admixture in accordance
with the manufacturer's directions.
2.07 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
Store materials under cover in a dry place and in a manner to
prevent damage or intrusion of foreign matter. During freezing
weather protect all masonry units with tarpaulins or other suit-
able material. Store concrete masonry units under covers that
will permit circulation o'f air ~.1 ?r~ve-,t .-~l)..ive moisture
absorption. Store cement and lime in watertight sheds with
elevated floors. Protect reinforcement from the elements;
immediatedy before placing, reinforcement shall be free from
loose rust, ice or other foreign coatings that will destroy or
reduce the bond. Concrete masonry units shall be protected
against wetting prior to use.
2.08 TYPES OF MORTAR
Mortar for all unit masonry not specified otherwise. Mortar
shall be mixed in the proportions of 1 part portland cement, 1
part hydrated lime and 6 parts of sand by volume.
2.09 MIXING MORTAR
Mix all cementitious materials and sand in a mechanical batch
mixer for a minimum of 5 minutes. Adjust the consistency of
the mortar to the satisfaction of the mason but add only as much
water as is compatible with convenience in using the mortar. If
the mortar begins to stiffen from evaporation or from absorption
of a part of the mixing water, retemper the mortar immediately
by adding water, and remix the mortar. All mortar shall be used
within 2-1/2 hours of the initial mixing. It shall not be used
after it has begun to set.
AS2-4
2.10 PRECAUTIONS AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
a. Do not lay masonry when the temperature of the outlet air
is below 40 degree F. unless suitable means as approved by
the Engineer are provided to heat materials, protect work
from cold and frost and insure that mortar will harden with-
out freezing. (No anti-freeze ingredient shall be used in
the mortar).
b. Protect facing material against staining, and keep tops of
walls covered with non-staining waterproof coverings when
work is not in progress. When work is resumed, top surface
of work shall be cleaned on all loose mortar and, in drying
weather thoroughly wet, except for concrete masonry units.
c. Brick having absorption rates more than 0.025 oz. per square
inch per minute shall be wetted sufficiently so that the
rate of absorption when laid does not exceed this amount.
All units shall be free from water adhering to their sur-
faces when they are laid in the wall. Do not wet concrete
masonry units.
d. Where fresh masonry joins masonry that is partially set,
clean the exposed surface of the set masonry and wet it
lightly so as to obtain the best possible bond with the new
work. Remove all loose brick and mortar. If it is neces-
sary to "stop off" a horizontal run of masonry, this shall
be done by racking back one-half brick length in each course.
(Toothing will not be permitted).
e. Consult with other trades and make provisions that will
permit the installation of their work in a manner to avoid
cutting and patching. Build in work specified under other
Sections, as necessary, and as the work progresses.
Set steel lintels in beds of mortar. Fill spaces around
jambs and heads of metal door bucks and frames, solidly with
mortar. (Build-in anchors and clips for aluminum windows).
2.11 LAYING BRICK
a. Lay brick plumb, level and true to line in full beds of
mortar. Lay brick in running bond. Bond of brick in
exterior walls shall be without header courses and anchored
to back-up with metal ties spaced not over 24 inches apart
horizontally and in every sixth course vertically. Head
joints shall be buttered and shoved to insure full mortar
joints.
b. Make joints in brickwork uniform and not more than 3/8 inch
wide. After becoming "thumb-print" hard, joints exposed
shall be tooled concave with a round or other suitable
AS2-5
jointer that is slightly larger than the width of the mortar
joint. Close all cracks and crevices. Rake other joints as
necessary to permit caulking shown.
c. Where spandrel or other flashing or waterproofing turns out
and terminates in horizontal mortar joints and over top of
steel lintels or shelf angles, provide weep holes in the
mortar joint to permit water to drain from the wall. Space
weep holes approximately 24 inches apart horizontally.
d. Build in flashings, flashing blocks, access panels and other
work at locations indicated on drawings.
2.12 LAYING CONCRETE MASONRY
a. Requirements Applicable to Units of All Materials
Set units plumb and true to line. All units shall be layed
with level horizontal joints. Except where specified or
shown otherwise, units shall be laid in "running bond".
(1) Where electric conduit, outlet and switch boxes occur,
grind and cut units before building-in services.
Coordinate work with Electrical Sub-contractor.
Cutting of all units exposed in finished work shall
be done with an approved type of power saw.
(2) Continuous joint reinforcement specified shall be laid
in each second horizontal joint of concrete masonry
unit walls and partitions.
(3) Bond each course of all units at corners in a masonry
bond and at intersections with joint reinforcement
spaced vertically not exceeding 16 inches.
(4) Partitions of all units that abut exterior walls, shall
be anchored thereto once every 16 inches in height.
Anchors shall be 1/8 by l-l/4 inch zinc-coated steel
anchors with ends turned up 2 inches and extending 4
inches into wall and not less than 8 inches onto parti-
tions.
(5) Joints of interior concrete masonry units that will be
exposed or painted shall be cut flush and tooled when
thumbprint hard to form a concave joint. Joints of
units exposed on interior of load-bearing walls shall
be cut flush and tooled to form a concave joint.
Joints in surfaces to be plastered, shall be cut flush.
b. Concrete Masonry Units
The following additional requirements are applicable only
to laying concrete masonry units:
AS2-6
(1) Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar
coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells except
that webs also shall be bedded in starting course on
.... solid foundation walls and around cells that are to be
reinforced or filled with grout. Lay solid units with
full head and bed joints. Make joints uniform, approxi-
mately 3/8 inch thick unless indicated otherwise.
(2) Provide continuous vertical control joints in concrete
masonry unit walls and partitions at locations indi-
cated on drawings. Control joints on exposed to view
faces of interior wall and partitions shall be raked to
a depth of 3/8 inch and neatly tooled square and smooth.
(3) Where cast-in-place lintels are used in concrete
masonry unit partitions, they shall be formed in place
with special shaped bond-beam or lintel units as here-
inbefore specified. Lintels shall be reinforced as de-
tailed and filled with 2500 p.s.i, concrete. Lintels
shall have a minimum of 8 inch bearing at ends. Pro-
vide temporary support under lintels as necessary.
2.14 POINTING AND CLEANING MASONRY
a. Point all holes in exposed masonry. Cut out defective
joints and repoint them with mortar.
b. All exposed masonry shall be cleaned thoroughly. Before
applying any cleaning agent to the entire wall, it shall
be applied to a sample wall area of approximately 20 square
feet in a location approved by the Engineer. No further
cleaning work shall proceed until the sample area has been
approved by the Engineer, after which time the same cleaning
materials and methods shall be used on the remaining wall
area. If stiff brushes and water do not suffice, the sur-
face of unglazed clay masonry, on which no green efflores-
cence appears, shall be thoroughly wetted with clear water
and then scrubbed with a solution of not more than 1 part
hydrochloric (muriatic) acid to 9 parts water, followed
immediately by a thorough rinsing with clear water. If the
masonry is cleaned with an acid solution, all sash, metal
lintels, louvers and other corrodible parts shall be thor-
oughly protected. Green efflorescence shall be removed in
accordance with the unit masonry product manufacturer's
recommendation.
c. Acid solutions shall not be used for cleaning concrete
masonry units. Metal cleaning tools and brushes, or abra-
sive powders shall not be used.
AS2-7
d. Concrete masonry units shall have all loose mortar cleaned
off and all stains removed.
e. Upon completion of all masonry work, remove from site all
rubbish, debris, excess materials, scaffolding or other
equipment used for this part of the work.
AS2-8
ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATION NO. 4
ROOFING AND SHEET METAL
4.01 SCOPE OF WORK
The work required under this section consist of all roofing,
sheet metal, roof insulation and related items necessary to
complete the work indicated on drawings and described in
specifications.
4.02 SUBSTITUTIONS
The materials or products specified herein and indicated on
drawings by trade name, manufacturer's name or catalogue number
shall be provided as specified. Substitutions will not be per-
mitted, except as described in the Special Conditions of this
specification.
4.03 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARD AND INDUSTRY SPECIFICATIONS
Any material or operation specified by reference to the pub-
lished specifications of a manufacturer, The American Society
for Testing and Materials, and other published standard, shall
comply with the requirements of the current specification or
standard listed. In case of a conflict between the referenced
specification and these project specifications, these project
specifications shall govern. The CONTRACTOR, if requested,
shall furnish an affidavit from the manufacturer, certifying
that the materials or product delivered to the job meets the
requirements specified.
4.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
a. Proper Surfaces
Surfaces to which roofing and sheet metal are to be applied
shall be even, smooth, sound, thoroughly clean and dry and
free from all defects that might affect the application.
Report any unsatisfactory surfaces to ENGINEER.
b. Materials To Be Built-In
Materials furnished under this section which are to be
built-in by other trades shall be delivered to the site in
time to avoid delays to construction progress.
c. Accessories
All accessories or other items essential to the completeness
of the sheet-metal installation, though not specifically
shown or specified, shall be provided. All such items,
AS4-1
unless otherwise shown on the drawings or specified, shall
be of the same kind of material as the item to which
applied. Nails, screws, and bolts shall be of the types
best suited for the purpose intended, and shall be of a
composition that is compatible with the metal to which it
will contact.
d. Dissimilar Materials
Where sheet metal abuts or members into adjacent dissimilar
materials, the juncture shall be executed in a manner that
will prevent electrolysis between the two materials.
e. Workmanship
Except as otherwise shown on drawings or specified, the
workmanship of sheet metal work, method of forming joints,
anchoring, cleating, provisions for expansion, etc., shall
conform to the standard detail and recommendations of the
American Society for Testing and Materials.
4.05 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
General
The type and locations of the various kinds, gauges, thickness
and finish of sheet metal to be used is specified hereinafter
under the individual items; however, where sheet metal is
indicated on drawings and kind or type of metal is not
definitely specified or noted, 26 gauge galvanized steel or
iron shall be provided.
4.06 VAPOR BARRIER COURSE
Provide a vapor barrier course on concrete roof decks before
installing roof insulation. Vapor barriers shall consist of
two plies of 15 pound asphalt-saturated or coa-tar pitch-sat-
urated felt lapped 19 inches or of one ply of 40 pound asphalt-
coated base sheet lapped 4 inches at all edges. Mop each sheet
of asphalt saturated felt with approximately 25 lbs. of hot
asphalt per 100 square foot. Felt shall not touch felt. Do
not mop top of vapor barrier course until just prior to placing
the insulation. Vapor barrier shall not be used as a temporary
roof.
On Concrete Decks
The method for applying the vapor barrier to the roof decks
including the proposed method of mopping, kind and type of
bitumen, method of nailing where required, venting, and the
minimum time interval between the placing of poured decks and
application of vapor barrier shall be in accordance with the
recommendations of the roofing manufacturer.
AS4-2
4.07 INSULATION UNDER BUILT-UP ROOFS
a. Type of Insulation
Rigid insulation under built-up roofs shall be of the
following types and thickness for the locations indicated
or specified:
Fiberboard Insulation
Apply fiberboard insulation under all built-up roofing.
Insulation shall be 1-inch thick. Insulation shall con-
form to Federal Specification LLL-I-535, Class C. Board
shall be treated to resist fungi and shall be vapor proofed
on both faces and all edges, or shall be asphalt impregnated.
b. Application of Insulation
Apply insulation over vapor barrier as specified. Apply
over incombustible decks and vapor barriers in a hot
mopping of asphalt using not less than 35 pound per 100
square foot. Lay insulation with joints in moderate con-
tact and end joints staggered. Neatly cut and fit insula-
tion around projections through roof and against nailing
strips; leave 1/4 inch joint between insulation and vertical
surfaces.
(1) Water Cut-offs
Provide water cut-offs of 12 inch strips of roofing
felt, bedded in hot bitumen. Extend felt over top
surface of insulation at least 4 inches and on to
roof surface at least 4 inches; lap strips 3 inches
at ends. Locate cut-offs 24 inches from and parallel
to intersecting vertical surfaces, around pipes and
vents and at intermediate cross joints at intervals
approximately l0 feet in each direction.
(2) Protection
Insulation and roof decks shall be dry when insulation
is installed. After installation, keep insulation dry
until permanent roofing or other covering is applied.
Protect insulation from damage due to construction
operations. Only as much insulation shall be laid as
can be covered by roofing the same day.
4.08 BUILT-UP ROOFING AND FELT FLASHINGS
a. Extent and Type
All roof surfaces shall be covered with a 20-year bonded
type built-up roofing installed in accordance with the
AS4-3
roofing manufacturer's current recommended specifications
for the type of deck shown or specified and with
modifications described herein. Roofing shall consist of
not less than four plies of 15 pound asphalt saturated
felt over thermal roof insulation. Roofing materials shall
be as manufactured by Johns-Manville or Barrett, and suit-
able for the slopes, decks and purposes intended. Lay felts
shingle method and cement together with hot asphalt.
b. Felt Flashings
Except where metal (or plastic) base flashing is indicated
or specified; install felt base flashings where built-up
roofs abut vertical surfaces. Felt flashing shall consist
of not less than 3 layers of 15 pound asphalt saturated
roofing felts and a cap sheet of 85 pound white mineral
surfaced roofing; each layer cemented, end joints lapped
3 inches.
c. Roof Surfacing
Apply surfacing material uniformly over top layer of roof-
ing felts and embed in a hot pouring of bitumen. Surfacing
material shall be hard clean gravel, applied at a rate of
400 pounds per 100 square foot. Surfacing materials shall
be graded from 1/4 inch to 5/8 inch in size. Apply sur-
facing as soon as possible after felts are installed.
4.09 METAL GRAVEL STOPS AND FASCIAS - (Formed Type)
Provide metal gravel stops (and fascia) at exposed edges of all
built-up roofs. Fabricate gravel stops from 26 U.S. Standard
guage zinc-coated sheet steel.
Form gravel stops and fascias to sizes and details indicated.
Extend flanges of gravel stops out 3-1/2 inches on top of built-
up roofing felts. Cover flanges of gravel stops with two strips
of bituminous-saturated roofing felt, mopped on. Metal in con-
tact with roofing shall be painted one coat of bituminous paint
before placing. Bottom layers of roofing felt at eaves shall be
turned up and back over the top of the upper plies, and cemented
down, to prevent bituminous drippage.
Form gravel stop in l0 foot straight sections with end joints,
lapped 4 inches and set in plastic cement. Where the gravel
stops extend down on vertical surface to form a finished fascia,
the bottom edge shall be fastened and held straight by hooking
over a previously placed edge strip. The edge strip shall be of
same metal as fascia; fasten edge strip to wood nailer with
nails spaced 4-inches apart.
AS4-4
ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATION NO. 5
HOLLOW METAL DOORS, FRAMES AND HARDWARE
5.01 METAL DOORS
All doors shall be as furnished by Fenestra, by approval,
standard, Factory-Mutual 16 gage face panel, full flush,
1-3/4" thick by dimension per schedules. Louvers, per
schedule, shall be Fen-Air adjustable, 13-3/4" X 24-1/2".
All Fenestra equipment will be furnished in accordance
with latest factory recommendations and specifications.
5.02 METAL FRAMES
All steel frames shall be as furnished by Fenestra Standard
16 gage steel, 2" jamb face by 5-1/4" depth. Frames shall be
mortised, reinforced, fitted with anchors and silencers, and
factory-primed.
5.03 HARDWARE
All lock sets shall be keyed alike and furnished with 2 keys
each. Each door will be supplied with the following items:
1-1/2 Fair Hinges, Fenestra 643B (T2106)
1 Lockset, Fenestra 9469 (161D)
1 Overhead Door Holder, Fenestra 1495 (ll61)
1 Aluminum Threshold, Fenestra 2325
AS5-1
ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATION NO. 8
PAINTING AND CAULKING
8.01 CAULKING
a. Material shall be "Vulcatex" or "Hornflex Thickol LP-32
Sealant" as manufactured by A. C. Horn Company, or
approved equal.
b. Vulcatex shall be used only on interior surfaces to
be caulked. Color shall be white.
c. Hornflex Thickol LP-32 Sealant shall be used only on
exterior surfaces to be caulked. Color shall be white.
d. Application shall be in strict accordance with the manu-
facturer's recommendations.
8.02 PAINTING
a. Scope of Work
(1) Extent
The work required under this section consists of
all painting and finishing work and related items
necessary to complete the work indicated on drawings
and described in the specifications.
Work includes, but is not limited to, miscellaneous
structural steel and metal exposed, fascia and gravel
guard, doors and door frames and plaster.
Work does not include shop priming and painting,
caulking, painting of mechanical and electrical
work, concrete or concrete masonry.
(2) Material
Paint shall be L. & S. Portland Cement Paint as
manufactured by General Paint Company, a division
of The Glidden Company, or approved equal.
(3) Color
Color selection will be by the Owner with approval
of the Engineer.
AS8-1
(4) All paint shall be delivered to the site in manufac-
turer's sealed containers and bearing the manufactur-
er's label.
(5) General Requirements
(a) Before starting any work, the Painting Sub-
contractor shall inspect all surfaces to be
painted or finished. Commencing of work shall
be construed as acceptance of the surface of
the Painting Sub-contractor.
(b) All surfaces will be dry and free from all
foreign matter before applying paint. No work
will be done under conditions which are unsuit-
able for the production of good results. Paint
shall not be applied when temperature is below
50°F.
(6) Painting
(a) All surfaces to be painted shall be prepared
for painting and all paint shall be applied
according to manufacturer's direction and shall
be subject to approval by the Engineer.
(b) Each coat shall be a perceptibly different shade
or color and shall be inspected by the Engineer
before following coat may be applied. Only
inspected coats found satisfactory by the Engineer
will be considered in determining number of coats
applied. Two coats minimum shall be applied to
coverage and condition acceptable to the Engineer.
(c) Touch up all scarred and abraded places on shop
primed work and smooth to avoid shoulders.
(7) Cleaning Up
The Contractor shall, upon completion, remove all paint
that has been spilled, slashed or spattered on any
surfaces and shall be responsible for marring the
surface finish of any item.
AS8-2
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS NO. 1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.O1 GENERAL
Comply with the General and Special Conditions and all other applic-
able portions of the Contract Documents. All conditions set forth in this
Specification are applicable to all of the following electrical specifications.
Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and perform all work'
and services necessary for or incidental to the furnishing and installation, com-
plete, of all electrical work, as shown on Drawings and as specified, in accordance
with provisions of the Contract Documents, and completely coordinated with work of
all other trades. ~
Although such work is not specifically shown or specified, furnish and
install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices inci-
dental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete electrical installation.
Drawings and Specifications are cooperative and supplementary. Portions
of work which can best be illustrated by drawings may not be included in Specifica-
tions portions best described by Specifications may not be depicted on Drawings.
Provide all items necessary or incidental to completely construct all electrical
work, whether called for in the Specifications or shown on Drawings.
Execute work using such methods, tech'niques, connections and tie-ins
which will cause the least interference with, and least possible interruption of,
existing utilities and services. All arrangements for work which will cause inter-
ferences and/or interruptions shall be scheduled well in advance with Owne~ Engineer,
all other affected trades, and authorities having jurisdiction. Where extended
outages may be necessary, in order to transfer electric services or control systems,
the authorities may require that the transfer be made in two or more separate stages,
with reenergization of circuits between stages. Be prepared to schedule around-the-
clock overtime at night and/or on weekends if necessary, to complete the transfer
with minimum inconvenience to the authorities, at no additional cost to Owner.
1.O2 QUALITY STANDARDS
Provide materials, perform work and install materials in strict accord-
ance with the latest requirements of the following;
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (U/L).
National Electric Code (NEC) of National Fire Protection Assoc. (NEPA).'
Other applicable codes and standards of NFPA.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
American Society for Testing and Materials (AS~).
Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
Federal, state and local codes,' laws, ordinances; and rules and regu-
lations of authorities having jurisdiction.
in case of conflict or disagreement between codes, laws, ordinances,
rules and regulations or within either document itself, the more stringent condition
shall govern.
ESl-1
Use only new and unused electrical materials, approved by Underwriter's
Laboratories, Inc. and bearing the UL label.
1.03 PERMITS, FEES, LICENSES, AND INSPECTIONS
Make arrangements for, obtain, and pay for necessary permits, licenses
and inspections. Pay all necessary fees in conjunction with all electrical work.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
Submit information to include but not necessarily limited to the
following:
Conduit and fittings Exhaust fan
600 Volt wire and cable Thermostat
Pull boxes
Wiring Devices 4
Lighting Fixtures
1.05 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES
Examine Drawings and Specifications, including Drawings and Specifica-
tions for work of other trades, to determine electrical requirements for process
systems, instrumentation power operated equipment, and for work of other trades.
Perform work in conformity with construction called for under other
portions of Specifications and afford other trades reasonable opportunity for
execution of their work. Properly connect and coordinate electrical work with work
of other trades at such a time and in such a manner as not to delay or interfere
with the progress of their work or the project.
Examine structure, building, and conditions under which electrical
work is to be installed for conditions detrimental to proper and timely comple-
tion of electrical work. Do not proceed with work until deficiencies or detrimental
conditions have been corrected. Report any delay or difficulties encountered in
installation of electrical work, or any condition which might make work unsuitable
to connect with or receive other work. Failure to so report shall constitute accept-
ance of other work as being fit and proper for the reception of electrical work.
1.06 PROTECTION OF r,~TERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
At all times, take such precautions as necessary to properly protect
all apparatus, fixtures, appliances, material, equipment and installations from
damage of any kind. Failure to provide such protection, to satisfaction of
Engineer will be sufficient cause for rejection of any particular piece or pieces
of materials, apparatus, equipment, etc., damaged.
1.07 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
All excavation and backfill of all classes required to install work in-
cluded in these sections of the Specifications shall be performed as a part of the
work of this Contractor. No extra payment will be made for rock excavation. Trenches
for all underground conduit shall be excavated to the specified depths. No roots, rock!
or foreign materials of any description shall be used in backfilling the trenches. Th~
backfill material shall be identical to the surrounding fill material and shall be
'ES~-2
placed in twelve (12') inch layers, wetted and compacted to the density of the adjacent
soil. This process shall be continued until the trenches are backfilled. All surplus
materials shall be hauled from the project by the Contractor at his expense. Where
possible bore under existing roads or paved surfaces to install conduit. Where paving
must be cut, repair to match existing.
Any sinking of surfaces over ditches, trenches, etc., including turf,
paving, curbs, etc., during guarantee period shall be repaired by this Contractor
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
In the course of ditching and backfilling, this Contractor shall main-
tain a diligent watch for utility services of any nature (water, gas, sewer, electrical,
etc.) to avoid damaging such services as may be encountered. Should damage to any
such service result from work performed by this Contractor, such repairs as may be
required to restore the damaged service to its prior undamaged conditions shall be
made by this Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
1.08 ACCESS TO EQUIPHENT
Locate switches, receptacles, pull boxes, control devices and other
similar equipment so that they are readily accessible and have all code required
clearances for operation, repair and maintenance. In general, such equipment is
not to be blocked or concealed except where specifically permitted.
1.09 CONCRETE WORK FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND APPARATUS
Furnish and install concrete auxiliary structures as specified, and
foundations for all free standing electrical equipment and apparatus.
Cooperate and coordinate with other trades to accurately determine
locations of concrete placement and to avoid conflicts with work of other trades.
Provide all anchor bolts, channel iron frames, etc., for incorpora-
tion into concrete foundations and slabs. Provide such items sufficiently in
advance of scheduled placement of items and concrete work to avoid delay in pro-
gress of work of other trades and project. Provide templates where necessary to
accurately place anchor bolts and other imbedded items.
1.10 LABELING OF EQUIPMENT
Label all electrical equipment not otherwise provided with nameplates,
such as panels, separately mounted safety switches, starters, control devices, con-
tractors, and similar equi. pment indicating item served or system controlled such as
"Air Handling Unit No. 3". Use engraved laminated plastic nameplates. Do not use
abbreviated references such as "AH-3" except where space is limited, as approved
by Engineer.
· ES1-3
1.11 TESTS
Upon completion of installation, test for complete and correct opera-
tion of all machines, appliances, motors, control systems, instruments, and
similar apparatus; test for panel load balance, short and open circuits and ground
wi. th and to satisfaction of Owner and Engineer. Perform other tests as specified
in individual sections.
1.12 CLEANUP
At frequent intervals during progress of work, thoroughly clean up
and remove from the premises all rubbish and debris resulting from electrical
work, especially including rubbish and debris which may be deposited inside
electrical equipment and enclosures.
At completion of work, comply with paragraph above. Further, leave
all electrical materials, equipment, and work furnished, and spaces occupied, clean
and ready for use and occupancy by Owner.
1 . 1 3 GUARANTEE
Comply with the guarantee requirements of the Contract Documents ex-
cept where a longer period is specified herein. When a longer period is otherwise
specified herein, for all or part of the work, the longer period shall apply. No
provision of the Specifications or the Contract Documents shall be valid which
limits the guarantee period to less than one year from the date of acceptance of
the work by the Owner.
Where manufacturers' guarantees expire before expiration date of
guarantees required by Contract Documents and Specifications, obtain and pay for
guarantee extensions from manufacturers where such guarantee extensions are neces-
sary to ensure compliance with provisions of Contract Documents and Specifications.
Provide such guarantee extensions at no additional cost to the Owner.
Without additional cost to the Owner, promptly remedy any defect or
functional deterioration, except that from ordinary and reasonable use, which
appreciably reduces the usefullness, reliability or efficiency of the work for
the purpose intended, or any departure from the standards oF construction required
by the Contract Documents and Specifications.
END OF SECTION.
ES1-4
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION NO. 2
BASIC ~TERIALS AND METHODS
2.01 GENERAL
Comply with Electrical Specification No~ 1. Furnish all labor, ma-
terials, tools, equipment, and perform all work and services necessary for or
incidental to the furnishing and installation, complete of all wiring materials
and methods as shown on drawings and as specified, in accordance with provisions
of the Contract Documents, and completely coordinated with work of all other
trades.
Although such work is not specifically shown or specified, furnish and
install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices inci-
dental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.
2.02 CONDUIT
Use PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit equal to "Rob-Kote" as
manufactured by Pittsburg Conduit Co., above ground and elbows to above ground,
use schedule 40 PVC below ground. Use weather proof PVC coated Greenfield last 6"
to any box or fitting when rising out of ground. Fittings for use with PVC coated
steel conduit are to be polyvinyl coated steel or cast iron, as manufactured by
Crouse-Hinds or equal, with PVC extensions on couplings and all other points where
conduits join fittings.
2.03 CONDUIT INSTALLATIONS
Place conduit installed in earth, in trench, 30 inch minimum below
grade. Do not backfill trench before observation by Engineer.
Run exposed conduit in straight.lines at right angles to or parallel
with walls, beams or columns~ Substantially support from structure by approved
type conduit straps, or conduit clamps at 8 foot maximum spacing to provide a
rigid installation. Do not use perforated strap hangers or iron baling wire. Do
not support conduit from other pipe, or install to prevent ready removal of other
pipe for repairs.
Use no conduit smaller than 3/4 inch.-. Size conduit in accordance with
N.E.C. unless a larger size is shown.
Do not install more than three 90 degree bends in any conduit run.
Where more bends are necessary, install a pull box. Use machine bends for sizes.
Make joints in threaded conduit watertight with electrically conductive
compound applied to male threads only. Cut square, ream smooth, and properly thread
field joints to receive couplings. No running threads permitted. Fit conduit ends
at switch and outlet boxes with an approved lock nut and bushing forming an approved
tight bond to box when screwed tightly in place.
Swab out all conduit with a dry swab to remove moisture and debris
before wire is drawn into place. Tightly plug ends of conduit with tapered wood
plugs or plastic inserts until wire is pulled. For spare' conduits or conduits
installed for use by others, prove'conduits clear by pulling a test mandrel through
and by leaving a pull wire in place.
ES2-1
All conduit runs shown are diagrammatic, except where specifically
detailed. Verify exact locations in field.
2.04 CONDUIT FITTINGS
Use only threaded fittings for rigid, type conduit. Install conduits
squarely into boxes. Rigidly clamp to box with locknut on outside and bushing on
inside. Use double locknuts where required by NEC. Use threaded, galvanized,
malleable iron bushings and tempered steel locknuts.
Use insulated bushings for all power conductors at points where
such conductors enter boxes, raceways, cabinets, auxiliary §utter, and any other
points where bushings are required by NEC.
Fill unused punched-out openings in boxes with proper closures.
Do not use aluminum or aluminum alloy outlet boxes switch boxes,
conduit fittings, or conduit bodies.
2.05 PULL BOXES
Provide watertight NEr,~ 4 pull boxes at locations indicated on the
drawings and as required to facilitate installation of conductors.
Boxes shall be hot-dip galvanized cast iron with neoprene gaskets
and stainless steel screws, O.Z. Type "YR" or equal.
Install boxes in 6" thick reinforced concrete pads providing not less
than a 6" perimeter around box.
Use watertight malleable iron hubs for all conduit entries - O.Z. Type
"CH" or equal.
2.06 600 VOLT WIRE AND CABLE
For circuits operating at 600 volts and below, use single conductor,
soft drawn, copper wire with 600 volt insulation. Use Type THW insulation for
power circuits. Use Type THWN insulation on conventional pilot control and
signal circuits.
Wire and cable by General Electric, Anaconda, Paranite, General
Cable, Simplex, U.S. Rubber, Okonite, or Phelps-Dodge.
Use no wire smaller than No. 12 AWG, except No. 14 may be used for
conventional pilot control and signal circuits. Size conductors to limit voltage
drop to NEC requirements.
Make splices and taps for smaller than No. 6 AWG wire with Minnesota
Mining Company, "Scotchlok" or Ideal "Wilngnut" insulated conical spring-type
connectors. Make splices and taps for No. 6 AWG wire and larger cable with ap-
proved solderless lugs and screw-type connectors as manufactured by Penn Union or
and approved equal. Tape With Scotch Brand No. 22 electrical, tape or an approved
equal.
ES2-2
Do not make splices and taps with crimp or indenter-type connectors,
except as specified for control circuits landed on terminal strips.
Do not use cable pulling lubrication compound containing petroleum or
other products which may deteriorate insulation.
Do not install conductors when ambient temperature is near minimum as
recommended by N.E.C. or manufacturer for installation of the particular type 6f
insulation.
Color code all conductors in accord with N.E.C. and paragraph "Color
Coding of Conductors" herein.
2.07 COLOR CODING OF CONDUCTORS
Color code all power wiring including~branch circuits, feeders and
emergency circuits.
Use following colors in lighting and power wiring:
120/240 Volt 277/480 Volt
Phase 1 Black Brown
Phase 2 Red Orange
Phase 3 Purple
Neutrals White Gray
Ground Green Green
In various control systems, color code wiring to enable proper iden-
tification of leads. Color coding of ends only will be acceptable for feeder
phase conductors.
2.08 NEMA AND NEC ENCLOSURE CLASS REQUIREMENTS
Undesignated indoor areas are to be NEMA 1, except where requirements
more stringent than NEh~ 1 are specified elsewhere for particular areas or partic-
ular types of equipment. Outdoor areas are to be NEMA 4 unless a more stringent
enclosure class is specified elsewhere for a particular outdoor areas.
2.09 INSTALLATION, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Install all power and control wiring in conduit. Do not use troughs,
trays, wireways, gutters, or similar construction in lieu of conduit except where
expressly indicated on Drawings.
Ground all conduit,~itche%fixtures, motors and motor equipment.
Adhere to code color for all ground conductors. Make ground continuity positive
throughout entire project.
Where weatherproof enclosures are indicated or required, use NEMA 4
watertight cast metal or stainless steel enclosures.
ES2-3
Neatly route all control and smaller power wiring through motor
control centers, control panels, terminal boxes and other terminal points.
Form into looms, trim, dress, lace and tie all wiring. Connections to control
devices on doors are to be arranged so that door can move freely and wire is
not abraded or pulled out of place. Tag all control wires at terminal points
and splice points with the applicable wire number from the control circuit.
If no wire number is given, assign an arbitrary number which is different
from the other wires in the same group or loom, so that each wire may be
readily traced throughout its route.
2.10 WIRING DEVICES
Furnish and install wiring devices at location as shown on the
plan. For interior switches and receptacles use galvanized steel device plates.
Use the following devices or equal:
Single Pole Switch, 15 Amp, 1/2 HP,12OV...Hubbell #1201
Duplex Receptacle, 20 Amp, 120V ........... Hubbell #5262
Weatherproof Receptacle Plate ........ . ..... Hubbell #5206
2.11 EXHAUST FAN
At location shown on plans furnish and install a Loren Cook Co.
#APD-16P17D (or equal) direct drive propeller type exhaust fan with automatic
louver, inside mesh screen, and mounting frame, 850 CFM @ 3/8" static pressure,
1/4 HP, 120V motor. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2.12 THERMOSTAT
At location shown on plans, furnish and install a Hone~ell #T451B
(or equal) line voltage thermostat with contacts rated 8 amperes @ 120V. Set
thermostat to start exhaust fan at 90 degrees.
2.13 TESTS
Cable tests: All 600 volt power cables shall be field tested to
determine that the installation is free from grounds or shorts except where
grounds are required as a part of the system. All circuits shall be tested with
a 500 volt Megger or an equivalent testing device and shall give a resistance
reading of not less than 100,000 ohms between conductors and ground.
END OF SECTION
ES2-4
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS NO. 3
SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION
3.01 GENERAL
Comply with Electrical Specification No. 1. Furnish all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, and perform all work and services necessary for
or incidental to the furnishing and installation, complete, of electrical
service, distribution and control systems as shown on drawings and as speci-
fied, in accordance with provisions of the Contract Documents, and completely
coordinated with work of all other trades.
Although such work is not specifically shown or specified, fur-
nish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and
devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete instal-
lation.
3.02 SCOPE OF WORK
Extend new 600 amp, 277/480 volt underground service to control
center. (Control center is described in Specification Section MS-4). From
control center extend circuits to pumps, lights, etc. as shown on the draw-
ings. Install conduits for control and instrumentation as shown on the draw-
ings.
Rework existing 60 ampere, 120/240 volt service to City of Dallas
meter vault. Relocate meter, service disconnect, etc. as required. Minimize
service interruption to existing meter vault.
3.03 SERVICE
Service is 277/400 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire from TP&L pad mounted
transformer. Metering is at transformer.
3.04 GROUNDING
Ground all neutral conductors, conduit systems, cabinets, equip-
ment, motor frames, etc., in accordance with the NEC and Municipal Codes and
Ordinances as a minimum requirement.
Install two driven ground rods for 280 volt system ground and
one driven ground rod for telephone service ground. Use 10~ long, 5/8"
diameter copper clad ground rods. Extend grounds to control center ground
bus and telephone board.
In all exterior conduits install a green insulated or bare
equipment~ound conductor as shown on the plans. Interior metal conduits will
serve as equipment ground conductors; make up all couplings and fittings tight.
ES3-1
3.05 EQUIP~,}ENT CONNECTIONS
Furnish and install all wiring for the connection of pump
and miscellaneous mechanical equipment, and other equipment as indicated on'elec-
trical drawings, except as otherwise shown or specified.
Installer is to coordinate with suppliers of various process equipment
packages to assure a complete, operating installation for each item. Motor sizes
shown on drawings are the sizes expected 'to be supplied but are not guaranteed.
Verify sizes and full load ampere ratings from nameplates of equipment delivered
to the jobsite. It is the responsibility of the Installer to verify that all
motors have properly sized thermal overload heater element protection. Provide
new thermal elements of'proper size in any case where elements are found to be
improperly sized, at no additional cost to Owner. Unless otherwise indicated,
single phase motors are to have a thermal device in each undergrounded leg, and
three phase motors are to have three overload relays, one in each phase.
Use PVC jacketed flexible steel "Sealtile" conduit for final connec-
tions to motors, other equipment expected to vibrate, and directly connected
equipment to be installed flush against a wall. Lengths of flexible connection is
to be as short as possible, and is not to exceed 24 inch.including approved
liquid-tight connectors on each end; except for direct connected equipment ins-
talled flush, lengths of flexible connection may be 36 inch maximum.
3.06 CONTROL A~D INSTRUMENTATION CIRCUITS
In general, no control circuits are called out specifically on Drawings.
Control circuits are to be furnished and installed as required by the control func-
tions specified. The word "control" embraces all specific functions such as control,
indication, alarm, signal, telemetering, interlock, and similar functions. Conven-
tional control wires are to be size.14 minimum. Provide special wire or cable as
specified by the applicable instrument manufacturer, as a minimum requirement.
Special wire or cable is also subject to approval of Engineer for suitability to
the proposed installation. Such suitability is to include but is not necessarily
limited to: physical strength; ability to carry the necessary signal the required
distance; and the ability to survice in the anticipated environment. Control
cables are to be sheathed with nylon, PVC or neoprene and must be strong enough to
withstand the pulling forces encountered during installation.
Where a control device is shown or specified, the number and type of
connections are to be as required to achieve the control functions shown and/or
specified. The exact numbers and types of control wires and special cables will
vary depending on the design of the instruments and controls actually furnished
by the successful bidder. Bidders are directed to coordinate with all proposed
suppliers of control equipment and systems.
END OF SECTION
ES3-2
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION NO. 4
LIGHTING
4.01 GENERAL
Comply with Electrical Specification No. 1. Furnish all labor,
materials, equipment and perform all work and services necessary for or inci-
dental to the furnishing and installation complete, of all lighting, as
shown on Drawings and as specified, in accordance with provisions of the Con-
tract Documents, and completely coordinaged with work of all other trades.
Although such work is not specifically shown or specified, fur-
nish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and
devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installa-
tion.
4.02 INTERIOR LIGHTING
Use Lithonia #C240 or equal 4' two lamp open fluorescent strip
fixture with 120 volt class P ballast and F40/CW lamps. Install fixture as
shown on the plans.
4.03 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
Use General Electric #C890N424 (or equal) 175 watt high pressure
sodium post top luminaire with photocell control mounted on G.E. #C996H003 (or
equal) 15' high round tapered galvanized steel anchor base pole with anchor
.. bolts. Install pole on 18" diameter, 5' deep reinforced concrete base.
END OF SECTION
ES4-1
· ;-;'. .~_ ........... ,.-. , '?---- , . ~.. ~ .
'.,,_ ..~,..~:. , ~ .:. ,. ,
I' -- ~ __ . , ~ . .~
+ ... ~ ....
. _ - _
~ ~ :~' ~ ....................... '~__
· .~.: .... .~ .~- ~ ......
- .: - - T / ~ '-.:~, --
' " ~
....1
' ! ~ - - ~,~'~ ~:- ~ ~ - ~ - -
- - ', & .... ~ .~ ~ , I ·
-. . -__ ....
- ~" -~ - .- - * - /-~- .......... ~ ~Z - ~ ' ' - ~' ~' '
',,
- - ~ - ~..%% ~ %~ . _.-' ! _
-,, ,~%%~ - , .~.. ....
% .,: ..
....... :~ -... :~. -_-~~/~: .... . . , _.
" ~'" ' '~" '-- ' ~ '~ ~:- - l~ .... ~ .... -- ::'--: '
~ .~'/'.. ,. ~. ::,. IL .... '
~ -~-'~::"'" .' '~' 77~- ~ ....
. i '~..". : ~ I
t~ :) /~-' -2--~'" ~ "
_.- . = ..- . L- . _ ,- ~ ..... =..~...: ...... . -
.-:- '.. ~ ' .
..: . .~...~....._
. .. ~ .~ . . / -
~ Z" .' ii, ,
· :~ ~ ; . . ..~ . .; ~
~ . -- = ' -/ -:~ .
"'~ - '~ --- '" ~ ;
[ ~ ..- · ...... -,.
,~~b~ ~ .... ., '~*" ~: ....... ~-' '~:..-'
~ / ,.t ~ / ...... '-~ --
~ .0 :, ~ .,,,,. : t '-
~ '~' · ' n ~-~I ~ ~ T-
I ~ ~ c I
--~ ~ z ~ '
" ' 'r ' '"
i o ~ j ffi o m ..
. Z .... ~- 0 ~: . ..
. ,~ . : ' t. i' :~2¢J .x...'
~r''~ ._ I ~ ~,~ ~ . ~ .
~ '~ ~! ¢ I
' i~ I I __ ~;' ., ' r [.2. ~
-- ~ .-. ~ ~
I ~ ~ ~ ' · ~.-'
'~ ~ ~ , z T- .
%.__ ~ ~;~ ~ = ~ ', . :.
~ %. ~ l .' .
~ · ~ ' .
,, ~0 0 .
· ~ - ~ :::-. ;.7.:; '.
-- ~ ': .." -. ~ ~.~
...2 .- . · m ¢
..2: c ~ 0 Z ~.~.~
ffi 0 : /' "-"':-' '~ ~
H { ~ .- '0
~ -/'' ~ I '
' i ~ I '
~ ~ -~-
~ ~ 4' I-¢~ ~
- ' I
m m mm m m m m m m m m mm m mm --- ...-- -- __
~ ... /t107-,~.· ,411 f/ftz;'?q~' ~ ,Ce
~ ~ t~ec,,han/bol Jo/n/~ith
t~ ~ ~ '~ ..... ~ ~..--~ .~. ' ..... -. '
_ _
m ~ ~ ~ ~ -m / m '~ ~
. m ---- -~-~-,o Ih ~a~~ :l ~ 4 m m 0 ~ ~ t I ~ ~ mai
" ~' ~ ' ' I / ~z ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ l
, I I $ Il / ! I i m ~ ~ ~ ~
I ~ '~ ~ I m ~ , l' / " I m m ~-
~- '- - f~m~-' / ~ ..... ,~' ~ · m ~
i%.'~; / ~ I . I - ] , · : ~
' "1 '~--? .................. ~
..~ '~' ~'~ .~~~~~t,: ~ ' ~ ~ ~
,-.,... ,, ~... ~ ._. .. ... . , , ~ . .~ R
~,> : .... ',...'-- .-. - ~ '-.. I~ '~ ~8,~-
~:_.~.. ,' '. .- ~ - ' ~ ', '-n , - ~ ,~. ~.'
,~.~>.' :. '-z '~ · : ~ ' ~ . . ~ .~ ~ ~ ~ , '.. : ~ · ~,~
· ' . '~ . · ' · . ' ~ ' . ' D~ ~ I ~ III - ~-~ ~ ~ ~ -.'~
~=_ ~ --~..:z.t-~-I.t'.--~..P~.-~.- ~..~'-~:~.-~~ t.,.'..~, ~ - -'. ~'=-?~:~ *.-.~
~Y. ~ __ ~ __ N, ~ ~'- ~ '- m--. - ~ ' ' 'l~:" q'~ ~ -.~
m ~ ~ ~ ~ I .-'. ~ ' I' '
0 ~ ~ ~1 lmm ~' '- ~ ~ m~.
--
m m m mm mm mm m m m m mm mm m mm mm mm mm m
i
Immmm m m mm mm mm mm m m m m m m m m m m m m